diff options
Diffstat (limited to '26653-h')
| -rw-r--r-- | 26653-h/26653-h.htm | 14842 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | 26653-h/images/hermann.jpg | bin | 0 -> 2530 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 26653-h/images/img001.jpg | bin | 0 -> 121176 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 26653-h/images/img002.jpg | bin | 0 -> 38460 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 26653-h/images/img003.jpg | bin | 0 -> 154215 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 26653-h/images/imgfrontis.jpg | bin | 0 -> 132099 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 26653-h/images/imgtitle.jpg | bin | 0 -> 126945 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 26653-h/images/r16.jpg | bin | 0 -> 1065 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | 26653-h/images/volume.jpg | bin | 0 -> 1817 bytes |
9 files changed, 14842 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/26653-h/26653-h.htm b/26653-h/26653-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..c28afd4 --- /dev/null +++ b/26653-h/26653-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,14842 @@ +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" + "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd"> + +<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml"> + <head> + <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=iso-8859-1" /> + <title> + The Project Gutenberg eBook of Up The Baltic, by William T. Adams (Oliver Optic). + </title> + <style type="text/css"> +/*<![CDATA[ XML blockout */ +<!-- + p { margin-top: .75em; + text-align: justify; + margin-bottom: .75em; + } + h1,h2,h3 { + text-align: center; /* all headings centered */ + clear: both; + } + hr { width: 33%; + margin-top: 2em; + margin-bottom: 2em; + margin-left: auto; + margin-right: auto; + clear: both; + } + + table {margin-left: auto; margin-right: auto;} + .tdp {padding: 10px;} + .tdp1 {padding: 4px;} + + body{margin-left: 10%; + margin-right: 10%; + } + + .box { width: 700px; + margin: 0 auto; + text-align: center; + padding: 1em; + border-style: none; } + + a { text-decoration: none; } + + .pagenum { visibility: hidden; + position: absolute; + left: 92%; + font-size: smaller; + text-align: right; + } /* page numbers */ + + .center {text-align: center;} + .smcap {font-variant: small-caps;} + + .caption {font-weight: bold; font-variant: small-caps; } + + .figcenter {margin: auto; text-align: center;} + + .figright {float: right; clear: right; margin-left: 1em; margin-bottom: 1em; + margin-top: 1em; margin-right: 0; padding: 0; text-align: center;} + + // --> + /* XML end ]]>*/ + </style> + </head> +<body> + + +<pre> + +The Project Gutenberg EBook of Up The Baltic, by Oliver Optic + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: Up The Baltic + Young America in Norway, Sweden, and Denmark + +Author: Oliver Optic + +Release Date: September 18, 2008 [EBook #26653] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK UP THE BALTIC *** + + + + +Produced by David Edwards, Anne Storer and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This +file was produced from scans of public domain material +produced by Microsoft for their Live Search Books site.) + + + + + + +</pre> + + + + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;"> +<img src="images/imgfrontis.jpg" width="600" height="372" alt="image" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Young America in Norway.</span> Page <a href="#Page_159">159</a>. +</div> + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 380px;"> +<img src="images/imgtitle.jpg" width="380" height="600" alt="Up the Baltic" title="" /> +</div> + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_1" id="Page_1">[Pg 1]</a></span></p> + +<h3><em>YOUNG AMERICA ABROAD—SECOND SERIES.</em></h3> + +<hr style="width: 25%;" /> + +<h1>UP THE BALTIC;</h1> + +<p class="center"><span class="smcap">or,</span></p> + +<h2>YOUNG AMERICA IN NORWAY,<br /> +SWEDEN, AND DENMARK.</h2> + +<p> </p> + +<p class="center"><span class="smcap"><strong>A Story of Travel and Adventure.</strong></span></p> + +<p> </p> + +<p class="center"><span class="smcap">by</span></p> +<h2>WILLIAM T. ADAMS.</h2> +<p style="margin-top: -1em;" class="center">(<em>OLIVER OPTIC</em>),</p> + +<p class="center"><span class="smcap">author of “outward bound,” “shamrock and thistle,” “red cross,”<br /> +“dikes and ditches,” “palace and cottage,”<br /> +“down the rhine,” etc.</span></p> + +<p> </p> + +<p class="center">BOSTON:<br /> +LEE AND SHEPARD, PUBLISHERS.<br /> +<span class="smcap">New York</span>:<br /> +<span class="smcap">lee, shepard and dillingham,</span><br /> +<span style="font-size: smaller;" class="smcap">Nos. 47 And 49 Greene St.</span><br /> +1875.</p> + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> + + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_2" id="Page_2">[Pg 2]</a></span></p> + +<p class="center"> +Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year 1871,<br /> +<span class="smcap">By</span> WILLIAM T. ADAMS,<br /> +In the Office of the Librarian of Congress, at Washington.</p> + +<p> </p><p> </p> + +<p class="center">Electrotyped at the Boston Stereotype Foundry,<br /> +No. 19 Spring Lane.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_3" id="Page_3">[Pg 3]</a></span></p> + +<p class="center">TO</p> + +<p class="center">MY EVER-CHEERFUL AND GOOD-NATURED FRIEND</p> + +<p class="center"><strong>SHEPARD K. MATTISON,</strong></p> + +<p class="center"><span class="smcap">whom i met for the first time at trollhätten, on the<br /> +göta canal, and with whom i journeyed through<br /> +sweden, russia, austria, spain, and portugal,</span></p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 107px;"> +<img src="images/volume.jpg" width="107" height="20" alt="This Volume" title="" /> +</div> + +<p class="center">IS RESPECTFULLY DEDICATED.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_5" id="Page_5">[Pg 5]</a></span></p> + +<h2>YOUNG AMERICA ABROAD.</h2> + +<p class="center"><span class="smcap">By</span> OLIVER OPTIC.</p> + +<div class="box"> +<p style="margin-left: 12em; text-indent: -1em;"> +A Library of Travel and Adventure in Foreign Lands. First<br /> +and Second Series; six volumes in each Series. 16mo.<br /> +Illustrated.</p></div> + +<div class='center'> +<table border="0" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="0" summary=""> + +<tr> <th colspan="2"><em>First Series.</em></th> </tr> +<tr> <td align='right'>I.</td> <td align='left'><em>OUTWARD BOUND</em>; <span class="smcap">or, Young America Afloat</span>.</td> </tr> +<tr> <td align='right'>II.</td> <td align='left'><em>SHAMROCK AND THISTLE</em>; <span class="smcap">or, Young America in Ireland and Scotland</span>.</td> </tr> +<tr> <td align='right'>III.</td> <td align='left'><em>RED CROSS</em>; <span class="smcap">or, Young America in England and Wales</span>.</td> </tr> +<tr> <td align='right'>IV.</td> <td align='left'><em>DIKES AND DITCHES</em>; <span class="smcap">or, Young America in Holland and Belgium</span>.</td> </tr> +<tr> <td align='right'>V.</td> <td align='left'><em>PALACE AND COTTAGE</em>; <span class="smcap">or, Young America in France and Switzerland</span>.</td> </tr> +<tr> <td align='right'>VI.</td> <td align='left'><em>DOWN THE RHINE</em>; <span class="smcap">or, Young America in Germany</span>.</td> </tr> + +<tr> <td align='right'> </td> <td align='left'></td> </tr> + +<tr> <th colspan="2"><em>Second Series.</em></th> </tr> +<tr> <td align='right'>I.</td> <td align='left'><em>UP THE BALTIC</em>; <span class="smcap">or, Young America in Norway, Sweden, and Denmark</span>.</td> </tr> +<tr> <td align='right'>II.</td> <td align='left'><em>NORTHERN LANDS</em>; <span class="smcap">or, Young America in Russia and Prussia</span>. In preparation.</td> </tr> +<tr> <td align='right'>III.</td> <td align='left'><em>CROSS AND CRESCENT</em>; <span class="smcap">or, Young America in Turkey and Greece</span>. In preparation.</td> </tr> +<tr> <td align='right'>IV.</td> <td align='left'><em>SUNNY SHORES</em>; <span class="smcap">or, Young America in Italy and Austria</span>. In preparation.</td> </tr> +<tr> <td align='right'>V.</td> <td align='left'><em>VINE AND OLIVE</em>; <span class="smcap">or, Young America in Spain and Portugal</span>. In preparation.</td> </tr> +<tr> <td align='right'>VI.</td> <td align='left'><em>ISLES OF THE SEA</em>; <span class="smcap">or, Young America Homeward Bound</span>. In preparation.</td> </tr> + +</table></div> + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_7" id="Page_7">[Pg 7]</a></span></p> +<h2>PREFACE.</h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">Up the Baltic</span>, +the first volume of the second series of +“<span class="smcap">Young America Abroad</span>,” +like its predecessors, is a record +of what was seen and done by the young gentlemen of the +Academy Squadron on its second voyage to Europe, embracing +its stay in the waters of Norway, Sweden, and Denmark. +Agreeably to the announcement made in the concluding volume +of the first series, the author spent the greater portion +of last year in Europe. His sole object in going abroad was +to obtain the material for the present series of books, and in +carrying out his purpose, he visited every country to which +these volumes relate, and, he hopes, properly fitted himself +for the work he has undertaken.</p> + +<p>In the preparation of <span class="smcap">Up the Baltic</span>, +the writer has used, +besides his own note-books, the most reliable works he could +obtain at home and in Europe, and he believes his geographical, +historical, and political matter is correct, and as +full as could be embodied in a story. He has endeavored to +describe the appearance of the country, and the manners and +customs of the people, so as to make them interesting to +young readers. For this purpose these descriptions are often +interwoven with the story, or brought out in the comments +of the boys of the squadron.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_8" id="Page_8">[Pg 8]</a></span> +The story is principally the adventures of the crew of the +second cutter, who attempted “an independent excursion +without running away,” which includes the career of a young +Englishman, spoiled by his mother’s indulgence, and of a +Norwegian waif, picked up by the squadron in the North +Sea.</p> + +<p>The author is encouraged to enter upon this second series +by the remarkable and unexpected success which attended +the publication of the first series. Difficult as it is to work +the dry details of geography and history into a story, the +writer intends to persevere in his efforts to make these books +instructive, as well as interesting; and he is confident that no +reader will fail to distinguish the good boys from the bad ones +of the story, or to give his sympathies to the former.</p> + +<p><span style="margin-left: 1em;" class="smcap">Harrison Square, Boston</span>,<br /> +<span style="margin-left: 3em;">May 10, 1871.</span></p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_9" id="Page_9">[Pg 9]</a></span></p> +<h2>CONTENTS.</h2> + +<div class='center'> +<table border="0" cellpadding="5" cellspacing="0" summary=""> + +<tr> <td align='right'></td> <td align='left'></td> <td align='right'><span class="smcap">page</span></td> </tr> +<tr> <td align='right'>I.</td> <td align='left'><a href="#Page_11"><span class="smcap">A Waif on the North Sea</span></a></td> <td align='right'>11</td> </tr> +<tr> <td align='right'>II.</td> <td align='left'><a href="#Page_27"><span class="smcap">Off the Naze of Norway</span></a></td> <td align='right'>27</td> </tr> +<tr> <td align='right'>III.</td> <td align='left'><a href="#Page_43"><span class="smcap">An Accident to the Second Cutter</span></a></td> <td align='right'>43</td> </tr> +<tr> <td align='right'>IV.</td> <td align='left'><a href="#Page_59"><span class="smcap">Norway in the Past and the Present</span></a></td> <td align='right'>59</td> </tr> +<tr> <td align='right'>V.</td> <td align='left'><a href="#Page_76"><span class="smcap">Mr. Clyde Blacklock and Mother</span></a></td> <td align='right'>76</td> </tr> +<tr> <td align='right'>VI.</td> <td align='left'><a href="#Page_92"><span class="smcap">A Day at Christiansand</span></a></td> <td align='right'>92</td> </tr> +<tr> <td align='right'>VII.</td> <td align='left'><a href="#Page_110"><span class="smcap">Up the Christiania Fjord</span></a></td> <td align='right'>110</td> </tr> +<tr> <td align='right'>VIII.</td> <td align='left'><a href="#Page_128"><span class="smcap">Sights of Christiania, and other Matters</span></a></td> <td align='right'>128</td> </tr> +<tr> <td align='right'>IX.</td> <td align='left'><a href="#Page_146"><span class="smcap">The Excursion without Running away</span></a></td> <td align='right'>146</td> </tr> +<tr> <td align='right'>X.</td> <td align='left'><a href="#Page_164"><span class="smcap">Gottenburg and Finkel</span></a></td> <td align='right'>164</td> </tr> +<tr> <td align='right'>XI.</td> <td align='left'><a href="#Page_181"><span class="smcap">On the Way to the Rjukanfos</span></a></td> <td align='right'>181</td> </tr> +<tr> <td align='right'>XII.</td> <td align='left'><a href="#Page_201"><span class="smcap">The Boatswain and the Briton</span></a></td> <td align='right'>201</td> </tr> +<tr> <td align='right'>XIII.</td> <td align='left'><a href="#Page_218"><span class="smcap">The Meeting of the Absentees</span></a></td> <td align='right'>218</td> </tr> +<tr> <td align='right'>XIV.</td> <td align='left'><a href="#Page_237"><span class="smcap">Through the Sound to Copenhagen</span></a></td> <td align='right'>237</td> </tr> +<tr> <td align='right'>XV.</td> <td align='left'><a href="#Page_255"><span class="smcap">Copenhagen and Tivoli</span></a></td> <td align='right'>255</td> </tr> +<tr> <td align='right'>XVI.</td> <td align='left'><a href="#Page_274"><span class="smcap">Excursion to Klampenborg and Elsinore</span></a></td> <td align='right'>274</td> </tr> +<tr> <td align='right'>XVII.</td> <td align='left'><a href="#Page_292"><span class="smcap">To Stockholm by Göta Canal</span></a></td> <td align='right'>292</td> </tr> +<tr> <td align='right'>XVIII.</td> <td align='left'><a href="#Page_310"><span class="smcap">Up the Baltic</span></a></td> <td align='right'>310</td> </tr> +<tr> <td align='right'>XIX.</td> <td align='left'><a href="#Page_329"><span class="smcap">The Cruise in the Little Steamer</span></a></td> <td align='right'>329</td> </tr> +<tr> <td align='right'>XX.</td> <td align='left'><a href="#Page_349"><span class="smcap">Stockholm and its Surroundings</span></a></td> <td align='right'>349</td> </tr> +</table></div> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_11" id="Page_11">[Pg 11]</a></span></p> +<h1>UP THE BALTIC;</h1> +<p class="center">OR,</p> +<h2>YOUNG AMERICA IN NORWAY, SWEDEN,<br /> +AND DENMARK.</h2> + +<hr style="width: 25%;" /> + +<h2>CHAPTER I.</h2> + +<p class="center"><strong>A WAIF ON THE NORTH SEA.</strong></p> + + +<p>“Boat on the weather bow, sir!” shouted the +lookout on the top-gallant forecastle of the +Young America.</p> + +<p>“Starboard!” replied Judson, the officer of the +deck, as he discovered the boat, which was drifting +into the track of the ship.</p> + +<p>“Starboard, sir!” responded the quartermaster +in charge of the wheel.</p> + +<p>“Steady!” added the officer.</p> + +<p>“Steady, sir,” repeated the quartermaster.</p> + +<p>By this time a crowd of young officers and seamen +had leaped upon the top-gallant forecastle, and into +the weather rigging, to obtain a view of the little boat, +which, like a waif on the ocean, was drifting down +towards the coast of Norway. It contained only a +single person, who was either a dwarf or a boy, for +he was small in stature. He lay upon a seat near +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_12" id="Page_12">[Pg 12]</a></span> +the stern of the boat, with his feet on the gunwale. +He was either asleep or dead, for though the ship +had approached within hail, he neither moved nor +made any sign. The wind was light from the southward, +and the sea was quite calm.</p> + +<p>“What do you make of it, Ryder?” called the +officer of the deck to the second master, who was on +duty forward.</p> + +<p>“It is a flat-bottomed boat, half full of water, with +a boy in it,” answered Ryder.</p> + +<p>“Hail him,” added the officer of the deck.</p> + +<p>“Boat, ahoy!” shouted Ryder, at the top of his +lungs.</p> + +<p>The person in the boat, boy or man, made no +reply. Ryder repeated the hail, but with no better +success. The officers and seamen held their breath +with interest and excitement, for most of them had +already come to the conclusion that the occupant of +the boat was dead. A feeling akin to horror crept +through the minds of the more timid, as they gazed +upon the immovable body in the dilapidated craft; for +they felt that they were in the presence of death, and +to young people this is always an impressive season. +By this time the ship was within a short distance of +the water-logged bateau. As the waif on the ocean +exhibited no signs of life, the first lieutenant, in charge +of the vessel, was in doubt as to what he should do.</p> + +<p>Though he knew that it was the first duty of a +sailor to assist a human being in distress, he was not +sure that the same effort was required in behalf of one +who had already ceased to live. Captain Cumberland, +in command of the ship, who had been in the +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_13" id="Page_13">[Pg 13]</a></span> +cabin when the excitement commenced, now appeared +upon the quarter-deck, and relieved the officer of the +responsibility of the moment. Judson reported the +cause of the unwonted scene on deck, and as the captain +discovered the little boat, just on the weather bow, +he promptly directed the ship to be hove to.</p> + +<p>“Man the main clew-garnets and buntlines!” +shouted the first lieutenant; and the hands sprang to +their several stations. “Stand by tack and sheet.”</p> + +<p>“All ready, sir,” reported the first midshipman, +who was on duty in the waist.</p> + +<p>“Let go tack and sheet! Up mainsail!” continued +Ryder.</p> + +<p>The well-trained crew promptly obeyed the several +orders, and the mainsail was hauled up in much less +time than it takes to describe the manœuvre.</p> + +<p>“Man the main braces!” proceeded the officer of +the deck.</p> + +<p>“Ready, sir,” reported the first midshipman.</p> + +<p>“Let go and haul.”</p> + +<p>As the hands executed the last order; all the yards +on the mainmast swung round towards the wind till +the light breeze caught the sails aback, and brought +them against the mast. The effect was to deaden the +headway of the ship.</p> + +<p>“Avast bracing!” shouted the first lieutenant, when +the yards on the mainmast were about square.</p> + +<p>In a few moments the onward progress of the +Young America was entirely checked, and she lay +motionless on the sea. There were four other vessels +in the squadron, following the flag-ship, and each of +them, in its turn, hove to, or came up into the wind.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_14" id="Page_14">[Pg 14]</a></span> +“Fourth cutters, clear away their boat!” continued +the first lieutenant, after he had received his order +from the captain. “Mr. Messenger will take charge +of the boat.”</p> + +<p>The young officer indicated was the first midshipman, +whose quarter watch was then on duty.</p> + +<p>“All the fourth cutters!” piped the boatswain’s +mate, as Messenger crossed the deck to perform the +duty assigned to him.</p> + +<p>“He’s alive!” shouted a dozen of the idlers on the +rail, who had not removed their gaze from the waif in +the small boat.</p> + +<p>“He isn’t dead any more than I am!” added a +juvenile tar, springing into the main rigging, as if to +demonstrate the amount of his own vitality.</p> + +<p>The waif in the bateau had produced this sudden +change of sentiment, and given this welcome relief +to the crew of the Young America, by rising from +his reclining posture, and standing up in the water at +the bottom of his frail craft. He gazed with astonishment +at the ship and the other vessels of the squadron, +and did not seem to realize where he was.</p> + +<p>“Avast, fourth cutters!” interposed the first lieutenant. +“Belay, all!”</p> + +<p>If the waif was not dead, it was hardly necessary to +lower a boat to send to his relief; at least not till it +appeared that he needed assistance.</p> + +<p>“Boat, ahoy!” shouted Ryder.</p> + +<p>“On board the ship,” replied the waif, in tones not +at all sepulchral.</p> + +<p>“What are you doing out here?” demanded the +first lieutenant.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_15" id="Page_15">[Pg 15]</a></span> +“Nothing,” replied the waif.</p> + +<p>“Will you come on board the ship?”</p> + +<p>“Yes, if you will let me,” added the stranger, as he +picked up a broken oar, which was floating in the +water on the bottom of his boat.</p> + +<p>“Yes, come on board,” answered the first lieutenant, +prompted by Captain Cumberland, who was +quite as much interested in the adventure as any of his +shipmates.</p> + +<p>The waif, using the broken oar as a paddle, worked +his water-logged craft slowly towards the ship. The +accommodation ladder was lowered for his use, and +in a few moments, with rather a heavy movement, as +though he was lame, or much exhausted, he climbed +up the ladder, and stepped down upon the ship deck.</p> + +<p>“Fill away again!” said the captain to the first lieutenant, +as a curious crowd began to gather around the +stranger. Ryder gave the necessary orders to brace +up the main yards, and set the mainsail again, and the +ship was soon moving on her course towards the Naze +of Norway, as though nothing had occurred to interrupt +her voyage.</p> + +<p>“What are you doing out here, in an open boat, +out of sight of land?” asked Captain Cumberland, +while the watch on deck were bracing up the yards.</p> + +<p>The waif looked at the commander of the Young +America, and carefully examined him from head to +foot. The elegant uniform of the captain seemed to +produce a strong impression upon his mind, and he +evidently regarded him as a person of no small consequence. +He did not answer the question put to +him, seeming to be in doubt whether it was safe and +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_16" id="Page_16">[Pg 16]</a></span> +proper for him to do so. Captain Cumberland was +an exceedingly comely-looking young gentleman, tall +and well formed in person, graceful and dignified in +his manners; and if he had been fifty years old, the +stranger before him could not have been more awed +and impressed by his bearing. So far as his personal +appearance was concerned, the waif appeared to have +escaped from the rag-bag, and to have been out long +enough to soil his tatters with oil, tar, pitch, and dirt. +Though his face and hands, as well as other parts of +his body, were very dirty, his eye was bright, and, +even seen through the disguise of filth and rags that +covered him, he was rather prepossessing.</p> + +<p>“What is your name?” asked Captain Cumberland, +finding his first question was not likely to be +answered.</p> + +<p>“Ole Amundsen,” replied the stranger, pronouncing +his first name in two syllables.</p> + +<p>“Then you are not English.”</p> + +<p>“No, sir. Be you?”</p> + +<p>“I am not; we are all Americans in this ship.”</p> + +<p>“Americans!” exclaimed Ole, opening his eyes, +while a smile beamed through the dirt on his face. +“Are you going to America now?”</p> + +<p>“No; we are going up the Baltic now,” replied +Captain Cumberland; “but we shall return to America +in the course of a year or two.”</p> + +<p>“Take me to America with you—will you?” continued +Ole, earnestly. “I am a sailor, and I will +work for you all the time.”</p> + +<p>“I don’t know about that. You must speak to the +principal.” +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_17" id="Page_17">[Pg 17]</a></span></p> + +<p>“Who’s he?”</p> + +<p>“Mr. Lowington. He is in the cabin now. +Where do you belong, Ole?”</p> + +<p>“I don’t belong anywhere,” answered the waif, +looking doubtfully about him.</p> + +<p>“Where were you born?”</p> + +<p>“In Norway, sir.”</p> + +<p>“Then you are a Norwegian.”</p> + +<p>“I reckon I am.”</p> + +<p>“In what part of Norway were you born?”</p> + +<p>“In Bratsberg.”</p> + +<p>“That’s where all the brats come from,” suggested +Sheridan.</p> + +<p>“This one came from there, at any rate,” added +Mayley. “But where is Bratsberg, and what is it?”</p> + +<p>“It is an <em>amt</em>, or province, in the south-eastern part +of Norway.”</p> + +<p>“I came from the town of Laurdal,” said Ole.</p> + +<p>“Do the people there speak English as well as you +do?” asked the captain.</p> + +<p>“No, sir. I used to be a <em>skydskarl</em>, and—”</p> + +<p>“A what?” demanded the crowd.</p> + +<p>“A <em>skydskarl</em>—a boy that goes on a cariole to +take back the horses. I learned a little English from +the Englishmen I rode with; and then I was in England +almost a year.”</p> + +<p>“But how came you out here, alone in an open +boat?” asked the captain, returning to his first +inquiry.</p> + +<p>Ole put one of his dirty fingers in his mouth, and +looked stupid and uncommunicative. He glanced at +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_18" id="Page_18">[Pg 18]</a></span> +the young officers around him, and then over the rail +at the sea.</p> + +<p>“Were you wrecked?” inquired the captain.</p> + +<p>“No, sir; not wrecked,” replied Ole. “I never +was wrecked in my life.”</p> + +<p>“What are you doing out here, out of sight of land, +in a boat half full of water?” persisted the captain.</p> + +<p>“Doing nothing.”</p> + +<p>“Did you get blown off from the shore?”</p> + +<p>“No, sir; a southerly wind wouldn’t blow anybody +off from the south coast of Norway,” answered +Ole, with a smile which showed that he had some +perception of things absurd in themselves.</p> + +<p>“You are no fool.”</p> + +<p>“No, sir, I am not; and I don’t think you are,” +added Ole, again glancing at Captain Cumberland +from head to foot.</p> + +<p>The young tars all laughed at the waif’s retort, and +the captain was not a little nettled by the remark. +He pressed Ole rather sharply for further information +in regard to his antecedents; but the youth was silent +on this point. While the crowd were anxiously waiting +for the stranger to declare himself more definitely, +eight bells sounded at the wheel, and were repeated +on the large bell forward by the lookout. From each +vessel of the fleet the bells struck at nearly the same +moment, and were followed by the pipe of the boatswain’s +whistle, which was the signal for changing +the watch. As the officers of the ship were obliged +to attend to their various duties, Ole Amundsen was +left alone with the captain. The waif still obstinately +refused to explain how he happened to be alone in a +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_19" id="Page_19">[Pg 19]</a></span> +water-logged boat, asleep, and out of sight of land, +though he promptly answered all other questions +which were put to him.</p> + +<p>Mr. Lowington, the principal of the Academy +Squadron, was in the main cabin, though he had +been fully informed in regard to the events which +had transpired on deck. The young commander despaired +of his own ability to extort an explanation +from the waif, and he concluded to refer the matter +to the principal.</p> + +<p>“How long have you been in that boat?” asked +Captain Cumberland, as he led the way towards the +companion ladder.</p> + +<p>“Eighteen hours,” answered Ole, after some hesitation, +which, perhaps, was only to enable him to count +up the hours.</p> + +<p>“Did you have anything to eat?”</p> + +<p>“No, sir.”</p> + +<p>“Nothing?”</p> + +<p>“Not a thing.”</p> + +<p>“Then you are hungry?”</p> + +<p>“I had a little supper last night—not much,” continued +Ole, apparently counting the seams in the deck, +ashamed to acknowledge his human weakness.</p> + +<p>“You shall have something to eat at once.”</p> + +<p>“Thank you, sir.”</p> + +<p>Captain Cumberland therefore conducted the stranger +to the steerage, instead of the main cabin, and +directed one of the stewards to give him his supper. +The man set half a cold boiled ham on one of the +mess tables, with an abundant supply of bread and +butter. Cutting off a large slice of the ham, he placed +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_20" id="Page_20">[Pg 20]</a></span> +it on the plate before Ole, whose eyes opened wide +with astonishment, and gleamed with pleasure. Without +paying much attention to the forms of civilization, +the boy began to devour it, with the zeal of one who +had not tasted food for twenty-four hours. Captain +Cumberland smiled, but with becoming dignity, at the +greediness of the guest, before whom the whole slice +of ham and half a brick loaf disappeared almost in a +twinkling. The steward appeared with a pot of coffee, +in time to cut off another slice of ham, which the +waif attacked with the same voracity as before. When +it was consumed, and the young Norwegian glanced +wistfully at the leg before him, as though his capacity +for cold ham was not yet exhausted, the captain began +to consider whether he ought not to consult the +surgeon of the ship before he permitted the waif to +eat any more. But the steward, like a generous host, +seemed to regard the quantity eaten as complimentary +testimony to the quality of the viands, and helped +him to a third slice of the ham. He swallowed a +pint mug of coffee without stopping to breathe.</p> + +<p>As the third slice of ham began to wax small before +the voracious Norwegian, Captain Cumberland became +really alarmed, and determined to report at +once to the principal and the surgeon for instructions. +Knocking at the door of the main cabin, he was admitted. +Dr. Winstock assured him there was no danger +to the guest; he had not been without food long enough +to render it dangerous for him fully to satisfy himself. +The quantity eaten might make him uncomfortable, +and even slightly sick, but it would do the gourmand +no real injury. The captain returned to the steerage, +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_21" id="Page_21">[Pg 21]</a></span> +where Ole had broken down on his fourth slice of +ham; but he regarded it wistfully, and seemed to regret +his inability to eat any more.</p> + +<p>“That’s good,” said he, with emphasis. “It’s the +best supper I ever ate in my life. I like this ship; I +like the grub; and I mean to go to America in her.”</p> + +<p>“We will see about that some other time; but if +you don’t tell us how you happened to be off here, I +am afraid we can do nothing for you,” replied the captain. +“If you feel better now, we will go and see the +principal.”</p> + +<p>“Who’s he?” asked Ole.</p> + +<p>“Mr. Lowington. You must tell him how you happened +to be in that leaky boat.”</p> + +<p>“Perhaps I will. I don’t know,” added Ole, doubtfully, +as he followed the commander into the main +cabin.</p> + +<p>Captain Cumberland explained to the principal the +circumstances under which Ole had come on board, +and that he declined to say anything in regard to the +strange situation in which he had been discovered.</p> + +<p>“Is the captain here?” asked the midshipman of +the watch, at the steerage door.</p> + +<p>“Yes,” replied Captain Cumberland.</p> + +<p>“Mr. Lincoln sent me down to report a light on +the lee bow, sir.”</p> + +<p>“Very well. Where is Mr. Beckwith?”</p> + +<p>“In the cabin, sir.”</p> + +<p>The captain left the main cabin, and entered the after +cabin, where he found Beckwith, the first master, +attended by the second and third, examining the large +chart of the North Sea.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_22" id="Page_22">[Pg 22]</a></span> +“Light on the lee bow, sir,” said the first master.</p> + +<p>“Do you make it out?”</p> + +<p>“Yes; we are all right to the breadth of a hair,” +added the master, delighted to find that his calculations +had proved to be entirely correct. “It is Egero Light, +and we are about fifty miles from the Naze of Norway. +We are making about four knots, and if the +breeze holds, we ought to see Gunnarshoug Light by +one o’clock.”</p> + +<p>Captain Cumberland went on deck to see the light +reported. Though it was half past eight, the sun had +but just set, and the light, eighteen miles distant, could +be distinctly seen. It created a great deal of excitement +and enthusiasm among the young officers and +seamen, who had read enough about Norway to be +desirous of seeing it. For weeks the young gentlemen +on board the ship had been talking of Norway, and +reading up all the books in the library relating to the +country and its people. They had read with interest +the accounts of the various travellers who had visited +it, including Ross Brown, in Harper’s Monthly, and +Bayard Taylor, and had studied Harper, Murray, +Bradshaw, and other Guides on the subject. The +more inquiring students had read the history of Norway, +and were well prepared to appreciate a short +visit to this interesting region.</p> + +<p>They had just come from the United States, having +sailed in the latter part of March. The squadron had +had a fair passage, and the students hoped to be in +Christiansand by the first day of May; and now nothing +less than a dead calm for forty-eight hours could +disappoint their hopes. Five years before, the Young +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_23" id="Page_23">[Pg 23]</a></span> +America and the Josephine, her consort, had cruised +in the waters of Europe, and returned to America +in the autumn. It had been the intention of the principal +to make another voyage the next year, go up the +Baltic, and winter in the Mediterranean; but the war +of 1866 induced him to change his plans. Various +circumstances had postponed the cruise until 1870, +when it was actually commenced.</p> + +<p>The Young America was the first, and for more +than a year the only, vessel belonging to the Academy. +The Josephine, a topsail schooner, had been +added the second year; and now the Tritonia, a vessel +of the same size and rig, was on her first voyage. +The three vessels of the squadron were officered and +manned by the students of the Academy. As on the +first cruise, the offices were the rewards of merit bestowed +upon the faithful and energetic pupils. The +highest number of merits gave the highest office, and +so on through the several grades in the cabin, and the +petty offices in the steerage. The routine and discipline +of the squadron were substantially the same as +described in the first series of these volumes, though +some changes had been made, as further experience +suggested. Instead of quarterly, as before, the offices +were given out every month. Captains were not retired +after a single term, as formerly, but were obliged +to accept whatever rank and position they earned, like +other students.</p> + +<p>There was no change from one vessel to another, +except at the end of a school year, or with the permission +of the principal. The ship had six instructors, +three of whom, however, lectured to all the students +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_24" id="Page_24">[Pg 24]</a></span> +in the squadron, and each of the smaller vessels had +two teachers. Mr. Lowington was still the principal. +He was the founder of the institution; and his high +moral and religious principles, his love of justice, as +well as his skill, firmness, and prudence, had made it +a success in spite of the many obstacles which continually +confronted it. As a considerable portion of the +students in the squadron were the spoiled sons of rich +men, who had set at defiance the rules of colleges and +academies on shore, it required a remarkable combination +of attributes to fit a gentleman for the difficult and +trying position he occupied.</p> + +<p>Mr. Fluxion was the first vice-principal in charge +of the Josephine. He was a thorough seaman, a good +disciplinarian, and a capital teacher; but he lacked +some of the high attributes of character which distinguished +the principal. If any man was fit to succeed +Mr. Lowington in his responsible position, it was Mr. +Fluxion; but it was doubtful whether, under his sole +administration, the institution could be an entire success. +His love of discipline, and his energetic manner +of dealing with delinquents, would probably have +increased the number of “rows,” mutinies, and runaways.</p> + +<p>The second vice-principal, in charge of the Tritonia, +was Mr. Tompion, who, like his two superiors +in rank, had formerly been an officer of the navy. +Though he was a good sailor, and a good disciplinarian, +he lacked that which a teacher needs most—a +hearty sympathy with young people.</p> + +<p>The principal and the two vice-principals were instructors +in mathematics and navigation in their respective +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_25" id="Page_25">[Pg 25]</a></span> +vessels. Mr. Lowington had undertaken this +task himself, because he felt the necessity of coming +more in contact with the student than his position as +mere principal required. It tended to promote friendly +relations between the governor and the governed, +by creating a greater sympathy between them.</p> + +<p>The Rev. Mr. Agneau still served as chaplain. In +port, and at sea when the weather would permit, two +services were held in the steerage every Sunday, which +were attended, at anchor, by the crew of all the vessels. +Prayers were said morning and evening, in the +ship by the chaplain, in the schooners by the vice-principal +or one of the instructors.</p> + +<p>Dr. Winstock was the instructor in natural philosophy +and chemistry, as well as surgeon and sanitary +director. He was a good and true man, and generally +popular among the students. Each vessel had an +adult boatswain and a carpenter, and the ship a sailmaker, +to perform such work as the students could not +do, and to instruct them in the details of practical seamanship.</p> + +<p>After the lapse of five years, hardly a student remained +of those who had cruised in the ship or her +consort during the first voyage. But in addition to +the three vessels which properly constituted the squadron, +there were two yachts, each of one hundred and +twenty tons. They were fore-and-aft schooners, of +beautiful model, and entirely new. The one on the +weather wing of the fleet was the Grace, Captain Paul +Kendall, whose lady and two friends were in the +cabin. Abreast of her sailed the Feodora, Captain +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_26" id="Page_26">[Pg 26]</a></span> +Robert Shuffles, whose wife was also with him. Each +of these yachts had a first and second officer, and a +crew of twenty men, with the necessary complement +of cooks and stewards. They were part of the fleet, +but not of the Academy Squadron.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_27" id="Page_27">[Pg 27]</a></span></p> +<h2>CHAPTER II.</h2> + +<p class="center"><strong>OFF THE NAZE OF NORWAY.</strong></p> + + +<p>Mr. Lowington examined Ole Amundsen +very carefully, in order to ascertain what disposition +should be made of him. He told where he +was born, how he had learned English, and where +he had passed the greater portion of his life, just as +he had related these particulars to Captain Cumberland.</p> + +<p>“But how came you out here in an open boat?” +asked the principal.</p> + +<p>Ole examined the carpet on the floor of the cabin, +and made no reply.</p> + +<p>“Won’t you answer me?” added Mr. Lowington.</p> + +<p>The waif was still silent.</p> + +<p>“You have been to sea?”</p> + +<p>“Yes, sir; I was six months in a steamer, and over +two years in sailing vessels,” answered Ole, readily.</p> + +<p>“What steamer were you in?”</p> + +<p>“I was in the Drammen steamer a while; and I +have been three trips down to Copenhagen and Gottenburg, +one to Lübeck, one to Stettin, and one to +Stockholm.”</p> + +<p>“Have you been in a steamer this season?”</p> + +<p>“No, sir.”</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_28" id="Page_28">[Pg 28]</a></span> +“Then you were in a sailing vessel.”</p> + +<p>Ole would not say that he had been in any vessel +the present season.</p> + +<p>“Where is your home now?” asked the principal, +breaking the silence again.</p> + +<p>“Haven’t any.”</p> + +<p>“Have you a father and mother?”</p> + +<p>“Both dead, sir.”</p> + +<p>“Have you any friends?”</p> + +<p>“Friends? I don’t believe I have.”</p> + +<p>“Any one that takes care of you?”</p> + +<p>“Takes care of me? No, sir; I’m quite certain I +haven’t any one that takes care of me. I take care of +myself, and it’s heavy work I find it, sometimes, I can +tell you.”</p> + +<p>“Do you ever go fishing?”</p> + +<p>“Yes, sir, sometimes.”</p> + +<p>“Have you been lately?”</p> + +<p>Ole was silent again.</p> + +<p>“I wish to be your friend, Ole.”</p> + +<p>“Thank you, sir,” added Ole, bowing low.</p> + +<p>“But in order to know what to do for you, I must +know something about your circumstances.”</p> + +<p>“I haven’t any circumstances, sir. I lost ’em all,” +replied Ole, gravely and sadly, as though he had met +with a very serious loss.</p> + +<p>Dr. Winstock could not help laughing, but it was +impossible to decide whether the boy was ignorant of +the meaning of the word, or was trying to perpetrate +a joke.</p> + +<p>“How did you happen to lose your circumstances, +Ole?” asked Mr. Lowington.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_29" id="Page_29">[Pg 29]</a></span> +“When my mother died, Captain Olaf took ’em.”</p> + +<p>“Indeed; and who is Captain Olaf?”</p> + +<p>Ole looked at the principal, and then returned his +gaze to the cabin floor, evidently not deeming it prudent +to answer the question.</p> + +<p>“Is he your brother?”</p> + +<p>“No, sir.”</p> + +<p>“Your uncle?”</p> + +<p>“No, sir.”</p> + +<p>Ole could not be induced to say anything more +about Captain Olaf, and doubtless regretted that he +had even mentioned his name. The waif plainly confounded +“circumstances” and property. Mr. Lowington +several times returned to the main inquiry, but +the young man would not even hint at the explanation +of the manner in which he had come to be a waif on +the North Sea, in an open boat, half full of water. +He had told the captain that he was not wrecked, and +had not been blown off from the coast. He would +make no answer of any kind to any direct question +relating to the subject.</p> + +<p>“Well, Ole, as you will not tell me how you came +in the situation in which we found you, I do not see +that I can do anything for you,” continued Mr. Lowington. +“The ship is bound to Christiansand, and +when we arrive we must leave you there.”</p> + +<p>“Don’t leave me in Christiansand, sir. I don’t +want to be left there.”</p> + +<p>“Why not?”</p> + +<p>Ole was silent again. Both the principal and the +surgeon pitied him, for he appeared to be a friendless +orphan; certainly he had no friends to whom he +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_30" id="Page_30">[Pg 30]</a></span> +wished to go, and was only anxious to remain in the +ship, and go to America in her.</p> + +<p>“You may go into the steerage now, Ole,” said the +principal, despairing of any further solution of the +mystery.</p> + +<p>“Thank you, sir,” replied Ole, bowing low, and +backing out of the cabin as a courtier retires from +the presence of a sovereign.</p> + +<p>“What do you make of him, doctor?” added Mr. +Lowington, as the door closed upon the waif.</p> + +<p>“I don’t make anything of him,” replied Dr. Winstock. +“The young rascal evidently don’t intend that +we should make anything of him. He’s a young +Norwegian, about fifteen years old, with neither father +nor mother; for I think we may believe what he has +said. If he had no regard to the truth, it was just as +easy for him to lie as it was to keep silent, and it would +have been more plausible.”</p> + +<p>“I am inclined to believe that he is a runaway, +either from the shore or from some vessel,” said the +principal. “He certainly cannot have been well +treated, for his filthy rags scarcely cover his body; +and he says that the supper he had to-night was the +best he ever ate in his life. It was only coffee, cold +ham, and bread and butter; so he cannot have been a +high liver. He seems to be honest, and I pity him.”</p> + +<p>“But he is too filthy to remain on board a single +hour. I will attend to his sanitary condition at once,” +laughed the doctor. “He will breed a leprosy among +the boys, if he is not taken care of.”</p> + +<p>“Let the purser give you a suit of clothes for him, +for we can’t do less than this for him.”</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_31" id="Page_31">[Pg 31]</a></span> +The doctor left the cabin, and Ole was taken to the +bath-room by one of the stewards, and compelled to +scrub himself with a brush and soap, till he was made +into a new creature. He was inclined to rebel at first, +for he had his national and inborn prejudice against +soap and water in combination; but the sight of the +suit of new clothes overcame his constitutional scruples. +The steward was faithful to his mission, and +Ole left dirt enough in the bath-tub to plant half a +dozen hills of potatoes. He looked like a new being, +even before he had donned the new clothes. His light +hair, cut square across his forehead, was three shades +lighter when it had been scrubbed, and deprived of +the black earth, grease, and tar, with which it had +been matted.</p> + +<p>The steward was interested in his work, for it is a +pleasure to any decent person to transform such a +leper of filth into a clean and wholesome individual. +Ole put on the heavy flannel shirt and the blue frock +which were handed to him, and smiled with pleasure +as he observed the effect. He was fitted to a pair of +seaman’s blue trousers, and provided with socks and +shoes. Then he actually danced with delight, and evidently +regarded himself as a finished dandy; for never +before had he been clothed in a suit half so good. It +was the regular uniform of the crew of the ship.</p> + +<p>“Hold on a moment, my lad,” said Muggs, the +steward, as he produced a pair of barber’s shears. +“Your barber did not do justice to your figure-head, +the last time he cut your hair.”</p> + +<p>“I cut it myself,” replied Ole.</p> + +<p>“I should think you did, and with a bush scythe.”</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_32" id="Page_32">[Pg 32]</a></span> +“I only hacked off a little, to keep it out of my +eyes. Captain Olaf always used to cut it.”</p> + +<p>“Who’s Captain Olaf?” asked Muggs.</p> + +<p>Ole was silent, but permitted the steward to remove +at will the long, snarly white locks, which covered his +head. The operator had been a barber once, and received +extra pay for his services on board the ship in +this capacity. He did his work in an artistic manner, +parting and combing the waif’s hair as though he were +dressing him for a fashionable party. He put a sailor’s +knot in the black handkerchief under the boy’s collar, +and then placed the blue cap on his head, a little on +one side, so that he looked as jaunty as a dandy man-of-war’s-man.</p> + +<p>“Now put on this jacket, my lad, and you will be +all right,” continued the steward, as he gazed with +pride and pleasure upon the work of his hands.</p> + +<p>“More clothes!” exclaimed Ole. “I shall be baked. +I sweat now with what I have on.”</p> + +<p>“It’s hot in here; you will be cool enough when +you go on deck. Here’s a pea-jacket for you, besides +the other.”</p> + +<p>“But that’s for winter. I never had so much clothes +on before in my life.”</p> + +<p>“You needn’t put the pea-jacket on, if you don’t +want it. Now you look like a decent man, and you +can go on deck and show yourself.”</p> + +<p>“Thank you, sir.”</p> + +<p>“But you must wash yourself clean every morning.”</p> + +<p>“Do it every day!” exclaimed Ole, opening his +eyes with astonishment.</p> + +<p>“Why, yes, you heathen,” laughed Muggs. “A +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_33" id="Page_33">[Pg 33]</a></span> +man isn’t fit to live who don’t keep himself clean. +Why, you could have planted potatoes anywhere on +your hide, before you went into that tub.”</p> + +<p>“I haven’t been washed before since last summer,” +added Ole.</p> + +<p>“You ought to be hung for it.”</p> + +<p>“You spend half your time washing yourselves—don’t +you?”</p> + +<p>“We spend time enough at it to keep clean. No +wonder you Norwegians have the leprosy, and the +flesh rots off the bones!”</p> + +<p>“But I always go into the water every summer,” +pleaded Ole.</p> + +<p>“And don’t wash yourself at any other time?”</p> + +<p>“I always wash myself once a year, and sometimes +more, when I get a good chance.”</p> + +<p>“Don’t you wash your face and hands every morning.”</p> + +<p>“Every morning? No! I haven’t done such a +thing since last summer.”</p> + +<p>“Then you are not fit to live. If you stay in this +ship, you must wash every day, and more than that +when you do dirty work.”</p> + +<p>“Can I stay in the ship if I do that?” asked Ole, +earnestly.</p> + +<p>“I don’t know anything about it.”</p> + +<p>“I will wash all the time if they will only let me +stay in the ship,” pleaded the waif.</p> + +<p>“You must talk with the principal on that subject. +I have nothing to do with it. Now, go on deck. Hold +up your head, and walk like a man.”</p> + +<p>Ole left the bath-room, and made his way up the +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_34" id="Page_34">[Pg 34]</a></span> +forward ladder. The second part of the starboard +watch were on duty, but nearly every person belonging +to the ship was on deck, watching the distant light, +which assured them they were on the coast of Norway. +The waif stepped upon deck as lightly as a +mountain sylph. The influence of his new clothes +pervaded his mind, and he was inclined to be a little +“swellish” in his manner.</p> + +<p>“How are you, Norway!” shouted Sanford, one of +the crew.</p> + +<p>“How are you, America,” replied Ole, imitating +the slang of the speaker.</p> + +<p>“What have you done with your dirt?” added Rodman.</p> + +<p>“Here is some of it,” answered Muggs, the steward, +as he came up the ladder, with Ole’s rags on a +dust-pan, and threw them overboard.</p> + +<p>“If you throw all his dirt overboard here, we shall +get aground, sure,” added Stockwell, as Ole danced +up to the group of students.</p> + +<p>“No wonder you feel light after getting rid of such +a load of dirt,” said Sanford.</p> + +<p>“O, I’m all right,” laughed Ole, good-naturedly; for +he did not seem to think that dirt was any disgrace or +dishonor to him.</p> + +<p>“How came you in that leaky boat, Norway?” demanded +Rodman; and the entire party gathered around +the waif, anxious to hear the story of his adventure.</p> + +<p>“I went into it.”</p> + +<p>“Is that so?” added Wilde.</p> + +<p>“Yes, sir.”</p> + +<p>“I say, Norway, you are smart,” replied Rodman.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_35" id="Page_35">[Pg 35]</a></span> +“Smart? Where?”</p> + +<p>“All over.”</p> + +<p>“I don’t feel it.”</p> + +<p>“But, Norway, how came you in that old tub, out +of sight of land?” persisted Rodman, returning to the +charge again.</p> + +<p>“I went into it just the same as one of you Americans +would have got into it,” laughed Ole, who did +not think it necessary to resort to the tactics he had +used with the principal and the captain. “You could +have done it if you had tried as hard as I did.”</p> + +<p>“After you got in, then, how came the boat out +here, so far from land?”</p> + +<p>“The wind, the tide, and the broken oar brought it +out here.”</p> + +<p>“Indeed! But won’t you tell us your story, Ole?”</p> + +<p>“A story? O, yes. Once there was a king of Norway +whose name was Olaf, and half the men of his +country were named after him, because—”</p> + +<p>“Never mind that story, Ole. We want to hear +the story about yourself.”</p> + +<p>“About myself? Well, last year things didn’t go +very well with me; the crop of potatoes was rather +short on my farm, and my vessels caught but few fish; +so I decided to make a voyage up the Mediterranean, +to spend the winter.”</p> + +<p>“What did you go in, Norway?” asked Wilde.</p> + +<p>“In my boat. We don’t make voyages on foot +here in Norway.”</p> + +<p>“What boat?”</p> + +<p>“You won’t let me tell my story; so I had better +finish it at once. I got back as far as the North Sea, +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_36" id="Page_36">[Pg 36]</a></span> +and almost into the Sleeve, when a gale came down +upon me, and strained my boat so that she leaked +badly. I was worn out with fatigue, and dropped +asleep one afternoon. I was dreaming that the King +of Sweden and Norway came off in a big man-of-war, +to welcome me home again. He hailed me himself, +with, “Boat, ahoy!” which waked me; and then I +saw this ship. You know all the rest of it.”</p> + +<p>“Do you mean to say you went up the Mediterranean +in that old craft?”</p> + +<p>“I’ve told my story, and if you don’t believe it, you +can look in the almanac, and see whether it is true or +not,” laughed Ole. “But I must go and show myself +to the captain and the big gentleman.”</p> + +<p>“He’s smart—isn’t he?” said Sanford, as the +young Norwegian went aft to exhibit himself to the +officers on the quarter deck.</p> + +<p>“Yes; but what’s the reason he won’t tell how +he happened out here in that leaky tub?” added +Rodman.</p> + +<p>“I don’t know; he wouldn’t tell the captain, nor +the principal.”</p> + +<p>“I don’t understand it.”</p> + +<p>“No one understands it. Perhaps he has done +something wrong, and is afraid of being found out.”</p> + +<p>“Very likely.”</p> + +<p>“He’s just the fellow for us,” said Stockwell, in a +low tone, after he had glanced around him, to see that +no listeners were near. “He speaks the lingo of this +country. We must buy him up.”</p> + +<p>“Good!” exclaimed Boyden. “We ought not to +have let him go till we had fixed his flint.”</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_37" id="Page_37">[Pg 37]</a></span> +“I didn’t think of it before; but there is time +enough. If we can get hold of his story we can manage +him without any trouble.”</p> + +<p>“But he won’t tell his story. He wouldn’t even +let on to the principal.”</p> + +<p>“No matter; we must have him, somehow or +other. Sanford can handle him.”</p> + +<p>“I don’t exactly believe in the scrape,” said Burchmore, +shaking his head dubiously. “We’ve heard all +about the fellows that used to try to run away from +the ship and from the Josephine. They always got +caught, and always had the worst of it.”</p> + +<p>“We are not going to run away, and we are not +going to make ourselves liable to any punishment,” +interposed Sanford, rather petulantly. “We can have +a good time on shore without running away, or anything +of that sort.”</p> + +<p>“What’s the use?” replied Burchmore.</p> + +<p>“The principal isn’t going to let us see anything at +all of Norway. We are going to put in at Christiansand, +and then go to Christiania. We want to see the +interior of Norway, for there’s glorious fishing in the +lakes and rivers—salmon as big as whales.”</p> + +<p>“I like fishing as well as any fellow, but I don’t +want to get into a scrape, and have to stay on board +when the whole crowd go ashore afterwards. It +won’t pay.”</p> + +<p>“But I tell you again, we are not going to run +away.”</p> + +<p>“I don’t see how you can manage it without running +away. You are going into the interior of Norway +on your own hook, without the consent or knowledge +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_38" id="Page_38">[Pg 38]</a></span> +of the principal. If you don’t call this running +away, I don’t know what you can call it.”</p> + +<p>“No matter what we call it, so long as the principal +don’t call it running away,” argued Sanford.</p> + +<p>“How can you manage it?” inquired Burchmore.</p> + +<p>“I don’t know yet; and if I did, I wouldn’t tell a +fellow who has so many doubts.”</p> + +<p>“I shall not go into anything till I understand it.”</p> + +<p>“We don’t ask you to do so. As soon as we come +to anchor, and see the lay of the land, we can tell +exactly what and how to do it. We have plenty of +money, and we can have a first-rate time if you only +think so. Leave it all to me, and I will bring it out +right,” continued the confident Sanford, who appeared +to be the leader of the little squad.</p> + +<p>The traditions of the various runaways who had, at +one time and another, attempted to escape from the +wholesome discipline and restraint of the Academy, +were current on board all the vessels of the squadron. +The capture of the Josephine, and her cruise in the +English Channel, had been repeated to every new +student who joined the fleet, till the story was as +familiar to the present students as to those of five +years before. There were just as many wild and +reckless boys on board now as in the earlier days of +the institution, and they were as sorely chafed by the +necessary restraints of good order as their predecessors +had been. Perhaps it was natural that, visiting a +foreign country, they should desire to see all they +could of its wonders, and even to look upon some +things which it was the policy of the principal to prevent +them from seeing.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_39" id="Page_39">[Pg 39]</a></span> +Whenever any of the various stories of the runaways +were related, Sanford, Rodman, Stockwell, and +others of similar tendencies, were always ready to +point out the defects in the plan of the operators. +They could tell precisely where Wilton, Pelham, and +Little had been weak, as they termed it, and precisely +what they should have done to render the enterprise a +success. Still, running away, in the abstract, was not +a popular idea in the squadron at the present time; +but Sanford believed that he and his companions +could enjoy all the benefits of an independent excursion +without incurring any of its perils and penalties. +Let him demonstrate his own proposition.</p> + +<p>Ole Amundsen walked aft, and was kindly greeted +by the officers on the quarter-deck, who commented +freely upon his improved personal appearance, though +they did it in more refined terms than their shipmates +on the forecastle had done. Some of them tried to +draw from him the explanation of his situation in the +leaky boat, but without any better success than had +attended the efforts of others. He yielded an extravagant +deference to the gold lace on the uniforms of the +officers, treating them with the utmost respect.</p> + +<p>“Well, Ole, you look better than when I saw you +last,” said Mr. Lowington.</p> + +<p>“Yes, sir; and I feel better,” replied Ole, bowing +low to the “big gentleman.”</p> + +<p>“And you speak English very well, indeed.”</p> + +<p>“Thank you, sir.”</p> + +<p>“Can you speak Norwegian as well?”</p> + +<p>“Yes, sir; better, I hope.”</p> + +<p>“Monsieur Badois, will you ask him a question or +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_40" id="Page_40">[Pg 40]</a></span> +two in Norwegian,” added the principal, turning to +the professor of modern languages, who prided himself +on being able to speak fourteen different tongues; +“I begin to doubt whether he is a Norwegian.”</p> + +<p>“I will, sir,” replied monsieur, who was always +glad of an opportunity to exhibit his linguistic powers. +“<em>Hvor staae det til?</em>” (How do you do?)</p> + +<p>“<em>Jeg takker, meget vel.</em>” (Very well, I thank you), +replied Ole.</p> + +<p>“<em>Forstaaer De mig?</em>” (Do you understand me?)</p> + +<p>“<em>Ja, jeg forstaaer Dem meget vel.</em>” (Yes, I understand +you very well.)</p> + +<p>“That will do,” interposed Mr. Lowington.</p> + +<p>“He speaks Norsk very well,” added the professor.</p> + +<p>“So do you, sir,” said Ole, with a low bow to +Monsieur Badois.</p> + +<p>“<em>Meget vel</em>,” laughed the professor.</p> + +<p>“I am satisfied, Ole. Now, have you concluded to +tell me how you happened to be in that boat, so far +from the land.”</p> + +<p>The waif counted the seams in the quarter-deck, +but nothing could induce him to answer the question.</p> + +<p>“I have given you a suit of clothes, and I desire to +be of service to you.”</p> + +<p>“I thank you, sir; and a good supper, the best I +ever had, though I have often fished with English +gentlemen, even with lords and sirs.”</p> + +<p>“If you will tell me who your friends are—”</p> + +<p>“I have no friends, sir.”</p> + +<p>“You lived on shore, or sailed on the sea, with +somebody, I suppose.”</p> + +<p>Ole looked down, and did not deny the proposition.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_41" id="Page_41">[Pg 41]</a></span> +“Now, if you will tell me whom you lived with, I +may be able to do something for you.”</p> + +<p>Still the waif was silent.</p> + +<p>“Berth No. 72 in the steerage is vacant, and I will +give it to you, if I can be sure it is right for me to +do so.”</p> + +<p>But Ole could not, or would not, give any information +on this point, though he was earnest in his desire +to remain in the ship.</p> + +<p>“Very well, Ole; as you will not tell me your +story, I shall be obliged to leave you on shore at +Christiansand,” said the principal, as he walked +away.</p> + +<p>Dr. Winstock also tried to induce the youth to +reveal what he plainly regarded as a secret, but with +no different result. Ole passed from the officers to +the crew again, and with the latter his answers were +like those given to Sanford and his companions. He +invented strange explanations, and told wild stories, +but not a soul on board was the wiser for anything +he said. The waif was permitted to occupy berth +No. 72, but was distinctly assured that he must leave +the ship when she arrived at Christiansand.</p> + +<p>The wind continued light during the night, but at +four o’clock in the morning the squadron was off Gunnarshoug +Point, and not more than four miles from +the land. The shore was fringed with innumerable +islands, which made the coast very picturesque, +though it was exceedingly barren and desolate. Most +of the islands were only bare rocks, the long swells +rolling completely over some of the smaller ones. +The students on deck watched the early sunrise, and +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_42" id="Page_42">[Pg 42]</a></span> +studied the contour of the coast with deep interest, +till it became an old story, and then whistled for a +breeze to take them along more rapidly towards their +port of destination. The fleet was now fully in the +Skager Rack, or Sleeve, as it is also called on the +British nautical charts.</p> + +<p>At eight bells, when, with the forenoon watch, commenced +the regular routine of study in the steerage, +all the students had seen the Naze, or Lindersnaes, as +the Norwegians call it—the southern cape of Norway. +It is a reddish headland, beyond which were +some hills covered with snow in the spring time. Ole +Amundsen remained on deck all day, and had a name +for every island and cliff on the coast. He declared +that he was competent to pilot the ship into the +harbor, for he had often been there. But when the +fleet was off Ox-Oe, at the entrance to the port, a regular +pilot was taken, at three o’clock in the afternoon. +The Josephine and the Tritonia also obtained pilots +soon after. The recitations were suspended in order +to enable the students to see the harbor.</p> + +<p>Ole was wanted to explain the various objects +which were presented to the view of the young mariners, +but no one had seen him since the pilot came on +board. All the habitable parts of the vessel were +searched, and the stewards even examined the hold; +but he could not be found. Mr. Lowington was +anxious to see him, to ascertain whether he had +changed his mind in regard to his secret; but Ole had +disappeared as strangely as he had come on board of +the ship.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_43" id="Page_43">[Pg 43]</a></span></p> +<h2>CHAPTER III.</h2> + +<p class="center"><strong>AN ACCIDENT TO THE SECOND CUTTER.</strong></p> + + +<p>The gentle breeze from the southward enabled +the fleet to proceed without delay up the fjord +to the town of Christiansand; and, as there was very +little ship’s duty to be done under such circumstances, +the students had an excellent opportunity to examine +the islands and the main shore. On board the ship +and her two consorts the boys swarmed like bees in +the rigging, eagerly watching every new object that +was presented to their view. As nautical young gentlemen, +they criticised the Norwegian boats and vessels +that sailed on the bay, comparing them with those of +their own country. The two yachts, which were not +restrained by any insurance restrictions, stood boldly +up the fjord, following closely in the wake of the +two schooners.</p> + +<p>The course of the vessels up the fjord was through +an archipelago, or “garden of rocks,” as it is styled +in the Norwegian language. The rocky hills in the +vicinity were of a reddish color, with a few fir trees +upon them. The country was certainly very picturesque, +but the students did not regard it as a very +desirable place of residence. The fleet passed between +the Island of Dybing and the light on Odderö, +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_44" id="Page_44">[Pg 44]</a></span> +and came to anchor in the western harbor. For half +an hour the several crews were occupied in furling +sails, squaring yards, hauling taut the running rigging, +and putting everything in order on board.</p> + +<p>The accommodation ladder of the ship, which was +a regular flight of stairs, had hardly been rigged before +a white barge, pulled by four men, came alongside. +The oarsmen were dressed in blue uniform, and +wore tarpaulin hats, upon which was painted the +word “Grace,” indicating the yacht to which they +belonged. The bowman fastened his boat-hook to the +steps, and the rest of the crew tossed their oars in +man-of-war style. In the stern-sheets, whose seats +were cushioned with red velvet plush, were three +persons, all of whom were old friends of our readers. +Captain Paul Kendall, the owner and commander of +the Grace, though he is a few inches taller and a few +pounds heavier than when we last saw him, was +hardly changed in his appearance. Even his side +whiskers and mustache did not sensibly alter his +looks, for his bright eye and his pleasant smile were +still the key to his expression. The Grace carried +the American yacht flag, and her commander wore the +blue uniform of the club to which he belonged.</p> + +<p>Three years before, Paul Kendall had experienced +a heavy loss in the death of his mother. She had +inherited a very large fortune, which, however, was +held in trust for her son, until he reached his majority. +At the age of twenty-one, therefore, Paul came to an +inheritance bequeathed by his grandfather, which made +him a <em>millionnaire</em>. His fortune had been carefully +invested by the trustees, and now all he had to do was +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_45" id="Page_45">[Pg 45]</a></span> +to collect and spend his income, of which there was a +considerable accumulation when he attained his majority. +Paul was a young man of high moral and +religious principle. He had never spent a dollar in +dissipation of any kind, and though he knew the +world, he was as child-like and innocent as when he +was an infant.</p> + +<p>His tastes were decidedly nautical, and the first +large expenditure from his ample wealth was in the +building of the yacht Grace, which was now anchored +near the Young America. She was a beautiful craft in +every respect, constructed as strong as wood and iron +could make her. As her cabin was to be Paul’s home +during a portion of the year, it was fitted up with every +appliance of comfort, convenience, and luxury. It +contained a piano, a large library, and every available +means of amusement for the hours of a long passage. +At the age of twenty-one, Paul was more mature in +experience and knowledge than many young men at +twenty-five; and hardly had he been placed in possession +of his inheritance than he sailed for Europe, +and, of course, hastened from Queenstown to Belfast, +where Mr. Arbuckle, father of the lady who occupied +the stern-sheets of the barge, resided. Six months +later he was married to Grace, who still regarded him +as “the apple of her eye.”</p> + +<p>On his return to New York his yacht was finished, +though too late in the season for use that year. Her +first voyage in the spring was to Brockway, which +was the residence of Mr. Lowington, and the headquarters +of the Academy Squadron. Learning that +his old friend the principal was about to sail for +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_46" id="Page_46">[Pg 46]</a></span> +Europe with his charge, he promptly decided to accompany +him, and the Grace was one of the fleet that +crossed the Atlantic in April.</p> + +<p>Mrs. Kendall was dressed in a plain travelling suit. +She was taller and more mature than when she went +down the Rhine with the Young Americans, but she +was not less beautiful and interesting.</p> + +<p>If Fortune had been very kind to Paul Kendall, she +had not been so constant to all who formerly sailed in +the Young America, and who had then basked in her +sunny smile. The third person in the stern-sheets of +the barge was Mr. Augustus Pelham. He was a fine-looking +fellow, with a heavy mustache, dressed like +his commander, in the uniform of the yacht club. +By one of those disasters common in American mercantile +experience, Pelham’s father had suddenly been +hurled from apparent affluence to real poverty. Being +well advanced in years, he could do nothing better +for himself and his family than to accept a situation as +secretary of an insurance company, which afforded +him a salary only sufficient to enable him to live in +comfort. Augustus had completed his course in the +Academy ship when the change of circumstances compelled +him to abandon all luxurious habits, and work +for his own living. This was by no means a calamity +to him, any more than to other young men. Doubtless +it was annoying to have his allowance of pocket +money suddenly stopped, and to find himself face to +face with one of the sternest realities of life. His +training in the Academy ship had been a blessing to +him, for it had reformed his life, and elevated his +tastes above the low level of dissipation. It had made +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_47" id="Page_47">[Pg 47]</a></span> +a new man of him, besides preparing him for a useful +calling. He was competent, so far as nautical skill +and knowledge were concerned, to command any +vessel to any part of the world, though he lacked the +necessary experience in the management of a miscellaneous +crew, and in the transaction of business. He +was ready to accept a situation as chief or second +mate of a ship, when he happened to meet Paul +Kendall, and was immediately engaged as chief officer +of the Grace, at a salary of one hundred dollars a +month. Another ex-student of the ship, Bennington, +upon whose father fickle Fortune had not continued to +smile, had been appointed second officer. Pelham +had shipped the crew of the Grace, and no better set +of men ever trod a deck.</p> + +<p>The barge came up to the steps, and Paul and Pelham +assisted Mrs. Kendall out of the boat, and the +three went upon the deck of the ship. Mr. Lowington, +who had not seen them, except at a distance, +since the fleet sailed from Brockway harbor, gave them +a warm greeting, shaking hands heartily with the +lady first, and then with her companions.</p> + +<p>“I am glad to see you looking so well, Mrs. Kendall,” +said the principal.</p> + +<p>“I have enjoyed myself every moment of the voyage, +and have never been sick a single hour,” she +replied.</p> + +<p>“We have had a fine passage, and there was no +excuse for an old salt like you to be sick,” laughed the +principal.</p> + +<p>“But I think we shall go on shore, and stay at a +hotel a few days, just for a change,” added Paul.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_48" id="Page_48">[Pg 48]</a></span> +“That’s a good plan; of course you will see more +of the town and the people, than if you remain in +your yacht.”</p> + +<p>“I am sure I like the cabin of the yacht better than +any hotel I ever visited,” laughed Mrs. Kendall.</p> + +<p>“But a change will do you good, my dear,” suggested +Paul.</p> + +<p>“What did you pick up last evening, when you +hove to, Mr. Lowington?”</p> + +<p>“We picked up a young Norwegian, about sixteen +years old,” answered the principal, detailing the circumstances +under which Ole had been taken on board.</p> + +<p>“Where is he now?” asked Paul, looking about +him to obtain a sight of the stranger.</p> + +<p>“We clothed and fed him, and had become quite +interested in him; but just as the pilot came alongside +we missed him. I have had the ship searched for +him, but we have not been able to find him, though +he must be concealed somewhere on board.”</p> + +<p>“That’s strange!” exclaimed Mrs. Kendall, glancing +at her husband.</p> + +<p>“Perhaps not very strange,” continued the principal. +“The boy refused to tell us how he came in an +open boat, half full of water, and out of sight of land. +Probably he has run away from his friends, and has +concealed himself to avoid being recognized by the +pilot, or other Norwegian people who may come on +board. I judged by his appearance that he had some +reason for running away from his master or his friends, +for he was only half clothed, in the filthiest rags that +ever covered a human being.”</p> + +<p>“I should like a Norwegian in my yacht, to act as +interpreter for us,” added Paul.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_49" id="Page_49">[Pg 49]</a></span> +“I intended to keep him for that purpose myself, if +I could ascertain who his friends were, and make an +arrangement with them, for I will not encourage any +boy in running away from his employers. Very likely +we shall find him again in the course of the day.”</p> + +<p>“Very well, sir; if you want him, I will look out +for some one on shore,” added Paul. “At what time +do you pipe to lecture, Mr. Lowington?”</p> + +<p>“Not before to-morrow forenoon, at two bells.”</p> + +<p>“I want to hear the lecture.”</p> + +<p>“So do I,” laughed Mrs. Kendall. “I think it is +a capital idea to have a professor tell us all about a +country before we attempt to see it. I used to read +about the Norsemen, but I have forgotten all about +them now, and I want to refresh my memory.”</p> + +<p>“I wish all our boys had the same view of the +matter,” said Mr. Lowington.</p> + +<p>“We will come on board before nine to-morrow +morning, sir,” added Paul, as he handed his lady up +the steps over the rail.</p> + +<p>Descending to the boat, the three oarsmen shoved +off, and pulled for the shore, where they landed. +The boat had not reached the land, before another +barge, the counterpart of the first, and similarly +manned, left the Feodora, and pulled alongside the ship. +Mr. Robert Shuffles, the owner and commander of +the second yacht, assisted his wife up the ladder to the +deck of the ship, where they were cordially received +by the principal. The yacht Feodora was only six +months older than the Grace, for which she had +served as the model. Shuffles had not come into +possession of any inheritance yet, but his father was +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_50" id="Page_50">[Pg 50]</a></span> +as liberal as he was wealthy, and gave his son an annual +allowance, which enabled him to marry and keep +a yacht. He and Paul had been intimate friends since +they were graduated from the Academy ship, and +they had made their plans in concert. He had married +Lady Feodora a year before, and she had now +dropped her aristocratic title, and become a republican +lady. Like her husband, she had acquired nautical +tastes, and was even more enthusiastic than he in +anticipating the pleasures of a yacht cruise up the +Baltic, and up the Mediterranean. Shuffles had not +been so fortunate as Paul in finding needy graduates +of the Academy to officer his yacht, and a fat old shipmaster +served as first officer in the Feodora, while the +second mate was a young tar, not yet of age. Having +paid their respects to the principal, the young couple +returned to the boat, and followed Paul to the hotel on +shore.</p> + +<p>“That’s the way to go about Europe,” said Sanford, +who was sitting on the rail with several of his +shipmates.</p> + +<p>“What’s the way?” asked Stockwell.</p> + +<p>“Why, as Kendall and Shuffles do it—in a yacht, +with no Latin and geometry to bother their heads, and +no decks to wash down on a cold morning.”</p> + +<p>“That’s so; but those fellows were the lambs of +the squadron, we are told,” laughed Stockwell. “They +didn’t have black marks; didn’t pick upon the professors, +and didn’t run away from the ship.”</p> + +<p>“What has all that to do with yachting?” asked +Rodman.</p> + +<p>“They were good boys, and therefore they have +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_51" id="Page_51">[Pg 51]</a></span> +yachts as their reward,” replied Stockwell, laughing.</p> + +<p>“Pelham was as good as Shuffles, but he has no +yacht, and has to work on a salary for his living.”</p> + +<p>“He has the fun of it all the same, and Paul Kendall +will not overwork him. But I haven’t a word to +say against them. They were all good fellows, if they +were the ship’s lambs.”</p> + +<p>“All the second cutters!” shouted the boatswain’s +mate, after his pipe had sounded through the ship.</p> + +<p>“That means us,” said Sanford. “Take your +money and pea-jackets, fellows. Something may turn +up before we come back.”</p> + +<p>“Ay, ay,” replied Stockwell. “Pass the word to +all our fellows.”</p> + +<p>In a few moments the fourth cutters appeared in the +waist, with pea-jackets on their arms, and touched +their caps to De Forrest, the fourth lieutenant, who +appeared as the officer detailed to go in the boat, +which now, as formally, was called the professors’ +barge, because it was generally appropriated to the +use of the instructors. It was pulled by eight oarsmen, +and Sanford was the coxswain. The party who +had been considering the plan for an independent excursion +on shore without incurring the perils and penalties +of running away, were the crew of the second +cutter. The fact of being together so much in the +boat, had united them so that they acted and plotted +in concert.</p> + +<p>“What are you going to do with those pea-jackets?” +asked De Forrest, when he saw their extra +clothing.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_52" id="Page_52">[Pg 52]</a></span> +“It’s rather chilly up here in the evening, and we +thought we might want them, while we were waiting,” +replied Sanford.</p> + +<p>“I don’t think it is very cold, and as to the evening, +the sun don’t set till about eight o’clock,” added the +officer, as he went aft to the professors who were going +on shore, and reported that the boat was ready; +for it had already been lowered into the water, and +made fast to the swinging boom.</p> + +<p>Her crew went over the side, and seated themselves +in the cutter.</p> + +<p>“Ready!” said the coxswain, as the stern-sheets of +the barge ranged alongside the little stage at the foot +of the ladder. “Up oars!”</p> + +<p>Up went the eight oars to a perpendicular position, +where they were held till the boat should be ready +to go.</p> + +<p>“I wonder where Ole is,” said Sanford.</p> + +<p>“Sh!” whispered Stockwell, who pulled the bow +oar, shaking his head with energy.</p> + +<p>“What do you mean?” demanded the coxswain, in +a low tone, for he was very much mystified by the +pantomime of the bow oarsman.</p> + +<p>“Don’t say a word.”</p> + +<p>“Where is he?” persisted Sanford, who was not +willing to have a secret kept from him even for a moment.</p> + +<p>Stockwell pointed into the bottom of the boat, and +then looked up at the sky, with an affectation of +cunning, while the rest of the crew smiled as though +they were in possession of the secret. Sanford said no +more, and joined the bowman in studying the aspect +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_53" id="Page_53">[Pg 53]</a></span> +of the sky. Ole was in the boat to act as guide and +interpreter, and if they chose to leave without running +away, everything seemed to be favorable to the enterprise. +Mr. Mapps and Dr. Winstock presently descended +the steps, and seated themselves in the boat, +followed by De Forrest.</p> + +<p>“All ready, coxswain,” said the latter.</p> + +<p>“Ready! Let fall!” said Sanford, as he shoved off +the stern of the cutter. “Give way—together!”</p> + +<p>The well-trained crew bent to their oars, and the +boat shot away from the ship towards the shore. Mr. +Mapps was going to the town to obtain some additional +material for his lecture the following morning, +and the surgeon intended to call on Paul Kendall and +lady at the hotel.</p> + +<p>“This is a very picturesque town, doctor,” said Mr. +Mapps, as he gazed at the high, rocky steeps which +surround Christiansand.</p> + +<p>“Very; and I am rather sorry we are not to see +more of the environs of the place,” replied the surgeon. +“I understand we sail to-morrow night.”</p> + +<p>“I dare say the students will see enough of Norway +before they leave it.”</p> + +<p>“We want to go into the interior,” said De Forrest. +“There is fine fishing in the streams of Norway.”</p> + +<p>“Very likely Mr. Lowington will take you into +the interior from Christiania,” suggested Dr. Winstock.</p> + +<p>“I don’t exactly see how it is possible to do so,” +added Mr. Mapps. “The only conveyance of the +country is the cariole, which seats but one person—perhaps +two boys; and our squadron has nearly +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_54" id="Page_54">[Pg 54]</a></span> +two hundred students. I am afraid there are not +carioles enough in Christiania to carry the whole of +them.”</p> + +<p>“I think it’s too bad we can’t have a trial at the +salmon,” pouted De Forrest.</p> + +<p>“Perhaps, if you waited till July, you might catch +them,” replied Mr. Mapps.</p> + +<p>“We should be contented with trout, then.”</p> + +<p>“I have no doubt Mr. Lowington will do the best +he can for you,” said Dr. Winstock, as the boat neared +the pier.</p> + +<p>“In, bows!” called the coxswain; and the two bowmen +tossed and boated their oars, taking their stations +in the fore-sheets, one of them with the boat-hook in +his hand. “Way enough!” added Sanford; and the +rest of the crew tossed their oars, and then dropped +them upon the thwarts, with a precision which seemed +to astonish the group of Norwegians on the wharf, +who were observing them.</p> + +<p>The two gentlemen landed, and walked up to the +town together, leaving the barge to wait for them.</p> + +<p>“Part of you may go on shore for half an hour, if +you wish, and walk about,” said De Forrest to his +crew.</p> + +<p>“I don’t care about going ashore,” replied Sanford.</p> + +<p>“Nor I either,” added Stockwell; and so they all +said, very much to the astonishment of the fourth lieutenant, +who naturally supposed that boys who had +been at sea about four weeks would like to stretch +their legs on the solid land for a short time.</p> + +<p>“Don’t any of you wish to go on shore?” he inquired.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_55" id="Page_55">[Pg 55]</a></span> +“Not yet,” replied Sanford. “If you wish to take a +walk, I will push off from the shore, and wait till you +return,” said Sanford, very respectfully.</p> + +<p>“What’s up? You won’t go on shore, and you +wish me to do so!” exclaimed the suspicious officer.</p> + +<p>“Nothing, sir,” protested Sanford. “We don’t +intend to run away. We think that is played out.”</p> + +<p>“If you wanted to do so in this desolate country, I +would let you do it, if I were the principal. But you +are up to some trick, I know.”</p> + +<p>“What trick, sir?” demanded the coxswain, innocently.</p> + +<p>“I don’t know, but it is your next move,” replied +De Forrest, as he seated himself, and seemed confident +of his ability to check any mischief which might +be in the minds of his crew. “Shove off, bowman! +Up oars! Let fall! Give way together!”</p> + +<p>The oarsmen, rather vexed at the turn of events, +obeyed the several orders, and the boat was again cutting +the still waters of the fjord. All around them were +rocks, with several large and small islands in sight. +In various places on the rocks were affixed iron rings, +to which vessels could make fast in warping out of the +bay when the wind was light or foul. A portion of +the rock to which they were attached was whitewashed, +so that the rings could easily be found, even +in the night. To one of these rings, on a small island +near Odderö, which commanded a full view of the +landing-place, De Forrest directed the coxswain to +steer the boat.</p> + +<p>“Make fast to that ring,” said the officer.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_56" id="Page_56">[Pg 56]</a></span> +“Ay, ay, sir,” replied the bowman.</p> + +<p>“Perhaps you would like to land here,” added the +lieutenant, in a jeering tone, as though he felt that he +had checkmated his crew in any evil purpose they entertained. +“Whether you do or not, I think I shall +stretch my legs on these rocks.”</p> + +<p>De Forrest leaped from thwart to thwart, and then +over the bow upon the island, as though he felt nothing +but contempt for the power of the boat’s crew to +do mischief. He walked up the rough rocks to the +summit of the islet, where he paused, and for the +first time glanced at his companions, whom he suspected +of harboring some design against the peace +and dignity of the ship. As he did so, he discovered +a steamer, which had just passed through the narrow +opening between Odderö and the main land, and whose +course lay close to the point of the island where the +cutter was moored. He saw that the swash of the +steamer was likely to throw the boat on the rocks, +and grind her planking upon the sharp points of the +island.</p> + +<p>“In the boat!” he shouted, lustily. “Shove +off!”</p> + +<p>Sanford saw the danger which the lieutenant wished +to avert, and promptly obeyed the orders.</p> + +<p>“Shove off, Stockwell!” he promptly shouted. +“Up oars! Stern, all! Give way!”</p> + +<p>Stockwell gave a tremendously hard push when he +shoved off, and the cutter shot far out upon the still +waters; in fact, so far that she was forced directly into +the way of the approaching steamer.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;"> +<img src="images/img001.jpg" width="600" height="384" alt="image" title="" /> +<span class="caption">The Accident to the Second Cutter.</span> Page <a href="#Page_57">57</a>. +</div> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_57" id="Page_57">[Pg 57]</a></span> +“Oars!” yelled the coxswain furiously, when he +saw that he had overdone the matter. “Hold water! +Go ahead! Give way!”</p> + +<p>The crew, even in this moment of deadly peril,—for +it looked as though, in another instant, they would all +be under the wheels of the steamer,—obeyed every +command with their wonted precision. But it was a +second too late to take the back track. If the boat had +continued to back as at first, she would probably have +escaped, for the steamer put her helm a-starboard a +little, in order to favor her manœuvre. When a collision +seemed inevitable, the steamer’s bell was rung +to stop her, and then to back her.</p> + +<p>She struck the cutter; but as her progress had been +powerfully checked, the blow did not carry her under, +though it stove in the side of the boat. The water +poured in through the broken broadside, and the crew +sprang for their lives. They leaped upon the guys +and bob-stays of the steamer, and were hauled in by +the people on the bow.</p> + +<p>“Come out of there, Ole,” said Stockwell, as +he pulled the boat’s sail from the extended form of +the waif, who was concealed in the bottom of the +boat.</p> + +<p>Ole lost not a moment in following the example of +his companions. As the steamer’s headway had now +been entirely checked, Stockwell held the wrecked +cutter in her position, while Rodman passed the pea-jackets +up to the forecastle of the steamer. Having +done this, they abandoned the boat, and followed the +example of their companions. No one was drowned, +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_58" id="Page_58">[Pg 58]</a></span> +or even wet above his knees, for the steamer had +struck the boat just hard enough to stave in her side, +without carrying her under.</p> + +<p>The Norwegians hooked up the boat’s painter, and +taking it in tow, proceeded on her course; for the +captain—as interpreted by Ole—declared that his +boat carried the mail, and he could not wait for anything.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_59" id="Page_59">[Pg 59]</a></span></p> +<h2>CHAPTER IV.</h2> + +<p class="center"><strong>NORWAY IN THE PAST AND THE PRESENT.</strong></p> + + +<p>“Clear away the first cutter!” shouted the +first lieutenant of the Young America, from +whose deck the catastrophe to the second cutter had +been observed.</p> + +<p>“All the first cutters!” piped the boatswain, with +an energy inspired by the stirring occasion.</p> + +<p>“That was very carelessly done,” said Mr. Lowington, +whose attention had been called to the scene.</p> + +<p>“The steamer ran within a couple of rods of the +island,” added Captain Cumberland. “I saw the +fourth lieutenant order the boat to shove off; I suppose +he did it to prevent the swash of the steamer +from grinding the cutter on the rocks.”</p> + +<p>“What is he doing among those rocks?” asked +the principal.</p> + +<p>“I don’t know, sir. He landed Mr. Mapps and +the doctor, and was ordered to wait for them. I don’t +see why he went over to that island.”</p> + +<p>The second lieutenant was directed to take charge +of the first cutter; Peaks, the adult boatswain, and +Bitts, the carpenter, were ordered to go also, to render +any assistance which might be required in succoring +the stove boat. The cutter shoved off, her twelve +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_60" id="Page_60">[Pg 60]</a></span> +oars struck the water together, and the crew gave +way with an energy which caused their oars to bend +like twigs, while the barge leaped through the water +as though it was some monster of the deep goaded to +his utmost to escape the wrath of a more potent +pursuer.</p> + +<p>“With a will, my lads!” shouted the coxswain. +“Steady! Keep the stroke, but use your muscle!”</p> + +<p>“There’s a job for you, Bitts,” said the boatswain, +as the Norwegian took the second cutter in +tow.</p> + +<p>“And a heavy job it will be, too,” replied Bitts. +“I wonder there is anything left of the boat.”</p> + +<p>“The steamer stopped her wheels, and backed +some time before she struck, or there would not have +been much left of the boat, or her crew,” added Peaks. +“Thank God, the boys are all safe.”</p> + +<p>“It’s a lucky escape for them.”</p> + +<p>“So it was; and we needn’t say anything about the +boat.”</p> + +<p>“The steamer is going ahead,” said the carpenter.</p> + +<p>“No matter for that, so long as the boys are all +safe,” replied Peaks.</p> + +<p>The people in the steamer seemed to take no notice +of the first cutter, appearing not to understand that it +had come out for the wrecked crew. But as the boat +pulled towards her, she cast off the cutter in tow.</p> + +<p>“Steamer, ahoy!” shouted Norwood, the second +lieutenant, as he saw the cutter cast adrift.</p> + +<p>She made no reply, but hoisted a flag, on which +appeared the word “Post,” with something else which +none in the first cutter could understand.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_61" id="Page_61">[Pg 61]</a></span> +“She’s a mail boat,” said the boatswain; “and I +suppose she intends to say she is in a hurry.”</p> + +<p>“Does she mean to carry off the crew of that boat?” +demanded the second lieutenant, not a little vexed at +the conduct of the Norwegians.</p> + +<p>“She will not carry them far,” suggested Dunlap, +the coxswain.</p> + +<p>“She may take them to Bergen.”</p> + +<p>“I think not, sir. If she is a mail steamer, she +stops at all the ports on the coast. I don’t think she +will carry them far. Very likely they will be sent +back, on some other steamer, before night,” added +Dunlap, who had studied the coast of Norway more +carefully than the lieutenant in command.</p> + +<p>“First cutter, ahoy!” shouted De Forrest, on the +island.</p> + +<p>“On shore!” replied Norwood. “We can’t catch +the steamer—that is certain; steer for the island, +coxswain.”</p> + +<p>The first cutter ran up to the rocky island, and as +soon as the bow touched the rocks, De Forrest leaped +into the fore-sheets. He was nervous and excited, +feeling, perhaps, that he had failed in his duty, and +was, therefore, responsible for the accident to the +second cutter. From feeling that he had circumvented +his crew in carrying out some unexplained trick, +he realized that he had led them into a trap, from +which they had narrowly escaped with their lives.</p> + +<p>“What are you doing on this island, De Forrest?” +asked Norwood, as the discomfited officer took his +place in the stern-sheets, and the boat shoved off again.</p> + +<p>The second lieutenant declared that he had come over +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_62" id="Page_62">[Pg 62]</a></span> +to the island to prevent his crew from running away, +or from carrying out some trick whose existence he +suspected, but whose nature he could not comprehend.</p> + +<p>“Sanford wanted I should go ashore at the town, +and offered to look out for the crew while I did so,” +he continued. “Of course I wouldn’t leave my crew; +but I told them that half of them might go on shore and +take a walk. None of them wanted to go, and then I +was satisfied they were up to something. I went on +the island for the sole purpose of watching them. I +wanted to know what their plan was.”</p> + +<p>“Well, what did you discover?”</p> + +<p>“Nothing at all. I saw that steamer coming, and I +ordered Sanford to shove off, so that her swash should +not damage the boat.”</p> + +<p>“I don’t believe they intended to play any trick,” +added Norwood. “You are too suspicious, De Forrest.”</p> + +<p>“Perhaps I am; but fellows that have been at sea +for a month are rather glad of a chance to stretch +their legs on shore. They wouldn’t do so, when I +told them they might; and I don’t believe such a +thing was ever heard of before. Besides, they all +looked as though they were up to something, and +just as though they had a big secret in their heads.”</p> + +<p>“Perhaps you were right, but I don’t believe you +were,” said Norwood, too bluntly for good manners, +and too bluntly for the harmony of the officers’ mess.</p> + +<p>“I suppose I am responsible for the smashing of +the second cutter, but I was trying to do my duty,” +replied De Forrest, vexed at the implied censure of his +superior.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_63" id="Page_63">[Pg 63]</a></span> +“If you had staid at the pier this could not have +happened.”</p> + +<p>“But something else might have happened; and if +my crew had run away, I should have been blamed +just as much,” growled the second lieutenant.</p> + +<p>“You were too sharp for your own good—that is +all. But I don’t mean to blame you, De Forrest,” +said Norwood, with a patronizing smile. “Perhaps I +should have done the same thing if I had been in your +place.”</p> + +<p>“Stand by to lay on your oars!” shouted the coxswain, +as the boat approached the water-logged second +cutter. “Oars!”</p> + +<p>The crew stopped pulling, and levelled their oars.</p> + +<p>“In, bows! Stand by the boat-hooks!” continued +the coxswain; and the two forward oarsmen grasped +the boat-hooks, and took their station in the fore-sheets. +“Hold water.” And the ten oars dropped into the +water as one, checking the onward progress of the +cutter.</p> + +<p>The bowmen fastened to the second cutter, and +recovering her painter, passed it astern to the coxswain, +who made it fast to a ring on the stern-board. +By this time the steamer, with the luckless crew of +the stove boat, had disappeared behind an island. +The first cutter pulled back to the ship, and De Forrest +immediately reported to the first lieutenant, and +explained his conduct in presence of the principal and +the captain. He detailed his reasons for supposing +his crew intended to run away, or to play some trick +upon him.</p> + +<p>“I think you have done all that a careful and vigilant +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_64" id="Page_64">[Pg 64]</a></span> +officer could, De Forrest; and so far as I can see, +you are free from blame,” replied Mr. Lowington.</p> + +<p>The fourth lieutenant glanced at Norwood.</p> + +<p>“Just what I said,” added the latter, in a low tone.</p> + +<p>“If you made any mistake, it was in leaving your +boat at the island,” continued the principal.</p> + +<p>“Just exactly my sentiments,” whispered Norwood. +“I don’t blame the fourth lieutenant, but I shouldn’t +have done just as he did.”</p> + +<p>“Where is that steamer bound?” asked Mr. Lowington +of the pilot, who had not yet left the ship, and +was really waiting to be invited to supper.</p> + +<p>“To Christiania, sir,” replied the pilot, who, like +all of his class on the coast of Norway, spoke a little +English.</p> + +<p>“Where does she stop next?”</p> + +<p>“At Lillesand.”</p> + +<p>“How far is that?”</p> + +<p>“About two miles.”</p> + +<p>“Two miles! Why, it is farther than that to the +sea,” exclaimed Mr. Lowington.</p> + +<p>“He means Norwegian miles,” suggested one of +the instructors, who was listening with interest to the +conversation.</p> + +<p>“True; I did not think of that. A Norwegian +mile is about seven English miles. It is fourteen +miles, then, to Lillesand.”</p> + +<p>With the assistance of Professor Badois, who acted +as interpreter, the pilot explained that the steamer +which had just left was several hours late, and would +go that night to Frederiksværn, where the steamers +from Bergen and Christiania made connections with +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_65" id="Page_65">[Pg 65]</a></span> +the boat for Gottenburg and Copenhagen. The Christiania +steamer would reach Christiansand the next +evening, and the boys who had been carried away +could return in her.</p> + +<p>“Why did she carry them off? It would not have +taken five minutes to land them,” added the principal.</p> + +<p>“She was very late, and her passengers for Gottenburg +and Copenhagen would lose the steamer at Frederiksværn +if she does not arrive in season,” the pilot +explained through Professor Badois.</p> + +<p>But Mr. Lowington was so grateful that the crew +of the second cutter had all escaped with their lives, +that he was not disposed to be very critical over the +conduct of the Norwegian steamer. The boys were +safe, and would return the next night at farthest. +The accident was talked about, during the rest of the +day, on board of all the vessels of the squadron. The +officers and seamen on board of the ship had witnessed +the accident, and had seen all the crew of the +second cutter go over the bows of the steamer. They +had not observed, in the excitement of the moment, +that ten, instead of nine, had left the wrecked boat; +and as Ole Amundsen was dressed precisely like the +crew, his presence in the cutter was not even suspected.</p> + +<p>The first cutter was sent to the town for Dr. Winstock +and Mr. Mapps, and in an hour or two the +excitement had entirely subsided. The routine of the +ship went on as before, and as there was little work +to be done, the absentees were hardly missed.</p> + +<p>At half past eight the next morning, the signal, +“All hands, attend lecture,” was flying on board of the +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_66" id="Page_66">[Pg 66]</a></span> +Young America. The boats from the Josephine and +the Tritonia came alongside the ship, bringing all the +officers and crews of those vessels. Paul Kendall and +lady, and their friends, were brought off from the +shore; Shuffles and his wife also appeared, and a further +delegation from each of the yachts asked admission +to the ship to hear the lecture, or rather to attend +the exercise in geography and history, for the occasion +was even less formal than on the first cruise of the +ship. The steerage was crowded, after the boatswain +had piped the call, and Mr. Mapps was doubtless duly +flattered by the number of his audience. On the foremast +hung a large map of Sweden and Norway.</p> + +<p>“If you please, young gentlemen, we will begin +with Scandinavia,” said the professor, taking his place +near the foremast, with the pointer in his hand. “What +was Scandinavia?”</p> + +<p>“The ancient name of Norway, Sweden, and Denmark,” +replied one of the students.</p> + +<p>“The barbarous tribes from the northern part of +Europe at different times invaded the southern sections, +conquering various other tribes, occupying their +territory, and thus mingling with all the people from +whom originated the present nations of Europe. +Thus, in remote ages, the Scandinavians, among +others, by their conquests and their emigration, have +contributed largely to the modern elements of society. +With this explanation we will look at Scandinavia in +detail, beginning with Norway. Between what degrees +of latitude does it lie?”</p> + +<p>“Between forty and ninety,” replied an enthusiastic +youth.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_67" id="Page_67">[Pg 67]</a></span> +“True—quite right; and a safe answer. If you +had said between one and ninety, the answer would +have been just as good for any other country as for +Norway. I would like to have the jacket fit a little +closer.”</p> + +<p>“Between fifty-eight and seventy-one, north,” answered +one who was better posted.</p> + +<p>“Exactly right; about the same latitude as Greenland, +and our newly-acquired Alaska. Our ship is +anchored in the same parallel as the northern part of +Labrador, and one degree south of the southern point +of Greenland. But it is not as ‘cold as Greenland, +here,’ the temperature being some twelve degrees +milder, because the warm waters of the Gulf Stream +are discharged upon its shores. You know its boundaries. +It is one thousand and eighty miles from the +Naze to the North Cape, and varies from forty to two +hundred and seventy miles in width. How many +square miles has it?”</p> + +<p>“One hundred and twenty-three thousand square +miles.”</p> + +<p>“Or a little larger than the six New England States, +New York, and New Jersey united. The country is +mountainous, and abounds in picturesque scenery. +Precipices, cataracts, and rushing torrents are very +numerous in the central and northern parts. The +Vöringfos is a waterfall, and the Rjukanfos, near +the central part, are cataracts of about nine hundred +feet perpendicular descent; but of course the volume +of water is not very large. The highest mountains +are between eight and nine thousand feet high. Norway +has an abundance of rivers, but none of them are +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_68" id="Page_68">[Pg 68]</a></span> +very long. The coast, as you have seen, is fringed +with islands, which, with the numerous indentations, +form a vast number of bays, straits, channels, and +sounds, which are called <em>fjords</em> here. One of the +principal of these is Christiania Fjord, which you will +ascend in a few days. The country also abounds in +lakes, which, as in most mountainous regions, are +very narrow, being simply the widenings of the rivers. +The largest of these is Miösen Lake, fifty-five miles +long, and from one to twelve wide.</p> + +<p>“The soil is not very good, and the Norwegians +are not progressive farmers. They cling to the +methods of their sires, and modern improvements +find but little favor among them. The winter is long, +and the summer short; but by a provision of provident +nature, the crops mature more rapidly than in some +of the southern climes, as grain has been reaped six +weeks after it was sowed. The principal crops are +the grains; but the supply is not equal to the demand, +and considerable importations are received from Denmark +and Russia. In the south the farmers devote +themselves to stock-raising, while in the north the +Lapps derive nearly all the comforts of life from the +reindeer, the care of which is their chief industry.</p> + +<p>“The extensive product of pine and fir have created +a vast trade in lumber, which constitutes three +fourths of the exports to the United Kingdom, and a +considerable portion of the inhabitants in the wooded +districts are employed in cutting, sawing, and sending +to market the wealth of the forests. Next in importance +to this are the fisheries, which yield about five +million dollars a year. Cod, haddock, and herring +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_69" id="Page_69">[Pg 69]</a></span> +are cured for exportation, and are an important source +of revenue. Besides these, the roe of the cod is sent +to France, Italy, and Spain, as bait for sardines. +Norway supplies London with lobsters. Norway +iron, as well as Swedish, is very celebrated; but the +mines are poorly managed, as are those of copper and +silver.</p> + +<p>“The kingdom of Norway is divided into eighteen +provinces, which are called Amts. Its population, in +1865, was one million seven hundred thousand, showing +an increase of about two hundred thousand in +ten years. The government is a constitutional monarchy.”</p> + +<p>“I thought it was a part of Sweden,” said one of +the students.</p> + +<p>“Not at all. The King of Sweden is also the King +of Norway; but each country has its own independent +and separate government. Each has its own +legislature, makes its own laws, and raises and expends +its own revenues. The king exercises his +functions as ruler over both kingdoms through a +council of state, composed of an equal number of +Swedes and Norwegians, whose duty it is to advise +the sovereign, and, in accordance with a peculiar feature +of monarchy, to take the responsibility when any +blunder is made; for “the king can do no wrong.” If +anything is wrong, some one else did it. Having +the same king, who rules over each nation separately, +is the only connection between Norway and Sweden. +The former pays about one hundred and twenty thousand +dollars of his civil list, and he is obliged to reside +in Norway during a small portion of each year.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_70" id="Page_70">[Pg 70]</a></span> +“The constitution of Norway is one of the most +democratic in Europe. The legislative and part of +the executive power is vested in the Storthing, which +means the ‘great court,’ composed of the representatives +of the people. The king has but little power, +though he has a limited veto upon the acts passed by +the legislative body. He can create no order of nobility, +or grant any titles or dignities. The members of +the Storthing are elected indirectly by the people; and +when they assemble, they divide themselves into two +houses, corresponding to our Senate and House of Representatives. +All acts must pass both chambers, and +in case of disagreement, the two bodies come together, +and discuss the subject.</p> + +<p>“The religion of Norway is Lutheran, and few of +any other sect are to be found; formerly, no other was +tolerated, but now religious freedom prevails, though +Jesuits and monks of any order are sternly excluded. +The clergy, who are generally very well educated, +have an average income of about a thousand dollars +a year, and I think are better paid than even in our +own country. The people are well instructed, and +one who cannot read and write is seldom found.</p> + +<p>“The early history of Norway is that of most of +the countries of Europe—a powerful chief subjugated +his neighbors, and united the tribes into a nation. +Harold the Fair-haired, whose father had conquered +the southern part of the country, fell in love with +Gyda, the daughter of a petty king, who refused to +wed him till he had absolute sway over the entire +country. Pleased with the lady’s spirit, he vowed +never to cut or comb his hair till all Norway lay at +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_71" id="Page_71">[Pg 71]</a></span> +his feet. It appears that he eventually had occasion +for his barber’s services, and wedded the lady. This +was in the ninth century; and the victories of Harold +drove many of the Norsemen, or Northmen, to seek +their fortunes in other lands. They discovered and +colonized Greenland and Iceland, and even established +settlements on the continental portion of North America. +Traces of them have been found on the Gulf of +St. Lawrence, and some claim that they founded settlements +farther south. They figure largely in the early +history of England and Scotland, and even carried +their piratical arms into Russia, Flanders, France, +Italy, and other territories.</p> + +<p>“A son of Harold, who had been educated in England, +brought Christianity into Norway; but, it was +three centuries before the new faith had established +itself. Like the Hindoos, Greeks, and Romans, the +ancient Scandinavians had a mythology, upon which +their religion was based. They believed that in the +beginning all was chaos, in which was a fountain that +sent forth twelve rivers. These streams flowed so far +from their source that the waters froze, and the ice, +defying the modern law of nature, sank till the fathomless +deep was filled up. Far south of the world of +mist, in which this miracle was wrought, was a world +of fire and light, whence proceeded a hot wind that +melted the ice, from the drops of which came the ice-giant, +whose name was Ymir, and from whom proceeded +a race of ice-giants. From the wedding of the +ice and heat of the two extremes of the world came a +cow, from which ran four streams of milk, the food +of the ice-giants. While this wonderful beast was +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_72" id="Page_72">[Pg 72]</a></span> +licking the salt stones in the ice, which formed her +diet, a quantity of human hair grew out of them, and +the next day a human head was developed, and then +appeared a whole man. Bör, the son of this man, +married a daughter of one of the ice-giants, and they +had three children, the oldest of whom was Odin, +who became the rulers of heaven and earth, because +they were all good, while the children of Ymir, the +ice-giant, were evil. Then, as now, the Good and the +Evil were at war. Finally the ice-giant was slain, and +being thrown into space, the world was created from +his body; his blood forming the sea and the rivers; +his flesh the earth; his hair the grass; his bones the +rocks; his teeth and broken jaws the stones; and of +his head the heavens, at the four ends of which were +placed four dwarfs, called North, South, East, and +West. Of this giant’s brains, thrown into the air, +they formed the clouds, while of the sparks from the +land of fire were made the stars.</p> + +<p>“As the sons of Bör, who, you must remember, +were the gods of heaven and earth, were walking on +the shore of the sea, they discovered two blocks, +whereof they created a man and a woman. Odin +gave them life and souls, while his brothers endowed +them with other human faculties and powers. Odin +was the Jupiter, the chief, of the northern gods. He +is the god of song and of war, and was the inventor +of the Runic characters, or alphabet. He was the +ruler of Valhalla, the home of heroes slain in battle. +There is much more that is curious and interesting in +the mythology of the Scandinavians, which I must +ask you to read for yourselves.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_73" id="Page_73">[Pg 73]</a></span> +“Olaf II. propagated Christianity with fire and +sword. He demolished the temples of paganism, and +founded Trondhjem, or Drontheim, as it is called on our +maps. His successor, St. Olaf, followed his example, till +his cruelty excited a rebellion, and Canute the Great, +of Denmark, landing in Norway, was elected king. +Olaf fled into Sweden, where he organized an army, +and attempted to recover his throne; but he was defeated +and slain in a battle near Trondhjem. His body +was found, a few years later, in a perfect state of preservation, +which was regarded as a miracle, and Olaf +was canonized as a saint. His remains are said to +have wrought many miracles, and up to the time of the +Reformation, thousands of pilgrims annually visited his +shrine at Trondhjem. Even in London churches were +dedicated to this saint.</p> + +<p>“Canute gave Norway to his son Sweyn, who, upon +the death of his father, was dispossessed of the throne +by Magnus I., the son of St. Olaf. He was succeeded +by Harold III., a great warrior, who founded Osloe, +now Christiania. After Olaf III. and Magnus III. +came Sigurd, who, in 1107, made a pilgrimage of four +years to Jerusalem, with a fleet of sixty vessels, and +distinguished himself in the holy wars. His death was +followed by civil dissensions, until Hako IV. obtained +the throne. He lost his life in an attempt to retain +the Hebrides Islands, claimed by Scotland. Then +war with Denmark, the monopoly of trade by the +Hanse towns, and a fearful plague, which depopulated +whole sections, produced a decline in the national +prosperity of Norway. Hako VI., who died in 1380, +had married the daughter of the King of Denmark, +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_74" id="Page_74">[Pg 74]</a></span> +and the crown of Norway descended to his son, Olaf +III., of Denmark, in whom the sovereignties of Norway +and Denmark were united. Olaf was succeeded +by his mother Margaret, celebrated in history as ‘the +Semiramis of the North.’ She conquered Sweden, +and annexed it to her own dominions. By the ‘Union +of Calmar,’ signed by the principal nobles and prelates +of the three Scandinavian kingdoms, the three +crowns were united in one person, the subjects of each +to have equal rights. This compact was disregarded, +and Norway was hopelessly oppressed by the ruler. +The Union, however, continued till 1623; but Norway +was subject to Denmark till 1814.</p> + +<p>“When the allied powers of Europe, which were +engaged in putting down the first Napoleon, rearranged +the map of Europe, the destiny of Norway +was changed. Russia wanted Finland, and she offered +Norway in compensation for it to Sweden, with the +further condition that Bernadotte should join the allies. +He accepted the terms, and the King of Denmark was +compelled, by force of arms, to cede Norway to +Sweden. The Norwegians would not submit to the +change, and declared their independence. Prince +Christian, of Denmark, who was then governor general +of Norway, called a convention of the people at +Eidsvold, and a new constitution was framed, and +the prince elected King of Norway. Bernadotte +invaded Norway with a Swedish army, while the +allies blockaded the coast. Resistance was hopeless, +and as Sweden offered favorable terms, Christian abdicated, +and an arrangement was immediately effected. +The constitution was accepted by the king, and Norway +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_75" id="Page_75">[Pg 75]</a></span> +became an independent nation, united to Sweden +under one king. Bernadotte became King of Sweden +and Norway under the title of Charles XIV., John. +He refused the Norwegians a separate national flag; +but when he attempted to alter the constitution to suit +his own views, the Storthing resolutely and successfully +resisted his interference. This body abolished +titles of nobility—an act which the king vetoed; but +three successive Storthings passed the law, and thus, by +the constitution, made it valid in spite of the veto. The +Norwegians were not to be intimidated even by the +appearance of a military force, and have ever been +jealous to the last degree of their rights and privileges +as a nation.</p> + +<p>“Bernadotte was succeeded by his son Oscar I., +who gave the Norwegians a separate national flag; and +he flattered the vanity of the people by allowing himself +to be styled the ‘King of Norway and Sweden’ in +all public acts relating to Norway, instead of ‘Sweden +and Norway.’ In 1859, Oscar was succeeded by his +son Charles XV., who is now the King of Sweden and +Norway. In the history of Denmark and Sweden, +more will be said of this kingdom.</p> + +<p>“In French, Norway is <em>Norvège</em>; in German, <em>Norwegen</em>; +in Spanish, <em>Noruega</em>; and <em>Norge</em> in the Scandinavian +languages. Now, I dare say you would like +to visit the shore.”</p> + +<p>The professor closed his remarks, and the several +boatswains piped away their crews.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_76" id="Page_76">[Pg 76]</a></span></p> +<h2>CHAPTER V.</h2> + +<p class="center"><strong>MR. CLYDE BLACKLOCK AND MOTHER.</strong></p> + + +<p>Belonging to the squadron were fourteen +boats, ranging from the twelve-oar barge down +to the four-oar cutter. In the waters of Brockway +harbor, rowing had been the principal exercise of the +students, though the daily evolutions in seamanship +were well calculated to develop the muscles and harden +the frame. They had been carefully trained in +the art, and, enjoying the amusement which it afforded, +they were apt scholars. As the safety of the squadron +and the saving of life at sea might often depend upon +the skill with which the boats were handled, the principal +devoted a great deal of attention to this branch +of nautical education. To give an additional zest to +the exercise, he had occasionally offered prizes at the +boat-races which the students were encouraged to +pull; and the first cutter was now in possession of +a beautiful silk flag, won by the power of the crew in +rowing.</p> + +<p>Every boy in the squadron was a swimmer. In the +summer season this accomplishment had been taught +as an art, an hour being devoted to the lesson every +day, if the weather was suitable. Cleats, the adult +boatswain of the Josephine, was the “professor” of +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_77" id="Page_77">[Pg 77]</a></span> +the art, having been selected for the responsible position +on account of his remarkable skill as a swimmer. +The boys were trained in diving, floating, swimming +under water, and taught to perform various evolutions. +Not alone in the tranquil bay were they educated to +the life of the fishes, but also in the surf, and among +the great waves. They were taught to get into a boat +from the water in a heavy sea. A worn-out old longboat +had done duty during the preceding summer as a +wreck, in order to familiarize the students with the +possibilities of their future experience. It was so prepared +that a portion of its planking could be suddenly +knocked out, and the boat almost instantly filled with +water; and the problem was, to meet this emergency +in the best manner. Other boats were at hand in case +of a real accident, or if any naturally timid fellow lost +his presence of mind. While the “wreck,” as the +practice boat was called, was moving along over the +waves, pulled by half a dozen boys, Cleats, without +warning or notice of his intention, opened the aperture +near her keel. Sometimes she was loaded with +stones, so that she went to the bottom like a rock, +though this part of the programme was always carried +out on a beach, where the receding tide would enable +the professor to recover the boat. The crew were then +to save themselves by swimming ashore, or to another +boat. Sometimes, also, the “wreck” was loaded with +broken spars, pieces of board, and bits of rope; and +the problem was for the crew to construct a raft in the +water, often in a rough sea. All these exercises, and +many others, were heartily enjoyed by the boys, and a +ringing cheer always announced the safety of a crew, +either on the shore, in a boat, or on the raft.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_78" id="Page_78">[Pg 78]</a></span> +Many persons, and even those who are tolerable +swimmers, have been drowned simply by the loss of +their presence of mind. The dashing of the waves, +or the great distance of the land or other place of +safety, intimidates them, and they are unable to use +their powers. But the students of the squadron were +gradually and carefully accustomed to the water, so +that they could swim a reasonable distance without +wearing themselves out, could rest their limbs by +floating, and were taught to avail themselves of any +expedient to secure their safety. If a boat was stove +on the rocks in a surf, or was run down by a vessel, +the fact of being in the water did not frighten them +out of their wits, for they had been trained to feel quite +at home, as in their native element. They were actually +drilled to confront danger in every imaginable +form. But a gentle and timid boy was not pitched +into the water, even after he had learned to swim. His +constitutional shrinking was slowly and skilfully overcome, +so that even the most delicate—though but few +such ever found their way into the ranks of the squadron—took +to the water as a pastime. Of course the +degree of proficiency in the art of swimming, and of +the acquired ability to meet danger in the water, differed +very widely in different boys; but all were accustomed +to the waves, and, in a measure, to leading +the life of a duck or a fish.</p> + +<p>The crews of the several boats piped over the side, +and took their places, the rest of the students being +distributed in the barges and cutters, till only the adult +officers remained in the ship. Each one, as it was +loaded, pulled off, and took its station in the order in +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_79" id="Page_79">[Pg 79]</a></span> +which the boat squadron usually moved. The commodore’s +barge and the ship’s first cutter, each twelve +oars, led the van, while the other boats came in four +ranks of three each. All the boats carried the American +flag at the stern, and each one had its number at +the bow. All the Young America’s boats had their +numbers on a white, the Josephine’s on a green, and +the Tritonia’s on a blue flag.</p> + +<p>The tactics of the boat squadron were many and +various, which had been adopted more to give interest +to the exercise than for any inherent utility. +These movements were regulated by signals from the +commodore’s barge. Mr. Lowington had decided to +make an excursion among the islands in the Fjord before +dinner, and visit the town in the afternoon. A +pilot was put in the commodore’s barge, and Captain +Cumberland, as acting flag officer, was in command +of the squadron. The principal and Professor Badois +were passengers in his barge.</p> + +<p>The cutters were formed in their usual array, and +the two boats from the yachts brought up the rear. +The signal officer, who was a quartermaster from the +ship, at the order of the captain, elevated the white +flag crossed with red, with which all the signals were +made. The coxswains of the several boats could +see this flag, while the oarsmen could not, being +back to the barge, and not allowed to look behind +them.</p> + +<p>“Oars!” said each coxswain, as soon as the signal +appeared.</p> + +<p>At this command the several crews, who had been +laying on their oars, prepared for the stroke. The +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_80" id="Page_80">[Pg 80]</a></span> +signal officer dropped the flag to the port side of the +barge.</p> + +<p>“Give way!” added each coxswain; and the boat +squadron moved off.</p> + +<p>In order to keep the lines full, the larger quarter +boat of the Grace had been borrowed and manned, +and now took the place of the second cutter, which +had been stove, and upon which the three carpenters +of the squadron were now at work, making the necessary +repairs. The fleet made a splendid appearance, +with the flags flying, and with the officers and crews +in their best uniforms. The people on the shore, and +on board of the various vessels in the harbor, gathered +to see the brilliant array. The crew of an English +steamer cheered lustily, and the lady passengers waved +their handkerchiefs. Suddenly the signal on the commodore’s +barge went up again.</p> + +<p>“Stand by to toss!” said the several coxswains, as +the fleet of boats came abreast of the steamer, which +was the Orlando, bound from Hull to Christiania.</p> + +<p>The signal went down to the port side.</p> + +<p>“Toss!” continued the coxswains, only loud +enough to be heard by the crews, for they had been +taught that the unnecessary screaming of orders makes +an officer seem ridiculous, and injures the effect of the +manœuvre.</p> + +<p>At the word every oar went up, and was held perpendicularly +in the air with the left hand. A bugle +blast from the barge at this moment brought every student +to his feet, with his right hand to his cap.</p> + +<p>“One!” said the coxswain of each boat, at a dip of +the signal flag.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_81" id="Page_81">[Pg 81]</a></span> +A rousing cheer, accompanied by a swing of the +cap, followed, and was twice repeated, making up the +complement of the three cheers, in return for the salutations +of the steamer’s people. Her crew returned +the compliment in like manner. At another blast of +the bugle, the crews were seated with their oars still +up. Again the signal in the barge was elevated.</p> + +<p>“Stand by!” said the coxswains, which was only a +warning to be ready.</p> + +<p>The flag dropped to port.</p> + +<p>“Let fall!” added the coxswain; and all the oars +dropped into the water together, while the flag was again +elevated. “Give way!” and the stroke was resumed.</p> + +<p>The passengers of the Orlando clapped their hands +vigorously, as they witnessed the perfection of the +movements. The fleet proceeded up the bay towards +the west front of the town, where a considerable collection +of people had assembled to witness the novel +parade. The barge led the way to the extreme west +of the bay, where the signal flag was again exhibited, +and then swung first to the port and then to the starboard. +This was the signal for coming into single +line, and the coxswain of each boat gave the orders +necessary to bring it into range. It was so managed +that each boat came into the new order as it turned to +pass in front of the town; so that they proceeded in +a single line before the people, but not more than +twenty feet apart. Once more the signal flag appeared, +with a double motion upwards.</p> + +<p>“Stand by to lay on your oars!” said the coxswains. +“Oars!” they continued, as the flag swung +down to starboard. “Hold water!”</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_82" id="Page_82">[Pg 82]</a></span> +These orders soon brought the boats to a stand. +The signal flag moved in a horizontal circle.</p> + +<p>“Pull, starboard; back, port. Give way!” continued +the coxswains; and the effect of this evolution was +to turn the boats as on a pivot. “Oars!” and the crew +ceased pulling, with their oars all on a level, and the +blades feathered.</p> + +<p>The boats had been turned half round, and each +coxswain aligned his own by the barge on the right. +In this position three cheers were given in compliment +to the people on the shore, though the Norwegians +seemed to be too dull and heavy to comprehend +the nature of the movement. The boats swung again, +and continued on their way, in single line, through +the narrow passage between Odderö and the main +land. Under the direction of the native pilot, the +barge led the way among the islands, affording the +students an opportunity to see the shores. When the +fleet came into the broad channel, the order was resumed, +as at first, and after various manœuvres, it was +dismissed, each boat returning to the vessel to which +it belonged.</p> + +<p>The appearance of the fleet, including the two beautiful +yachts, and the evolutions of the boats, had created +a decided sensation on board of the Orlando, +which was crowded with passengers, most of them +tourists on their way to the interior of Norway. The +crews of the several vessels piped to dinner as soon +as they returned from the excursion; but the meal was +hardly finished before visitors from the steamer began +to arrive, and the boatmen in the harbor made a good +harvest on the occasion. Among those who came to +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_83" id="Page_83">[Pg 83]</a></span> +the ship was an elegantly dressed lady, with her son +and daughter, attended by a servant man in livery. +Mrs. Garberry Blacklock was duly presented to the +principal by one of the gentlemen who had introduced +himself. She was evidently a very fine lady; for she +was “distinguished” in her manners as well as in +her dress. And her son, Clyde Blacklock, was as evidently +a very fine young gentleman, though he was +only fourteen years of age. It is doubtful whether +Miss Celia Blacklock could be regarded as a very fine +young lady, for she appeared to be very pretty, and +very modest and retiring, with but a very moderate +estimate of her own importance.</p> + +<p>For the tenth time Mr. Lowington briefly explained +the nature of the institution over which he presided; +and the fine lady listened with languishing <em>ennui</em>.</p> + +<p>“But it is a very rough life for young gentlemen,” +suggested Mrs. Blacklock. “I should fancy they +would become very, <em>very</em> rude.”</p> + +<p>“Not necessarily,” replied the principal. “We +intend that the students shall behave like gentlemen, +and we think the discipline of the ship has a tendency +to promote good manners.”</p> + +<p>“They must live like sailors, and sailors are very, +<em>very</em> rude.”</p> + +<p>“Not necessarily, madam. There is nothing in the +occupation itself that—”</p> + +<p>“But I wish to know what the fellows do,” interposed +Mr. Clyde Blacklock.</p> + +<p>“There is nothing in the occupation itself that +begets rudeness,” added Mr. Lowington, giving no +attention to the young gentleman, who had so impolitely +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_84" id="Page_84">[Pg 84]</a></span> +broken in upon the conversation of his elders. +“I see no reason why a young man cannot be a gentleman +in a ship as well as on shore.”</p> + +<p>“I dare say you have sailors to do the dirty work.”</p> + +<p>“No, madam; our students do all the work.”</p> + +<p>“Do they put their own fingers into the pitch and +the tar?” inquired the lady, with a curl of the lip +which indicated her horror.</p> + +<p>“Certainly; but we think pitch and tar are not half +so defiling as evil thoughts and bad manners.”</p> + +<p>“They are very, <em>very</em> disagreeable. The odor of +tar and pitch is intolerable.”</p> + +<p>“We do not find it so, for—”</p> + +<p>“I say, I wish to know what the fellows do.”</p> + +<p>“We are accustomed to the odor of them,” continued +the principal. “To some people the scent of +musk, and even otto of roses, is not pleasant; and, +for my part, I rather enjoy that of tar and pitch.”</p> + +<p>“That is very, <em>very</em> singular. But Clyde desires to +know what the young gentlemen do,” added the lady, +glancing at her son, behind whom stood the man in +livery, as though he were the boy’s exclusive property.</p> + +<p>“They have a regular routine of study,” replied +Mr. Lowington, addressing the lady, and declining +even to glance at the original inquirer, for the rudeness +of Mr. Clyde in interrupting the conversation +seemed to merit a rebuke. “They attend to the +studies usually pursued in the highest class of academies, +including the modern languages and navigation, +the latter being a speciality in the course.”</p> + +<p>“I don’t care what they study,” said Clyde. “What +do they do in the ship?”</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_85" id="Page_85">[Pg 85]</a></span> +“We prepare boys for college, and beyond that +pursue a regular college course, so far as our facilities +will permit. Our students have the advantage of +travel; for, in the present cruise, we shall visit all the +principal nations of Europe.”</p> + +<p>“What do they do in the ship?”</p> + +<p>“Clyde desires to know what the boys do in the +ship,” added the lady.</p> + +<p>“They learn good manners, for the first thing, +madam. There are fifteen officers in this vessel, and +nine in each of the others. They are all students, who +take their rank according to their merit. The best +scholar in each is the captain, and so on.”</p> + +<p>“Does the captain manage the ship?” asked Clyde.</p> + +<p>“Certainly.”</p> + +<p>“I should like to be the captain,” exclaimed the +young gentleman.</p> + +<p>“Do you think you could manage the ship?” +asked his mother, with a smile which expressed the +pride she felt in the towering ambition of her son.</p> + +<p>“I could, if any fellow could.”</p> + +<p>“Clyde is very fond of the sea; indeed, he worries +me sadly by his adventurous spirit,” said his mother.</p> + +<p>“I think it would do him good to go to sea,” added +the principal, rather dryly.</p> + +<p>“The students made a beautiful appearance in their +boats to-day,” continued Mrs. Blacklock. “It was +really very, <em>very</em> wonderful.”</p> + +<p>“They handle the boats very well indeed, but their +skill was only acquired by long and careful training. +As we have a considerable number of visitors on +board, madam, we will show you a little seamanship. +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_86" id="Page_86">[Pg 86]</a></span> +Captain Cumberland,” he added, turning to the young +commander, who had been making himself agreeable +to Miss Celia Blacklock.</p> + +<p>The captain asked the young lady to excuse him, +and stepping up to the principal, bowed gracefully, +and raised his cap.</p> + +<p>“He’s a regular swell,” said Clyde to his man.</p> + +<p>“He’s a young gentleman as is highly polished, +which these naval officers is generally,” replied Jeems.</p> + +<p>Mr. Lowington directed the captain to call all +hands, and go through the evolutions of loosing and +furling, for the gratification of the guests of the ship. +Captain Cumberland bowed and raised his cap again +as he retired, and the principal hoped that Clyde +would take a lesson in good manners from him.</p> + +<p>“Will you walk to the quarter-deck, Miss Blacklock,” +said the captain, touching his cap to the young +lady, to whom he had been formally introduced by the +principal. “We are going to loose and furl, and you +can see better there than here.”</p> + +<p>“With pleasure,” replied Miss Celia. “But what +did you say you were going to do?”</p> + +<p>“Loose and furl the sails,” replied the captain, as +he conducted the fair miss to the quarter-deck, where +they were followed by Mr. Lowington and the rest of +the party.</p> + +<p>“Mr. Judson,” said the commander.</p> + +<p>“Here, sir,” replied the first lieutenant.</p> + +<p>“Call all hands to loose and furl.”</p> + +<p>“All hands, sir,” responded Judson, touching his +cap to his superior, as all on board were required +to do.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_87" id="Page_87">[Pg 87]</a></span> +“They are all swells,” said Clyde to his man.</p> + +<p>“All hands, loose sails!” shouted the boatswain, as +he blew the proper blast on his whistle.</p> + +<p>In a few moments every officer and seaman was +at his station for the manœuvre indicated by the call. +The students, aware that they were simply to “show +off,” were fully determined to astonish the wondering +crowd on the decks.</p> + +<p>“Stand by to lay aloft, the ready-men!” shouted +the first lieutenant, as he received the order from the +captain.</p> + +<p>It was repeated by the second lieutenant on the +forecastle, the third in the waist, and the fourth on the +quarter-deck.</p> + +<p>“All ready, sir!” reported the several officers.</p> + +<p>“Lay aloft!”</p> + +<p>At the command those whose duty it was to prepare +the sails and rigging for the manœuvre sprang +up the rigging, and in three minutes the midshipman +aloft reported that all was ready.</p> + +<p>“Lay aloft, sail-loosers!” continued the first lieutenant.</p> + +<p>The seamen, who were arranged in proper order on +deck, the royal yard men first, then those who belonged +on the top-gallant yards, the topsail, and the +lower yards, placed in succession, so that each could +reach his station without passing others, leaped into +the rigging, and went up like so many cats.</p> + +<p>“Man the boom tricing-lines!”</p> + +<p>These are ropes by which the studding-sail booms, +which lie on the yards, are hauled up out of the way.</p> + +<p>“Trice up!”</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_88" id="Page_88">[Pg 88]</a></span> +The studding-sail booms were drawn up.</p> + +<p>“Lay out! Loose sails!”</p> + +<p>The hands jumped upon the foot-ropes, and worked +themselves out to their places on the yards, where +they loosed the sails, overhauled the rigging, and made +everything ready for the final evolution. The midshipman +in the tops reported to the officers on deck +when the preparations were completed, and the lieutenants +on deck, in their turn, reported to the first +lieutenant.</p> + +<p>“Let fall!” said the executive officer; and all, as +one, the sails dropped from the yards.</p> + +<p>The precision of the movement called forth a +demonstration of applause from the visitors. Mr. +Clyde Blacklock stood with his mouth open, looking +up at the students on the yards, but occasionally +glancing at the “swellish” first lieutenant, who seemed +to be the master-spirit of the occasion, because he +spoke in a loud voice, while the captain, who really +controlled the evolutions, could hardly be heard, except +by the executive officer, to whom alone his order +was given.</p> + +<p>“Lay in! Lay down from aloft!” said the first +lieutenant; and in a moment more all hands were on +deck again.</p> + +<p>“Do you ever man the yards, sir?” asked a gentleman +of the principal.</p> + +<p>“Occasionally, sir—not often. You are aware that +it requires some preparation, for we are obliged to +extend life-lines over the yards,” replied Mr. Lowington. +“We are not in condition to do it now. If we +should happen to be visited by the king at Copenhagen +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_89" id="Page_89">[Pg 89]</a></span> +or Stockholm, and had previous notice, we +should certainly do it.”</p> + +<p>The crew were then required to go through the +manœuvre of furling sails, which was performed with +the same precision as the first evolution, and to the +great satisfaction of the guests, who were then invited +to visit the cabins and steerage of the ship.</p> + +<p>“Mother, I like this thing,” said Mr. Clyde Blacklock.</p> + +<p>“It’s all very, <em>very</em> fine, Clyde,” replied the tender +mother.</p> + +<p>“And the ship’s going up the Baltic, and then up +the Mediterranean.”</p> + +<p>“Yes, Clyde.”</p> + +<p>“And I want to go in her.”</p> + +<p>“You, Clyde!”</p> + +<p>“Yes, that’s what I say.”</p> + +<p>“And be a sailor?”</p> + +<p>“I always told you I wanted to be a sailor. Didn’t +that head master, or whatever he is, say it would do +me good to go to sea?”</p> + +<p>“Perhaps he did, but I can’t go with you, my +dear.”</p> + +<p>“I don’t want you to go with me. I’m not a +baby!” protested the indignant youth.</p> + +<p>“But you are my only son, dear.”</p> + +<p>“If you had forty only sons, it would be all the +same to me. I say I want to go in this ship, and be +a sailor.”</p> + +<p>Mrs. Blacklock was appalled, and was sorely disturbed +by the announcement of her son. The young +gentleman insisted that he should be entered at once +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_90" id="Page_90">[Pg 90]</a></span> +as a member of the ship’s company. He suggested +to his anxious mother that she could travel by land +while he went by sea, and that she could see him +every time the ship went into port. The lady appeared +to see no alternative, but evidently felt compelled +to yield to her son’s demand. It was plain +enough, even to a casual observer, that Clyde was +the head of the family. Mrs. Blacklock promised to +speak to the principal, but she hoped he would not be +able to take her son. Before she had an opportunity +to make the application, the Orlando’s bell rang for +her passengers to return. The sound seemed to be a +relief to the lady; but Mr. Clyde put his foot down just +there, and upset all her hopes.</p> + +<p>“Come, Clyde; the Orlando is ready to go,” said she.</p> + +<p>“Let her go,” replied the hopeful son.</p> + +<p>“But we must go on board.”</p> + +<p>“You may go. I’m off to sea in this ship.”</p> + +<p>“Not now, my dear,” pleaded Mrs. Blacklock.</p> + +<p>“Now’s the time. If you don’t speak to that head +master yourself, I shall do so.”</p> + +<p>“Not now, my dearest boy. This ship is going to +Christiania, and we will speak to the gentleman on the +subject when she arrives. Come, Clyde; the boat is +waiting for us, and all the other passengers have +gone.”</p> + +<p>“You can’t fool me, mother. I’m going to sea +now. I like this ship, and I rather like those swells +of officers.”</p> + +<p>Clyde positively refused to leave the ship, though +his mother, almost in tears, begged him to accompany +her.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_91" id="Page_91">[Pg 91]</a></span> +“My son won’t go with me,” said she, as Mr. Lowington +came towards her to ascertain the cause of +their delay.</p> + +<p>“If you desire, madam, the boatswain will put him +into the boat for you,” replied the principal.</p> + +<p>“Put me into the boat!” exclaimed the indignant +youth. “I should be glad to see him do it!”</p> + +<p>“Should you? Peaks!”</p> + +<p>“On deck, sir,” replied the big boatswain, touching +his cap to the principal.</p> + +<p>“Pray, don’t, sir—don’t!” begged the lady. “Clyde +wants to go to sea in your ship.”</p> + +<p>“O, does he, indeed!” exclaimed the principal. +“We have a vacant place, and he can be accommodated.”</p> + +<p>The fond mother’s heart sank at this announcement. +Mr. Lowington, though his experience with +students of this description had been far from satisfactory, +felt that his duty to humanity required him to +take this boy, who was evidently on the high road to +ruin through the weak indulgence of his mother.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_92" id="Page_92">[Pg 92]</a></span></p> +<h2>CHAPTER VI.</h2> + +<p class="center"><strong>A DAY AT CHRISTIANSAND.</strong></p> + + +<p>“But, madam, your steamer seems to be on the +point of starting,” suggested Mr. Lowington, +as the Orlando rang her bell, and whistled violently.</p> + +<p>“I cannot help it,” replied the lady, apparently taking +no notice of the steamer. “I came over here on +a pleasure excursion, and now I feel as though I had +lost my son.”</p> + +<p>“Lost him, madam! We intend to save him,” +laughed Mr. Lowington. “But we have no claim upon +him. If you desire to leave in the steamer, the boatswain +shall put the boy on board whether he is willing +or not.”</p> + +<p>“No, no; that would be very, <em>very</em> harsh. Let the +steamer go. This matter is of vastly more consequence +than going to Christiania. James,” she added, +turning to the man in livery, “you will take the boat, +get our baggage from the steamer, and take it to the +hotel on shore.”</p> + +<p>“Yes, mem,” replied James, as he very deliberately +went over the side into the boat.</p> + +<p>“This will be a sad day to me, sir,” continued Mrs. +Blacklock, as she glanced at her son, who was whistling +an air from the last opera, as indifferent as though +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_93" id="Page_93">[Pg 93]</a></span> +his mother had been at peace in her own drawing-room.</p> + +<p>“I beg to repeat, madam, that I have not the slightest +wish to take your son into this institution.”</p> + +<p>“But Clyde insists upon joining the ship, and what +can I do?”</p> + +<p>“You can say no, if you please.”</p> + +<p>“You had better not say it, mother; if you do, I +will run away, and go to sea in a merchant ship,” +added Clyde, shaking his head.</p> + +<p>“You hear, sir, what he says,” replied Mrs. Blacklock, +with a long and deep sigh.</p> + +<p>“That would be the very best thing in the world for +a boy troubled with his complaint,” answered Mr. +Lowington.</p> + +<p>“I have no complaint; I’m not sick,” growled +Clyde.</p> + +<p>“I’m afraid you are, my boy, though you don’t know +it. The most dangerous maladies often make great +progress even before their existence is suspected.”</p> + +<p>“Nothing ails me,” added Clyde.</p> + +<p>“This seems to be a very nice ship, and you say the +students are all gentlemen,” continued the lady, glancing +around her at the ship and the crew. “If Clyde +must go to sea—”</p> + +<p>“I must, mother,” interposed the young gentleman, +very decidedly.</p> + +<p>“If he must go to sea, he had better go with you, +sir.”</p> + +<p>“If you will walk into the cabin, madam, I will +show you our regulations,” said the principal, leading +the way down the steps.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_94" id="Page_94">[Pg 94]</a></span> +Clyde followed, apparently unwilling that a word +should be said which he could not hear.</p> + +<p>“I want to speak with your mother alone,” interposed +Mr. Lowington.</p> + +<p>“I’m going too,” persisted Clyde, after Mrs. Blacklock +had descended the stairs.</p> + +<p>“I prefer to see your mother alone,” added the +principal, firmly.</p> + +<p>“You are going to talk about me, and I want to hear +what is said,” replied the youth, rudely.</p> + +<p>“Peaks, remain here,” said the principal to the big +boatswain, who had followed them to the companionway.</p> + +<p>Mr. Lowington descended the steps, and Peaks +slipped in behind him, fully understanding his duty +without any explanations. Clyde attempted to follow, +but the entrance was effectually blockaded by the stalwart +forward officer.</p> + +<p>“Get out of my way; I want to go down there,” +said Clyde, in no gentle tones.</p> + +<p>“It can’t be done, my hearty,” replied Peaks.</p> + +<p>“I’m going down, any way.”</p> + +<p>“I think not, my little gentleman.”</p> + +<p>“Yes, I am! Get out of my way.”</p> + +<p>“Ease off, my hearty. Don’t get up a squall.”</p> + +<p>“I want to see my mother,” growled Clyde.</p> + +<p>“You were not invited to the cabin, and your mother +was,” answered Peaks, very mildly.</p> + +<p>“I don’t care if I wasn’t; I’m going down.”</p> + +<p>“So you said before;” and the boatswain tried to +pacify the youngster, and to induce him to be reasonable; +but Clyde had always had his own way, and +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_95" id="Page_95">[Pg 95]</a></span> +was ready to fight for it now, even though he had +nothing to gain by it.</p> + +<p>Captain Cumberland was still walking with Miss +Celia, explaining to her the nature of the discipline on +board, and giving her an account of the voyage across +the Atlantic. A group of the officers had collected +on the quarter-deck, and, much amused at the scene, +were observing the conduct of Clyde. As he became +more violent, his sister tried to quiet him, and induce +him to behave like a gentleman; but he replied to her +in a tone and with words which made the captain’s +cheeks tinge with indignation.</p> + +<p>Finally, when he found that abuse had no effect +upon the stout boatswain, he drew back, and made a +desperate plunge at his heavy opponent. Peaks caught +him by the shoulders, and lifted him off his feet like a +baby. Taking him in his arms, with one hand over +his mouth, to smother his cries, he bore him to the +waist, where his yells could not be heard by his +mother.</p> + +<p>“Be quiet, little one,” said Peaks, as he seated himself +on the main-hatch, and twined his long legs +around those of the prisoner, so that he was held as +fast as though he had been in the folds of an anaconda. +“Hold still, now, and I’ll spin you a sea-yarn. Once +on a time there was a little boy that wanted to go to +sea—”</p> + +<p>“Let me go, or I’ll kill you!” sputtered Clyde; but +the boatswain covered his mouth again, and silenced +him.</p> + +<p>“Kill me! That would be wicked. But I’m not +a mosquito, to be cracked in the fingers of such a dear +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_96" id="Page_96">[Pg 96]</a></span> +little boy as you are. But you snapped off my yarn; +and if you don’t hold still, I can’t spin it ship-shape.”</p> + +<p>Clyde had well nigh exhausted his breath in his +fruitless struggle, and before his sister went far enough +forward to see him, he was tolerably calm, because he +had no more strength to resist. Then the boatswain +told his story of a boy that wanted to go to sea, but +found that he could not have his own way on board +the ship.</p> + +<p>In the cabin, Mrs. Blacklock told a pitiful story of +the wilfulness of her son; that she was obliged to do +just as he said, and if he wanted anything, however +absurd it might be, she was obliged to give it to him, +or he made the house too “hot” for her. Her husband +had died when the children were small, and the +whole care of them had devolved on her. Clyde had +made her miserable for several years. She had sent +him to several celebrated schools; but he had got into +trouble immediately, and she had been compelled to +take him away, to prevent him from killing himself +and her, as she expressed it. Her husband had left +her a handsome property, but she was afraid her son +would spend it all, or compel her to do so, before he +became of age.</p> + +<p>Mr. Lowington repeated only what most of her +friends had told her before—that her weak indulgence +would be the ruin of the boy; that he needed a strong +arm. He was willing to take him into the Academy +ship, but he must obey all the rules and follow all the +regulations. The perplexed mother realized the truth +of all he said.</p> + +<p>“You will take him as an officer—won’t you, sir?” +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_97" id="Page_97">[Pg 97]</a></span> +she asked, when she had in a measure reconciled herself +to the discipline proposed.</p> + +<p>“Certainly not, madam,” replied the principal. +“If he ever becomes an officer, he must work himself +up to that position, as the other students do.”</p> + +<p>“But you could let him have one of the rooms in +the cabin. I am willing to pay extra for his tuition.”</p> + +<p>“No, madam; he must go with the other students, +and do precisely as they do.”</p> + +<p>“Where will his servant lodge?”</p> + +<p>“His servant?”</p> + +<p>“Yes, James. He will want a servant, for I don’t +know that he ever dressed himself alone.”</p> + +<p>“He can have no servant, except those of the ship.”</p> + +<p>“That’s very, <em>very</em> hard.”</p> + +<p>“Perhaps it is, but if the boy can’t dress himself +alone, he must lie in his berth till he acquires the art +by hard thinking. I wish you to understand the matter +thoroughly before you leave him, madam.”</p> + +<p>Mrs. Blacklock struggled with the hard terms; but +even to her the case seemed like a desperate one, and +she was willing at last to try the experiment, though +she intended to follow the ship wherever she went, to +save him from suicide when his situation became absolutely +hopeless. The terms arranged, she followed +Mr. Lowington on deck, where Clyde was discovered +in the loving embrace of the big boatswain, who released +him as soon as he saw the lady.</p> + +<p>“Now, Clyde, my dear, we have arranged it all,” +said Mrs. Blacklock; and it ought to be added that such +a result would have been utterly impossible if the subject +of the negotiations had been present.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_98" id="Page_98">[Pg 98]</a></span> +“I don’t care if you have,” replied Clyde, bestowing +a fiery glance upon the boatswain, who was smiling +as blandly as though earth had no naughty boys.</p> + +<p>“Why, what’s the matter, Clyde!” demanded the +anxious mother.</p> + +<p>“I’ve had enough of this ship,” howled the little +gentleman, as he glanced again at the stout forward +officer.</p> + +<p>The complacent face of Peaks maddened him, +and Clyde felt that, perhaps for the first time in his +life, he had lost a battle. He could not bear the sight +of the boatswain’s placid features, unruffled by anything +like anger or malice. He felt that he had not +even provoked his powerful adversary. He howled in +his anger, and then he cried in his desperation. Suddenly +he seized a wooden belaying-pin from the rail, +and shied it at the boatswain’s head. Peaks caught +it in his hand, as though he had been playing toss-ball +with his victim; but the next instant his anaconda fold +encircled the youth again. Mrs. Blacklock screamed +with terror.</p> + +<p>“There is no harm done, madam,” interposed the +principal. “We don’t allow boys to throw things +here.”</p> + +<p>“You are very, <em>very</em> harsh with the poor boy.”</p> + +<p>“And the poor boy is very, very harsh with us. He +throws belaying-pins at our heads.”</p> + +<p>“He did not mean any harm.”</p> + +<p>“Perhaps not; but that’s an unpleasant way of +manifesting his regard.”</p> + +<p>“I’ve had enough of this ship! I won’t go in her!” +howled Clyde, struggling to escape from the grasp of +the officer.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_99" id="Page_99">[Pg 99]</a></span> +“Do you hear that, sir? Poor boy!”</p> + +<p>“He will soon learn better than to behave in this +violent manner. We can cure him in ten minutes after +you have left the ship.”</p> + +<p>“What! whip him?” exclaimed the mother, with +horror.</p> + +<p>“No, madam; we never strike a student under any +circumstances, unless it be in self-defence; but if a +boy won’t go when ordered, we carry him. We always +have force enough to do this without injury to +the person.”</p> + +<p>“But see the poor boy struggle!”</p> + +<p>“It will do him no harm.”</p> + +<p>“He says now that he will not go in the ship.”</p> + +<p>“If I were his parent, it would be as I said, not as +he said, after he had ceased to be reasonable. I would +consult the wishes and opinions of a boy of mine, as +long as he behaved properly—no longer. You have +only to leave him, and I assure you he shall be treated +as kindly as he will permit us to treat him. I do not +wish to influence you, but I am confident that ruin lies +in that boy’s path, unless he is reformed.”</p> + +<p>Mrs. Blacklock actually wept. She loved the boy +with a blind affection in spite of the disrespect and +even abuse that he heaped upon her. It was a terrible +struggle to her, but she finally decided to leave +him on board of the ship, perhaps satisfied that nothing +else could ever save him from himself, and her +from the misery his reckless conduct constantly occasioned +her.</p> + +<p>“You wished to go to sea, Clyde, and I have decided +to leave you in this ship,” said the poor mother, +trembling with emotion.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_100" id="Page_100">[Pg 100]</a></span> +“But I tell you I won’t stay in this ship,” roared +Clyde, as Peaks, at a signal from the principal, released +his prisoner.</p> + +<p>“I can do nothing with you, my dear boy. You +won’t obey me, and I must leave you to those who can +control you. I am going on shore now, but I shall +see you again at Christiania.”</p> + +<p>“I won’t stay!” howled Clyde.</p> + +<p>“Good by, Clyde,” said Mrs. Blacklock, desperately, +as she folded her son in her arms, and kissed him +on both cheeks.</p> + +<p>“I tell you I won’t stay!” cried the angry youth, +breaking away from his mother’s embrace.</p> + +<p>“Make it short, madam,” suggested Mr. Lowington.</p> + +<p>“Do try to be good, Clyde, and then you can come +home very, <em>very</em> soon,” added Mrs. Blacklock, as the +principal conducted her to the accommodation ladder, +where the first cutter had been manned to put her on +shore.</p> + +<p>“I tell you again, I won’t stay! If you leave me, +I’ll jump overboard.”</p> + +<p>“O!” groaned the weak mother.</p> + +<p>“If you do, young man, we will pick you up with +the greatest pleasure,” said Mr. Lowington, as he hurried +the lady to the side.</p> + +<p>“O, if he should!” gasped she.</p> + +<p>“There is not a particle of danger, madam; Mr. +Peaks will take excellent care of him,” replied her +comforter.</p> + +<p>The boatswain, at a nod from Mr. Lowington, +again embraced Clyde, but did not injure him, nor permit +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_101" id="Page_101">[Pg 101]</a></span> +him to injure himself. The lady was handed into +the boat, and Captain Cumberland politely performed +this service for Miss Blacklock. Of course the poor +mother was in an agony of doubt and anxiety, but the +students in the cutter seemed to be so cheerful, contented +and gentlemanly, that she hoped for the best.</p> + +<p>Clyde was appalled at the situation, and one of the +stern realities of life seemed suddenly to dawn upon +him. As soon as his mother disappeared over the +side, he ceased to struggle, for he gained nothing by +it, and the students appeared to be amused by his sufferings. +Peaks released him, and the victim of wholesome +discipline looked about him with a wondering +stare; but there was no mother to cajole or intimidate, +and he was thrown entirely upon his own resources +for the means of resistance, if he purposed to resist. +He appeared to be stupefied by the situation, and Mr. +Lowington, taking advantage of his bewilderment, +invited him into the main cabin, where he kindly but +firmly “laid down the law” to him. Clyde was by +no means conquered, but was rather considering how +he should escape from this trying position. At the +close of the interview, the principal handed the patient +over to one of the stewards, and requested him to see +the new comer clothed in the uniform of the ship. +Peaks was directed to keep an eye on the victim while +the crew were on shore.</p> + +<p>All hands were soon seated in the boats, and in half +an hour all the students in the squadron were turned +loose in the streets of Christiansand. Though the instructors +were of the party, they were not required to +exercise any particular supervision over their pupils. +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_102" id="Page_102">[Pg 102]</a></span> +There was hardly anything to be seen, and as a large +number of the students had never crossed the Atlantic +before, they wanted to know if they had come so far +to see such a town. Most of the houses were of wood, +but they were neat and well kept. As the capital of +the province of Christiansand, the town was the residence +of the Stift Amtmand, or governor, and of the +bishop of the diocese. It was founded in 1641, and +having an excellent harbor, it is a place of considerable +commercial importance, having a population of +about ten thousand.</p> + +<p>The boys visited the cathedral, which is a fine +building of gray stone, and being the first which most +of them had seen, it had a considerable interest to +them. They observed the people, and their manners +and customs, so far as they could, with more interest +than the buildings, which differed in no important +respect from those in the United States. Passing +across the water front of the town, they came to the +Torrisdal River, over which there is an excellent +bridge. They crossed the stream, and walked to an +antiquated church. Some of the houses on the way +were very neat, pretty structures, not unlike the one-story +dwellings seen all over New England.</p> + +<p>“Here’s a Runic stone,” said Dr. Winstock, as the +captain and several of the officers followed him into +the burying-ground connected with the ancient church.</p> + +<p>“What is a Runic stone?” asked Lincoln, the third +lieutenant.</p> + +<p>“A stone with Runic characters upon it.”</p> + +<p>“I haven’t the least idea what the word means, +though Poe sings, in the ‘Bells,’——</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_103" id="Page_103">[Pg 103]</a></span></p> +<p style="margin-left: 10em;"> + ‘Keeping time, time, time,<br /> + <span style="margin-left: .4em;">In a sort of Runic rhyme!’</span></p> + +<p>Runic is derived from a word which means secret; +and a Runic stone is any memorial, table, or column, +on which Runic characters are inscribed, as a tombstone, +a boundary mark. There are sixteen of these +characters, forming an alphabet, which were used by +the ancient Scandinavians, and were thought by them +to possess magical properties, and willow wands inscribed +with them were used by the pagans of the north +in their magic rites. Sticks were used as almanacs, to +keep the account of the days and months, and also +constituted the day-books and ledgers of the ancients. +In Germany, in modern times, the baker, for example, +and the purchaser of bread, each had a stick, and +the number of loaves delivered was notched upon +both. Scarcely less primitive was the custom of some +of our American farmers, who kept their accounts on +the barn door; and I have heard a story of one who, +when required to produce his books in court at a +lawsuit, carried in the barn door, and held it up before +the judge and jury. In Denmark and Sweden you will +see more Runic writings, especially in the museum at +Copenhagen.”</p> + +<p>“They seem to bury people here, in about the same +manner as with us,” said Captain Cumberland.</p> + +<p>“There is not half so much difference between +things here and those at home as I expected to find,” +added Judson.</p> + +<p>“The houses are almost the same, and so are the +people,” continued Norwood.</p> + +<p>“People coming to Europe are often disappointed +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_104" id="Page_104">[Pg 104]</a></span> +because they find almost everything so near like what +they have been accustomed to,” replied the doctor. +“You will find Norway and Sweden more like New +England than any other countries on the continent. +But I think you will find differences enough to excite +your interest and attention before you return.”</p> + +<p>The students walked back to Christiansand, and +having exhausted the town, went on board the vessels +of the squadron, ready and even anxious to continue +the voyage. The pilots were on deck, Paul Kendall +and lady had returned to the Grace, and the principal +only waited the arrival of the steamer Moss, from +Frederiksværn, to give the order to get under way. +The boats were all hoisted up except the first cutter, +which was to bring off the unfortunate crew of the +professor’s barge, as soon as they arrived.</p> + +<p>At eight o’clock the steamer came in, and the first +cutter, with the principal on board, hastened to her +landing-place, to meet Sanford and his companions. +To his great astonishment and regret, they were not on +board of the Moss. The captain, who spoke English +very well, knew nothing about the absentees, and was +quite confident they were not on board of the Foldin, +the boat which had picked them up. Captain Hoell +had said nothing to him about the accident, but then +the Foldin had arrived only that morning, instead of +the night before, when she was due, and their interview +had been very hurried. “Did any person in the +Moss know anything about the unfortunates?” the +captain was kind enough to inquire; and a passenger +was found who heard some one say that a party of +young men had been landed by the Foldin at Lillesand. +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_105" id="Page_105">[Pg 105]</a></span> +But the Moss had left Lillesand at six o’clock, +and her captain had not seen or heard of the persons +described. Mr. Lowington was very anxious about +the fate of the second cutter’s crew, and feared that +some of them had been injured by the collision, so +that they were unable to take the steamer back to +Christiansand. He returned to the cutter and pulled +off to the Tritonia, and directed Mr. Tompion, the +second vice-principal, in charge of her, to run into +Lillesand, and ascertain what had become of the +absentees. Without waiting for the signal, the Tritonia +got under way, and under full sail, with a fresh +breeze, stood out of the harbor. The other vessels +followed her soon after, the principal intending to lay +off and on till the Tritonia reported.</p> + +<p>The ship had been searched from keel to truck for +Ole Amundsen on the day before. Of course he was +not found, and the conclusion was that he had dropped +into the water and swam ashore, though it was difficult +to understand how he had accomplished the feat +without detection. Inquiries in regard to him were +made on shore, but if any one knew him, application +was not made to the right persons.</p> + +<p>Mr. Clyde Blacklock had not yet jumped overboard, +and during the busy scene of getting under way, he +stood with his mouth agape, watching the proceedings +with wondering interest. He was not quite sure, after +his anger had subsided, that he had made a bad bargain. +There was something rather pleasant in the +motion of the ship, and the zeal and precision with +which the students worked, showed that they enjoyed +their occupation. No one noticed Clyde, or even +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_106" id="Page_106">[Pg 106]</a></span> +seemed to be aware of his presence. Before, when +he behaved in an extravagant and unreasonable manner, +the boys only laughed at him. They did not beg +him to be pacified, as his mother and James always +did; on the contrary they seemed to enjoy his chagrin.</p> + +<p>As soon as the ship was under way, the new student +was informed that he belonged to the port watch, +second part, and the silver star, which designated his +watch, was affixed to his left arm. He was told that +he would be called with the others to take his turn on +deck during the night.</p> + +<p>“What am I to do?” he asked, rather blankly.</p> + +<p>“Just the same as the others do?” replied De Forrest, +the fourth lieutenant, who had the deck with the +second part of the port watch. “I have your station +bill.”</p> + +<p>“What’s that?”</p> + +<p>“It is a card on which all your duties are explained. +Here it is,” added De Forrest, producing the station +bill. “You are No. 71; all the even numbers belong +to the starboard watch, and all the odd numbers to +the port.”</p> + +<p>These cards were all printed; for among the various +amusements provided for the students, a couple +of octavo Novelty presses, with a sufficient supply of +type and other printing material had been furnished. +All the blanks for use in the ship were printed on +board, and the Oceanic Enterprise, a weekly Journal, +had been regularly issued during the voyage across +the Atlantic, though a gale of wind, which disturbed +the equilibrium of the press and the printers, had +delayed its publication a couple of days on one occasion.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_107" id="Page_107">[Pg 107]</a></span> +Clyde read the station bill which was handed to him +by the officer, but it would have been just as intelligible +to him if it had been in Runic character.</p> + +<p>“‘Reefing, main-topsail, and main-topsail halyards,’” +said Clyde, reading from the card. “What +does all that mean?”</p> + +<p>“You mind only what you have to do yourself, and +not trouble your head about orders that have nothing +to do with your work; for the orders come as thick as +snow flakes at Christmas. When all hands are called +to reef topsails, you are one of them, of course. When +any thing is said about topsails, or topsail-halyards, +you are the man.”</p> + +<p>“Good; I understand that, and I shall make a +sailor, I know,” added Clyde.</p> + +<p>“I hope you will. The order will come to ‘settle +away the topsail halyards.’ Be ready to help then.”</p> + +<p>“But I don’t know the topsail halyards from a pint +of soup.”</p> + +<p>“Here they are,” added the lieutenant, conducting +his pupil to the rail, and pointing out the main-topsail +halyards. “Then, when the officer says, ‘Aloft, top-men,’ +you will run up the main rigging here, and the +midshipman in the top will tell you what to do. At +the word, you will lay out on the yard, and do as the +others do. At the words, ‘Lay down from aloft,’ +you will come on deck, and hoist up the main-topsail. +Nearly all your duty is connected with the main-topsail. +In tacking, you will go to the clew-garnets.”</p> + +<p>“What are they?”</p> + +<p>“These ropes, by which the corners of the mainsail +are hauled up,” answered De Forrest, pointing out the +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_108" id="Page_108">[Pg 108]</a></span> +clew-garnets. “You will also let go the main tack. +In getting under way, you will help loose the main-topsail. +In anchoring, you are at the main clew-lines, +and the main brace. Here they are. In loosing and +furling you are on the main-topsail. In boat service, +you are attached to the third cutter. You sleep in +berth No. 71, your ship’s number, and eat with mess +No. 6.”</p> + +<p>De Forrest, as instructed by the principal, carefully +explained the duties of the new comer, indicating +every rope as he mentioned it, and describing its use. +He was prudent in his manner, and tried to give the +proud youth no offence by making him feel the superiority +of an officer. The lieutenant then conducted +him to his mess room, and pointed out his berth.</p> + +<p>The wind was still from the southward, and quite +fresh; and though the squadron went under short sail, +it was off Lillesand in a couple of hours. The Tritonia, +which was a fast vessel, did not detain her consorts +more than a couple of hours. Mr. Tompion +boarded the ship, and reported that the crew of the +second cutter had landed at Lillesand, and fearing that +they should miss the ship if they returned to Christiansand, +had taken carioles, and left early in the morning +for Christiania. There were ten of the party, and +one of them was a Norwegian, though he was dressed +like the others. Mr. Lowington could not imagine +who the Norwegian was that wore the Academy’s +uniform, for it did not occur to him that Ole could +have joined them. He was glad to hear that all of +them were well, and able to travel; and had no doubt +they would arrive in safety at Christiania. He was +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_109" id="Page_109">[Pg 109]</a></span> +aware that the crew of the second cutter were rather +wild boys; but as there were no large towns in the +interior, he had no fear that they would be led astray +among the simple Norwegians.</p> + +<p>The fleet filled away again, and at eight bells the +following morning was off Frederiksværn.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_110" id="Page_110">[Pg 110]</a></span></p> +<h2>CHAPTER VII.</h2> + +<p class="center"><strong>UP THE CHRISTIANIA FJORD.</strong></p> + + +<p>“I should like to know where this place is,” +said Ryder, the second master, as he appeared +upon the quarter-deck of the ship, with one of the +forty bound volumes of Harper’s Magazine, which +were contained in the library.</p> + +<p>“What place?” asked Lincoln, the third lieutenant, +as he glanced at the volume.</p> + +<p>“That’s more than I know; but here is a picture of +a steamer between two high bluffs of rock, and under +it, she is said to be entering the fjord.”</p> + +<p>“We are just at the mouth of the fjord now, and +if there are any such rocks as those here, I should like +to see them. Why, you see they rise above the +steamer’s main-topmast.”</p> + +<p>Lincoln took the book, and read the description; +but he was none the wiser for his labor, for the narrow +strait through which the steamer in the picture +was passing was not particularly described. The +book was shown to the pilot, who did not know just +where the place was; but after he had been told that +the steamer came from Gottenburg, and was on her +way to Christiania, he thought that the bold rocks +must be in the vicinity of Frederiksværn. He offered +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_111" id="Page_111">[Pg 111]</a></span> +to take the ship through the pass, as the wind was +fair, and Mr. Lowington consented that he should do +so, for in order to enable the students to see the fine +scenery on the fjord, the studies were to be laid aside +for the day.</p> + +<p>“I don’t see where there can be anything like this,” +said Ryder, as he surveyed the shores.</p> + +<p>“There are plenty of islands here, but certainly +none of them rise to any such heights as those in the +picture,” replied Lincoln. “They are bare rocks out +at sea, but some of them are a little green farther in. +It don’t begin to be so wild as I supposed it was in +these parts. Why, I have read and heard so much +about the Christiania Fjord, that I supposed it was the +grandest scenery in the world.”</p> + +<p>“It don’t look much like the picture—does it?” +laughed Ryder.</p> + +<p>In a short time the ship was approaching the narrow +pass. The cliffs on each side were very bold +and rugged, and if the students had not been feasting +themselves with grand anticipations, they would have +appreciated the scenery much better. Ryder and +Lincoln laughed when they compared the reality +with the pictures they had. The scenery could not +be called grand, though it was certainly very fine. +The strait was very narrow, and on each side of it +rings were fastened in the rocks, which were painted +white around them, for the convenience of vessels +warping out in a calm or against the wind. On the +high rock,—it could not have been a hundred feet +high,—at the right, was a small fort, which looked +grim and terrible in its way, but which any well-ordered +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_112" id="Page_112">[Pg 112]</a></span> +man of war, with modern ordnance, could +have battered down in half an hour.</p> + +<p>Passing through the strait, the ship came in sight of +the small village of Frederiksværn, which is a naval +station, where a number of gunboats are housed in a +series of uniform buildings. The town itself is only +a hamlet, but as the vessels proceeded, those on board +saw Laurvig at the head of the bay, which is a place +of considerable importance.</p> + +<p>“Little Fœrder,” said the pilot, an hour later, as he +pointed to a tall, red light-house, at the entrance of +the fjord.</p> + +<p>“Then the land we see beyond must be Sweden,” +added Ryder.</p> + +<p>“<em>Sverige</em>,” nodded the pilot.</p> + +<p>“I suppose that is Sweden, but I don’t see the use +of having half a dozen names to a country.”</p> + +<p>“And this is <em>Norge</em>,” added the second master, +pointing to the other side.</p> + +<p>“Yes, <em>Norge</em>,” answered the pilot, pleased to hear +the young officer apply the Norwegian name.</p> + +<p>On the port hand of the ship was a vast sea of +rocky islands, of all shapes and sizes. Those farthest +from the mainland were entirely destitute of soil or +verdure; but in the distance a few pines, and the fresh +tints of the early grass, could be seen.</p> + +<p>“Keep her north-north-east,” said the pilot.</p> + +<p>“Man the weather and stand by the lee braces!” +shouted the first lieutenant.</p> + +<p>Clyde Blacklock took out his station card, and +looked to see whether the order applied to him.</p> + +<p>“You are on the main brace,” said Scott, a good-natured +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_113" id="Page_113">[Pg 113]</a></span> +young tar, who happened to be near the new +student. “There you are, on the weather side.”</p> + +<p>“Who spoke to you?” demanded Clyde, dropping +his card, and looking Scott in the face.</p> + +<p>“I haven’t been introduced to you, I know; but I +thought you wanted to know your duty,” laughed +Scott.</p> + +<p>“You take care of yourself, and I’ll mind my own +duty,” growled Clyde.</p> + +<p>“All right, my lad,” replied the good-natured student, +whose station was at the weather fore brace.</p> + +<p>Clyde walked aft, and placed himself in the line +of those who were to haul on the weather main +brace.</p> + +<p>“Slack the lee, and haul on the weather braces,” +said the first lieutenant, and the other officers repeated +the order.</p> + +<p>“Walk away with it!” shouted the fourth lieutenant +to those at the main brace.</p> + +<p>Clyde took hold, and tugged with all his might; +but the brace would not come away. To tell the +exact truth, there was a disposition among the students +to haze the new comer, and the main brace men +had agreed among themselves to let him do the whole +of the work. They pretended to haul, but not one of +them bore a pound upon the brace.</p> + +<p>“Pull!” shouted Clyde, at the top of his lungs, +as he strained at the rope. “Why don’t you pull, +boys?”</p> + +<p>“Silence on the quarter-deck!” cried the executive +officer—for all work was required to be performed in +silence. “Walk away with the main brace.”</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_114" id="Page_114">[Pg 114]</a></span> +“Come, boys, why don’t you pull?” roared Clyde, +who was blest with a pair of hearty lungs.</p> + +<p>“Silence, Blacklock! You mustn’t hollo like that +when you are on duty,” interposed De Forrest.</p> + +<p>“Who says I mustn’t?” demanded Clyde, dropping +his hold upon the brace, and walking up to the officer +who had dared to give him these words of counsel, +which were uttered in a mild and pleading tone, rather +than in those of authority.</p> + +<p>“Starboard the helm,” said the executive officer.</p> + +<p>“Starboard, sir,” repeated the quartermaster at the +wheel.</p> + +<p>“Walk away with that main brace!” added the +first lieutenant.</p> + +<p>The main brace men, finding that Clyde was at +issue with the fourth lieutenant, applied themselves to +their work, and the main yard swung round.</p> + +<p>“Steady!” said the executive officer.</p> + +<p>“Steady, sir.”</p> + +<p>“Avast hauling! Belay, all.”</p> + +<p>By these manœuvres the ship had been kept away, +and was now headed directly up the fjord.</p> + +<p>“I don’t allow any fellow to speak to me like that,” +blustered Clyde. “I want you to understand that I +am a gentleman.”</p> + +<p>“Go forward, Blacklock, and don’t make a row +on the quarter-deck,” replied De Forrest, mildly.</p> + +<p>“I’ll not go forward!”</p> + +<p>“Then I must report you to the first lieutenant.”</p> + +<p>“I’m willing to do my work, but I won’t be fagged +by any nob in gold lace.”</p> + +<p>“You are making a mistake, Blacklock,” said De +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_115" id="Page_115">[Pg 115]</a></span> +Forrest, in a low tone, as he walked towards the angry +Briton, with the intention of reasoning with him upon +the absurdity of his conduct.</p> + +<p>Mr. Lowington had cautioned him and other officers +to be very prudent in dealing with the new student till +he had become accustomed to his duty, and certainly +De Forrest was prudent in the extreme. Perhaps +Clyde misunderstood the purpose of this officer when +approaching him, and suspected that he intended to +use violence, for, drawing back, he made a pass at De +Forrest with his fist. But the latter detected the nature +of the demonstration in season to ward off the +blow, and, still in the exercise of the extreme prudence +which had before characterized his conduct, retreated +to the other side of the quarter-deck.</p> + +<p>“Enough of that,” said Judson, the first lieutenant, +as he stepped between Clyde and De Forrest.</p> + +<p>Clyde was very angry. Though he had made up +his mind to perform his duty in the beginning, he +fancied that no one had the right to command him to +be silent. In his wrath he pulled off his blue jacket, +tossed it upon the deck with a flourish, and intimated +that if the first lieutenant wanted to fight, he was +ready for him. Happily the first lieutenant did not +wish to fight, though he was fully prepared to defend +himself. At this crisis, the principal observed the +hostile attitude of the young Briton, and quietly ordered +Peaks to interfere.</p> + +<p>“Go forward, Blacklock,” said Judson, calmly.</p> + +<p>“I won’t go forward! I have been insulted, and +I’ll break the sconce of the fellow that did it,” added +Clyde, glancing at the fourth lieutenant.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_116" id="Page_116">[Pg 116]</a></span> +“Come, my hearty, let us go forward, as we are +ordered,” interposed Peaks, as he picked up Clyde in +his arms, and in spite of his struggles, carried him +into the waist.</p> + +<p>It was useless to resist the big boatswain, and the +pressure of Peaks’s arms soon crushed out Clyde’s anger, +and like a little child, he was set down upon the +deck, amid the laughter of his companions. He felt +that he was not getting ahead at all; and though he +reserved the expression of his anger, he determined at +the first convenient opportunity to thrash both Judson +and De Forrest. He had also decided to run away at +the first chance, even if he had to camp on a desolate +island in doing so. He regarded Peaks as a horrible +ogre, whose only mission in the ship was to persecute +and circumvent him.</p> + +<p>“I’ll have it out with those nobs yet,” said Clyde, +as Peaks left him, restored to his senses, so far as outward +appearances were concerned.</p> + +<p>“Have it out! Have what out?” asked Scott, the +good-natured.</p> + +<p>“I’ll whip that nob who told me to be silent.”</p> + +<p>“Don’t you do it, my jolly Briton,” laughed Scott.</p> + +<p>“I can do it.”</p> + +<p>“Do you mean the first lieutenant?”</p> + +<p>“Yes, that I do; and I’ll teach him better manners.”</p> + +<p>“I wouldn’t hurt him; Judson’s a good fellow.”</p> + +<p>“I don’t care if he is; he’ll catch it; and De Forrest, +too. They insulted me.”</p> + +<p>“I dare say they didn’t mean to.”</p> + +<p>“If they didn’t, I’ll give them a chance to apologize,” +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_117" id="Page_117">[Pg 117]</a></span> +added Clyde, a little mollified by the mild words +of his companion.</p> + +<p>“That’s very kind of you; but officers don’t often +apologize to seamen for telling them of it when they +disobey the rules of the ship.”</p> + +<p>“Rules or not, I’ll hammer them both if they don’t +apologize.”</p> + +<p>“Don’t be cruel with them,” laughed Scott.</p> + +<p>“And that big boatswain—I’ll be even with +him yet,” blustered Clyde, as he shook his head +menacingly.</p> + +<p>“Are you going to thrash him too?” asked Scott, +opening his eyes.</p> + +<p>“I’ll take care of him. He don’t toss me round in +that way without suffering for it.”</p> + +<p>“Well, don’t hurt him,” suggested the good-natured +seaman.</p> + +<p>“He’ll get a broken head before he grows much +older,” added Clyde, drawing out a belaying-pin from +the fife-rail. “I shall not be in this ship a great while +longer; but I mean to stay long enough to settle my +accounts with the big boatswain and the two nobs on +the quarter-deck.”</p> + +<p>“How are you going to do it, my dear Albion?”</p> + +<p>“Leave that to me. No man can insult me without +suffering for it.”</p> + +<p>“Perhaps the officers will apologize, but I don’t believe +Peaks will. He’s an obstinate fellow, and would +do just what the principal told him to do, even if it +was to swallow you and me, and half a dozen other +fellows. You don’t mean to lick the principal too—do +you?”</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_118" id="Page_118">[Pg 118]</a></span> +“I haven’t had any trouble with him.”</p> + +<p>“But he is at the bottom of it all. He told Peaks +to persecute you. I’m not sure that the principal isn’t +more to blame than all the others put together.”</p> + +<p>“No matter for him; he has done very well.”</p> + +<p>“Then you mean to let him off?”</p> + +<p>“I say I’ve nothing against the head master.”</p> + +<p>“Don’t be too hard on Peaks,” added Scott, as he +climbed upon the rail to see the scenery of the fjord.</p> + +<p>“I suppose all these islands, points, bays, and channels +have names, just as they do on the other side of +the ocean,” said Laybold, at whose side the good-natured +tar seated himself.</p> + +<p>“Of course,” nodded Scott.</p> + +<p>“I wonder what they are.”</p> + +<p>“Don’t you know?”</p> + +<p>“Certainly not—how should I?”</p> + +<p>“I didn’t know but you might have seen the chart,” +added Scott, gravely.</p> + +<p>“There’s a town!” exclaimed the enthusiastic Laybold, +as the progress of the ship opened a channel, +at the head of which was a village, with a church.</p> + +<p>“I see; that’s Bossenboggenberg,” said Scott.</p> + +<p>“O, is it? Is that a river?”</p> + +<p>“Not at all. That’s only a channel, called the Hoppenboggen, +which extends around the Island of Toppenboggen. +That channel is navigable for small vessels.”</p> + +<p>“Where did you learn all those names?” demanded +Laybold, amazed at the astonishing words which his +companion rolled off so glibly.</p> + +<p>“My father had to send me to sea to keep me from +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_119" id="Page_119">[Pg 119]</a></span> +learning too much. My hair all fell off, and the +schoolmasters were afraid of me.”</p> + +<p>“There’s another town ahead on the port hand,” +said Laybold, a little later.</p> + +<p>“That is Aggerhousenboggen, I think. Let me +see; here’s Cape Tingumboggen, and that must be the +opening to the Stoppenboggen Fjord. Yes, that must +be Aggerhousenboggen.”</p> + +<p>“Where did you learn to pronounce Norwegian so +well, Scott?”</p> + +<p>“O, I learned Norwegian when I was an infant. I +could speak it first rate before I learned to utter my +mother tongue.”</p> + +<p>“Go ’way!” protested Laybold. “Do you know +what island that is on the starboard hand.”</p> + +<p>“To be sure I do. Do you think my education has +been neglected to that extent? That’s Steppenfetchenboggen. +A very fine island it is, too,” continued +Scott, rattling off the long names so that they had a +decidedly foreign ring.</p> + +<p>“I don’t see how you can pronounce those words,” +added Laybold. “They would choke me to death.”</p> + +<p>“I don’t believe they would,” laughed Scott.</p> + +<p>The squadron passed through several narrow passages, +and then came to a broad expanse of water at +the mouth of the Drammen River. The students +were perched on the rail and in the rigging of the +various vessels, observing with great interest the development +of the panorama, which seemed to be unrolled +before them.</p> + +<p>“It is rather fine scenery,” said Lincoln, who still +carried the book in his hand, and occasionally glanced +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_120" id="Page_120">[Pg 120]</a></span> +at the pictures; “but I think the artist here must have +multiplied the height of the cliffs by two, and divided +the height of houses, men, and masts by the same +number.”</p> + +<p>“It certainly looks like an exaggeration,” replied +Ryder.</p> + +<p>“Look at this,” added Lincoln, pointing to a scene +on the coast of Norway. “There’s a large steamer carrying +a top-gallant yard on the foremast. That mast +is probably a hundred and fifty feet high, and there +are hills and bluffs beyond it—which would lose by +the perspective—five times as high.”</p> + +<p>“Still it is very fine scenery.”</p> + +<p>“So it is; but no finer than we have on the coast of +Maine. You remember last summer we went through +the Reach, down by Machias? That was something +like this, and quite as pleasant.”</p> + +<p>“We mustn’t be too critical, Lincoln,” laughed +Ryder.</p> + +<p>“I don’t intend to be critical; but I had an idea, +from the pictures I have seen, that Christiania Fjord +was something like the Saguenay River, where the +cliffs rise perpendicularly four or five hundred feet +high. These pictures would certainly lead one to expect +such sights.”</p> + +<p>“Horton,” said the pilot, pointing to a town which +now came into view, as the vessel passed beyond a +point of land.</p> + +<p>It was a small place, in appearance not unlike a +New England village. At the wharf were a couple +of small steamers, one of which had come down the +Drammen, and the entire population of the town +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_121" id="Page_121">[Pg 121]</a></span> +seemed to have turned out on the occasion, for the +shore was covered with people. They were all neatly +dressed. On the opposite side of the fjord was the +town of Moss, where the convention by which Norway +and Sweden were united was drawn up and agreed +upon.</p> + +<p>The fleet sailed rapidly before the fresh breeze +across the broad expanse, and then entered a narrow +passage. There was a gentle declivity on each side +of the fjord, which was covered, as far as the eye +could see, with pines. Dröbak, on the right, is a village +of one street, on the side of the hill. The houses +are mostly of one story, painted yellow, with roofs +covered with red tile. Before noon the passage began +to widen, and the fleet entered another broad expanse +of water, filled with rocky islands, at the head of +which stood the city of Christiania. Some of the islets +were pretty and picturesque, in some instances having +a single cottage upon them, with a little garden. +The rocks were often of curious formation, and the +shore of one island was as regular and smooth as +though it had been a piece of masonry. After rounding +a point of rocks, the fleet came into full view of +Christiania. The city and its environs are spread out +on the southern slope of a series of hills, and presents +a beautiful landscape to the eye. On the left the country +was covered with villas, prominent among which +was Oscarshal, a summer palace of the late king. +On the right was the castle of Agershuus, rising abruptly +from the water. At a little distance from the town +was a kind of hotel, built on a picturesque island, with +its pretty landing-place, not unlike some similar establishments +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_122" id="Page_122">[Pg 122]</a></span> +near the head of Narragansett Bay. At the +wharf in front of the city, and lying in the bay, was a +considerable number of steamers, some of them quite +large. The fleet ran up to the front of the city and +anchored.</p> + +<p>“This is the end of my voyage,” said Clyde Blacklock, +when everything had been put in order on board +of the ship.</p> + +<p>“You are not going yet—are you?” laughed Scott.</p> + +<p>“Very soon.”</p> + +<p>“I thought you were going to stop, and whip Peaks +and the two lieutenants.”</p> + +<p>“Time enough for that. I suppose the ship will +stay here two or three days—won’t she?”</p> + +<p>“Perhaps a week. I suppose we shall go on shore +this afternoon, and see the sights.”</p> + +<p>“I say, Scott, if you tell those officers what I’ve +been saying to you, I’ll serve you in the same way,” +added Clyde, as for the first time it occurred to him +that he had been imprudent in developing his plans +to another.</p> + +<p>“No! You won’t lick me, too—will you?”</p> + +<p>“Not if you behave like a man, and don’t peach,” +answered Clyde, in a patronizing tone.</p> + +<p>“I will try to be a good boy, then,” laughed Scott.</p> + +<p>“I only want to catch them on shore, where I can +have fair play. I’m not to be fagged by any fellow +that ever was born.”</p> + +<p>Clyde walked uneasily about the deck till the crew +were piped to dinner, evidently thinking how he should +carry his big intentions into execution. To one less +moved by fancied insults and indignities the case +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_123" id="Page_123">[Pg 123]</a></span> +would have looked hopeless. He devoured his dinner +in a much shorter period than is usually allotted by +well-bred Englishmen to that pleasing diversion, and +hastened on deck again. Peaks was there, acting as +ship-keeper, while the carpenter was painting the +second cutter, the repairs upon which had been completed. +The big boatswain was seated on one of the +cat-heads, where he could see the entire deck of the +ship, and observe every craft that approached her. +The new student observed his position, and thought +he was seated in a very careless manner. A very +wicked thought took possession of the Briton’s mind, +and he ascended to the top-gallant forecastle. The +boatswain sat very composedly on the cat-head, with +his feet hanging over the water, and was just then +studying the beauties of the landscape. A very slight +exercise of force would displace him, and drop him +into the water.</p> + +<p>“Well, my hearty, you stowed your grub in a hurry,” +said Peaks, when he discovered the new pupil.</p> + +<p>“I was not very hungry, and thought I would take +another look at the town,” replied Clyde. “What’s +that big building off there, near the hills?”</p> + +<p>“That may be the county jail, the court-house, or +the lunatic asylum. I haven’t the least idea what it is,” +answered Peaks, indifferently. “The professors can +tell you all about those things.”</p> + +<p>“I wonder where that ship came from?” added +Clyde, pointing to a vessel which was standing in +ahead of the Young America.</p> + +<p>“That isn’t a ship,” replied Peaks, as he turned +partly round, so that he could see the craft. “That’s a +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_124" id="Page_124">[Pg 124]</a></span> +’mofferdite brig; or, as bookish people would say, an +hermaphrodite brig—half brig and half schooner. +You must call things, especially vessels, by their right +names, or you will fall in the opinion of—”</p> + +<p>At that instant the big boatswain dropped into the +deep waters of the fjord.</p> + +<p>“And you will fall, in my opinion,” said Clyde, as, +taking advantage of his antagonist’s attention to the +brig, he gave him a smart push, which displaced him +from the cat-head.</p> + +<p>But Peaks, who was half man and half fish, was as +much at home in the water as on the deck, and struck +out for the cable, by which the ship was anchored, as +the nearest point of support. Clyde walked along +the rail till he came to the swinging-boom, where the +boats which had been lowered for use after dinner +were fastened. Climbing out on the boom, he dropped +down by the painter into the third cutter, one of the +four-oar boats. Bitts, the carpenter, who had been the +only person on board except the boatswain, was in the +waist busily at work upon the boat, and did not observe +that anything unusual had transpired. Clyde +had practised gymnastics a great deal, and was an active, +agile fellow. Casting off the painter of the third +cutter, he worked her astern, so as to avoid Peaks. +Then, shipping a pair of oars, he pulled for the shore.</p> + +<p>In the mean time, the boatswain, disdaining to call +for assistance, and not having observed the movements +of Clyde, climbed up the cable to the hawse-hole, and +then, by the bowsprit guys, made his way to the top-gallant +forecastle, where he discovered the Briton in +the cutter, pulling with all his might for the shore. +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_125" id="Page_125">[Pg 125]</a></span> +Shaking the water from his clothes, he hastened to the +main cabin, and informed the principal that the new +scholar had left the ship.</p> + +<p>“Left the ship!” exclaimed Mr. Lowington. “Were +you not on deck while the students were at dinner?”</p> + +<p>“Yes, sir, most of the time; but just at the moment +when the young sculpin left the ship, I happened to +be in the water,” answered Peaks, shrugging his +shoulders like a Frenchman, and glancing at his wet +garments.</p> + +<p>“How came you in the water?”</p> + +<p>“The little Britisher pushed me overboard, when I +was sitting on the cat-head.”</p> + +<p>“I see,” added the principal. “We must get him +back before his mother arrives.”</p> + +<p>By this time most of the students had come up from +the steerage, and the order was given to pipe away +the first cutter. Peaks was directed to change his +clothes, and go in her. He was ready by the time the +crew were in their seats, for, as he was not a fashionable +man, his toilet was soon made. The boats from +the other vessels of the fleet, including those of the +yachts, were already on their way to the town. The +first cutter pulled to the shore; but Clyde had already +landed, and disappeared in the city.</p> + +<p>As at Christiansand, Paul Kendall and lady decided +to remain on shore during the stay of the fleet. They +had several pieces of baggage, and the custom-house +officers on the wharf were obliged to examine them, +after which they followed a porter to the Victoria +Hotel, which was said to be the best in the place. +Peaks found a man who could speak English, and immediately +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_126" id="Page_126">[Pg 126]</a></span> +applied himself to the business of finding +the runaway. Clyde had been seen going up one of +the streets, but no one knew anything about him.</p> + +<p>The fugitive felt that he had achieved a victory. He +had “paid off” the big boatswain, and no fellow on +board of the ship could believe that he had not kept +his word. He walked up the street till he came to +Dronningensgaden. People looked at him as though +he were a stranger, and he became aware that his uniform +was exciting attention. In the Kirkegade he +found a clothing store, in which the shop-keeper spoke +English. In changing his dress on board of the ship, +he had retained the contents of his pockets, including +a well-filled purse. He selected a suit of clothes +which pleased him, and immediately put it on. At +another store he bought a hat, and then he appeared +like a new being. With the bundle containing his uniform, +he walked till he found a carriage, in which he +seated himself, and ordered the driver to leave him at +the Victoria Hotel. He thought it would only be necessary +for him to keep out of sight till evening, when +his mother would probably arrive in the Foldin, and +he was confident he could induce her to withdraw him +from the Academy. He would stay in his room the +rest of the day, and by that time the search for him, +if any was made, would be ended.</p> + +<p>“I want a nice room for myself, another for my +mother and sister, who will arrive this evening, and a +place for the man,” said Clyde, as the porter of the +hotel touched his cap, and helped him out of the carriage.</p> + +<p>The young man was evidently a person of some importance. +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_127" id="Page_127">[Pg 127]</a></span> +The porter, the clerk, and the head waiter, +who came out to receive him, bowed low. A man +took his bundle, and he was ushered to a room on the +ground floor. As he crossed the court, he discovered +several of the Orlando’s passengers in the reading-room. +He had not entered his chamber before there +was another arrival,—Paul Kendall and lady,—who +were assigned to the next room.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_128" id="Page_128">[Pg 128]</a></span></p> +<h2>CHAPTER VIII.</h2> + +<p class="center"><strong>THE SIGHTS OF CHRISTIANIA AND OTHER MATTERS.</strong></p> + + +<p>As there was in Christiania much to be seen that +needed explanation, the students were required +to keep together, and several guides from the hotel +were obtained, to conduct the party to the various +objects of interest in the city. A walk through some +of the principal streets brought them to the new Parliament +house, which is called the <em>Storthingsbyggningen</em>. +It is a fine building, but with nothing remarkable +about it. In the lower house, the students +seated themselves in the chairs of the members, and +Mr. Mapps took the speaker’s desk.</p> + +<p>“Christiania was founded in 1624, on the site of +the ancient city of Osloe, which was destroyed by fire. +It is the residence of the king during his sojourn in +Norway, and the new palace, which you saw on the +hill, was completed for his use in 1848. The city, as +you have seen, is regularly laid out, and the buildings +are either of brick or stone. Formerly the dwellings +were of wood, but the frequent fires caused the adoption +of a law that no more wooden buildings should +be erected within the precincts of the city. The place +has considerable commerce, and now contains nearly +sixty thousand inhabitants.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_129" id="Page_129">[Pg 129]</a></span> +“A street here is called a <em>gade</em>, and you observe +that the street and its name form one word, as Carl-Johansgade, +or Charles John Street; Kongensgade, or +King Street; Kirkegaden, or Church Street. The +same word is used in German.</p> + +<p>“The money of Norway is different from that of +Sweden or Denmark. The specie dollar, which is +generally called a ‘specie,’ is the unit, and contains +five marks of twenty-four skillings each. A specie, or +<em>specie-daler</em>, as it is written, is worth about one dollar +and eight cents of our money. It is near enough for +our purpose to say that a mark is twenty-two cents, and +a skilling one cent. The coins in circulation are the +mark, the two, the four, and the twelve skilling piece. +Species and half species are coined, but paper money +is generally used for large sums, each denomination +being printed on a particular colored paper.</p> + +<p>“It is probable that the French system of weights +and measures will soon be introduced in Sweden and +Norway; but now a Norwegian <em>pund</em> is one and one +tenth pounds avoirdupois; a <em>fod</em> is twelve and two +hundredths inches; and a <em>kande</em> is three and three +tenths pints.”</p> + +<p>Mr. Mapps descended from the rostrum, and after +the party had looked at the chamber of the upper +house, and other apartments, they walked to the +king’s palace—the first royal dwelling which most +of the students ever saw. They passed through the +throne room, the court saloon, the dining room, and +other rooms, and some of them concluded that royalty +was not half so splendid as they had supposed. But +Norway is a poor country compared with many others +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_130" id="Page_130">[Pg 130]</a></span> +in Europe, and it is a pity that she ever thought it +necessary to spend a million and a half of dollars in a +weak attempt to imitate the grandeur of other realms. +There was nothing in the palace to astonish even our +young republicans, though the rooms of the queen, +on the first floor, were pretty and prettily furnished. +The building, which is a great, overgrown structure, +without symmetry or elegance, is in a beautiful situation, +and surrounded by pleasant grounds, well laid +out, from which a fine view of the city and fjord is +obtained.</p> + +<p>Connected with the university are several museums +and cabinets, which are open to the public, and well +worth a visit, though they do not compare with those of +the great cities of Europe. The party walked through +all these rooms, one of which contained a small collection +of northern antiquities. From the university the +students went to a kind of garden, which is a weak +imitation of “Tivoli,” in Copenhagen, containing +promenades, concert room, a small opera house, and +a drinking saloon. The castle of Agershuus, on a hill +at the southern side of the city, was next visited. Its +guns command the harbor, and it is regarded as a +place of great strength, for it has successfully resisted +several sieges. Climbing a long flight of steps, the +party reached the ramparts, which are laid out in +walks, and are much resorted to by the citizens, as +they command a lovely view of the fjord and the surrounding +country. A portion of the castle is used as +a prison, and the convicts work in gangs about the +premises.</p> + +<p>“This was Robin Hood’s prison—wasn’t it, Mr. +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_131" id="Page_131">[Pg 131]</a></span> +Mapps?” asked Lincoln, who had an inquiring mind, +after he had enjoyed the prospect from the ramparts +for a while.</p> + +<p>“I think not,” replied the instructor. “Höyland, +sometimes called the Robin Hood, but, I think, more +properly the Baron Trenck, of Norway, was sentenced +to imprisonment for life in this castle.”</p> + +<p>“What for?” inquired Norwood.</p> + +<p>“For robbery and other crimes. Like Robin Hood +and Mike Martin, he robbed the rich and gave to the +poor, which none of you should believe makes the +crime any less wicked; especially as he did not scruple +to use violence in accomplishing his purpose. +For some small theft he was shut up in this prison; +but while the overseer was at church, Höyland broke +into his room, stole some of his clothes, and quietly +walked out of the castle and out of the town. He +was recaptured, but repeatedly made his escape. +Though he was heavily ironed, this precaution was +found to be useless, and he was placed in solitary confinement +in the lowest room of the citadel, where he +was kept securely for several years. One evening his +jailer told him that he could never get out of this +room, and that he might as well promise not to attempt +such an impossible feat; but Höyland replied +that it was the turnkey’s duty to keep him in prison if +he could, and his to get out if it were possible. The +next day the prisoner was missing, and the means of +his escape were not at first apparent; but on further +examination it was found that he had cut through the +thick plank flooring of his cell, under the bed, and +tunnelled under the wall into the yard of the prison. +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_132" id="Page_132">[Pg 132]</a></span> +He had replaced the planks when he left, and passing +over the ramparts without difficulty, dropped into the +ditch, and departed without bidding any one good by. +All attempts to find him were unsuccessful, and it +was believed that he had left the country.</p> + +<p>“A year afterwards the National Bank of Norway +was robbed of sixty thousand <em>specie-dalers</em>, in the most +adroit and skilful manner, even without leaving any +marks of violence on the iron box in which the money +was kept. Not long after this occurrence, in the person +of a prisoner who had been committed to the castle for +a petty theft, the officers recognized Höyland. He was +considerate enough to inform the authorities that his +late escape had been effected, after three years of patient +labor, with no other tool than a nail, while others +slept. As a portion of his ill-gotten wealth was concealed +in the mountains, he had the means of making +friends in Christiania, where he had hidden himself. +Making the acquaintance of the bank watchman, he +cunningly obtained wax impressions of the key-holes +of the locks on the money-chest, by which he made +keys, opened the box, took the money, and locked +it after him. But, like all other evil-doers, he came to +grief at last. Though he was a skilful carver in +wood and stone, he was not allowed to have tools, of +which he made a bad use, and he was compelled to +amuse himself by knitting socks on wooden pins. +Unable to escape again, and not having the patience +to exist without something to do, in utter despair he +committed suicide in his prison.”</p> + +<p>After the visit to the fortress, the boys were allowed +to walk about the city at their own pleasure; and a +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_133" id="Page_133">[Pg 133]</a></span> +few of the officers went with Mr. Lowington and the +doctor to the establishment of Mr. Bennett, an Englishman, +who fitted out travellers intending to journey in +the interior with carioles and all the other requisites. +His rooms were stored with books and Norwegian +curiosities and antiquities. In the court-yard of the +house was a large number of second-hand carioles, +which are the sole vehicles used for crossing the country. +A traveller, wishing to go to Trondhjem or Bergen, +would purchase the cariole in Christiania, and +when he had done with it, dispose of it at the other +end of his route, horses between being supplied according +to law at the post stations on the road. Travellers +coming from Trondhjem or Bergen sell their vehicles +to Mr. Bennett. In his rooms are miniature +models of the cariole for sale, which visitors purchase +as a memento of their tour; as those who climb Pilatus +and Rhigi, in Switzerland, buy an alpenstock on +which are printed the names of the mountains they +have ascended with its help.</p> + +<p>The principal and his companions walked up to the +Victoria Hotel, and inquired for Captain Kendall. +He had just returned from a ride, and while the +waiter was taking Mr. Lowington’s card to him, +Peaks presented himself in the court-yard.</p> + +<p>“Can’t find him, sir,” said the boatswain, touching +his hat.</p> + +<p>“He must be somewhere in the city.”</p> + +<p>“This man has toted me all over the town, but we +can’t hear a word of him. He wore the uniform of +the ship, and people can’t tell one student from another.”</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_134" id="Page_134">[Pg 134]</a></span> +“I am confident he has not left the city.”</p> + +<p>“Perhaps he has,” replied Peaks, as the servant +returned, followed by Captain Kendall.</p> + +<p>“Have you lost anything or anybody?” asked Paul, +laughing, after he had saluted the principal.</p> + +<p>“Yes, we have lost a student; an English boy we +shipped at Christiansand. Have you seen him?”</p> + +<p>“Yes, sir; his room is No. 32—next to mine,” +replied Paul, still laughing, as though he were much +amused.</p> + +<p>He was much amused; and that others may sympathize +with him, let the reader return to Clyde Blacklock, +who had shut himself up in his room to await the +arrival of his mother. He had not been in the house +ten minutes before he began to be impatient and disgusted +with his self-imposed confinement. He examined +himself carefully in the looking-glass, and was satisfied +that his new clothes disguised him from his late +shipmates, and also from those whom he had met on +board of the Orlando. Certainly they had wrought +a very great change in his appearance, and with the +round-top hat on, which was entirely different from +anything he had worn before, even his mother would +not recognize him, unless they came near enough +together to enable her to scrutinize his features. Of +course none of the people from the squadron would +come to the hotel, and he had not yet been called +upon to register his name.</p> + +<p>He unlocked his door, and went into the long entry +which opened into the court-yard. It was stupid to +stay alone in his chamber. It was some relief even to +promenade the hall, for one so nervous as he was at +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_135" id="Page_135">[Pg 135]</a></span> +this time. If any of the Orlando’s passengers came +near him, he could retreat into his room. He walked +up and down several times, but this soon became stale +amusement.</p> + +<p>“Who’s in the next room to mine?” he asked, as +one of the waiters passed him in his promenade.</p> + +<p>“Gentleman and lady from America, sir,” replied the +man; “an uncommon handsome young woman, sir.”</p> + +<p>Before the waiter could further express his opinion +of the guests in No. 31, Paul Kendall came out of the +room, and, seeing the servant, ordered a carriage to be +ready in half an hour.</p> + +<p>“Is there much to see in this place, sir?” asked +Clyde, politely.</p> + +<p>“Not much, I think,” replied Paul.</p> + +<p>“I dare say you are going into the interior, sir.”</p> + +<p>“Not far.”</p> + +<p>“There is fine fishing there,” persisted Clyde.</p> + +<p>“So I am told; but I haven’t much time to spend +in such sport, and I am afraid my wife would not +enjoy it as well as I should. Do you go to the interior?”</p> + +<p>“Yes, sir; I intend to do so when my mother +and sister arrive. My mother goes a-fishing with +me.”</p> + +<p>“Does she, indeed? You are from England, I suppose,” +added Paul, who suspected that the young +man was one of those lonesome travellers eager to +make a friend, and actually suffering from the want +of one.</p> + +<p>“Yes; Mockhill Manor, New Forest, Hampshire.”</p> + +<p>“Are you travelling alone?” asked Paul, who was +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_136" id="Page_136">[Pg 136]</a></span> +full of sympathy for the apparent loneliness of the +young man.</p> + +<p>“I am alone just now, but I expect my mother and +sister from Christiansand to-night,” replied Clyde.</p> + +<p>“Can I do anything for you?” inquired Paul, who, +after this explanation, did not regard the young gentleman’s +situation as so hopeless.</p> + +<p>In his own travels he had himself experienced that +sense of loneliness which is a decided misery, and +had met others afflicted with it. From the manner of +Clyde, he concluded he had an attack of it, and he +desired to alleviate his sufferings; but if the young +man’s friends were coming that night, his case could +not be desperate.</p> + +<p>“No, sir; I don’t know that you can. I thought, as +your room is next to mine, we might make it jolly for +each other. You are an American, sir, the waiter +says.”</p> + +<p>“Yes, I am,” laughed Paul.</p> + +<p>“But you don’t talk through the nose.”</p> + +<p>“Don’t I? Well, I don’t perceive that you do, +either.”</p> + +<p>“I’m not a Jonathan,” protested Clyde. “I dare +say you are a fine gentleman, but I can’t say that +of all the Americans.”</p> + +<p>“Can’t you? Well, I’m sorry for them. Can you +say it of all the Englishmen?”</p> + +<p>“Yes, sir; I think I can of all we meet travelling. +The Americans are big bullies. I settled accounts +with one of them this very day,” chuckled Clyde.</p> + +<p>“Ah! did you, indeed?”</p> + +<p>“I think some of them know what it is to bully and +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_137" id="Page_137">[Pg 137]</a></span> +insult an Englishman by this time,” added Clyde, rubbing +his hands, as he thought of poor Peaks, floundering +in the waters of the Fjord. “Perhaps you’ve heard +of that American Academy ship that came into Christiania +to-day.”</p> + +<p>“Yes, I have heard of her,” answered Paul, curiously.</p> + +<p>“I saw her first at Christiansand, and went on +board of her with my mother and sister. I liked the +looks of her, and fancied the young chaps on board of +her were having a nice time. I wanted to ship in her, +and I did so; but I was never among such a set of +tyrants in the whole course of my life.”</p> + +<p>“Then you joined the ship,” replied Paul, who had +heard of the new addition to the Young America’s +crew, but had not seen him.</p> + +<p>“I’m blamed if I didn’t; but before my mother left +the ship, a big bully of a boatswain insulted me, and I +changed my mind. Yet the head master persuaded +my mother to let him keep me in the ship, and I’m +blamed if she didn’t leave me there.”</p> + +<p>“Left you there,” added Paul, when Clyde paused, +apparently to give his auditor the opportunity to express +his sympathy for his unfortunate situation.</p> + +<p>“Yes, sir; she left me there, and she won’t hear the +last of it for one year,” replied Clyde, shaking his +head. “It was a mean trick, and I’ll pay her for it.”</p> + +<p>“Probably she did it for the best,” suggested Paul, +disgusted with the assurance, and especially with the +want of respect for his mother which the youth manifested, +though he was anxious to hear the conclusion +of his story.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_138" id="Page_138">[Pg 138]</a></span> +“I don’t care what she did it for; it was a scurvy +trick. I told her I wouldn’t stay in the ship, any how, +and she permitted the big boatswain to hold me while +she went ashore in a boat. But I knew myself, if my +mother didn’t know me, and I determined not to stay +in her three days; and I didn’t,” chuckled Clyde, as he +thought of what he called his own cleverness.</p> + +<p>“What did you do?” asked Paul, deeply interested.</p> + +<p>“I was willing to bide my time, and so I hauled +sheets, and luffed, and tacked, and all that sort of thing, +till we got to Christiania. When I was pulling the +main boom, or something of that kind,—I don’t just +know what it was now,—one of the fellows in gold +bands insulted me.”</p> + +<p>“What did he say to you?”</p> + +<p>“He ordered me to be silent, and another nob did +the same thing. I offered to fight them both, and I +would have liked to show them what an English boy’s +fist is made of; but the cowards set the boatswain on +me again. I would have licked him if he had fought +fair; but he caught me foul, and I could do nothing. +I meant to be even with that big boatswain, and I think +I am,” said Clyde, rubbing his hands again with delight, +and laughing heartily when he thought of his +brilliant achievement.</p> + +<p>“Well, what did you do?”</p> + +<p>“I just waited till the ship got to Christiania; and +then, when all the students were at dinner, I found the +big boatswain sitting on a beam that runs out over the +water—I forget what they call the beam, but it’s at +the bow of the ship.”</p> + +<p>“The bowsprit,” suggested Paul.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_139" id="Page_139">[Pg 139]</a></span> +“No; I know the bowsprit. It wasn’t that. There +was another beam like it on the other side.”</p> + +<p>“O, the cat-head!”</p> + +<p>“That’s just it. Well, I went up to the big boatswain, +and asked him to look at a ship,—or a ’mofferdite +brig, he called it. He looked, and I just gave him +a push, which dropped him off the cat’s head into +the bay,” continued Clyde, who told his story with +many a chuckle and many a laugh, seeming to enjoy +it hugely himself, in spite of the want of sympathy +on the part of his listener.</p> + +<p>“You pushed him overboard!” exclaimed Paul.</p> + +<p>“That I did, and did it handsomely, too. He never +knew what hurt him till he struck the water. He +swam for the bow, and I dropped into a boat, and +came ashore. I saw him climb up to the deck, but +I was out of his way then. Wasn’t that cleverly +done?”</p> + +<p>“Rather,” replied Paul, concealing his indignation.</p> + +<p>“I think it was very cleverly done,” added Clyde, +annoyed at the coolness of his companion. “You +couldn’t have done it better yourself, sir.”</p> + +<p>“I don’t think I could,” replied Paul, dryly. “And +you expect your mother this evening.”</p> + +<p>“Yes; and she shall take my name off the books +of the ship.”</p> + +<p>“Perhaps she will not.”</p> + +<p>“O, but she will. Then the two nobs that insulted +me on the ship shall hear from me.”</p> + +<p>“What do you intend to do with them?”</p> + +<p>“I’ll whip them both; if I don’t my name isn’t +Clyde Blacklock!”</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_140" id="Page_140">[Pg 140]</a></span> +“But they will take you back to the ship before +your mother arrives.”</p> + +<p>“I dare say they will, if they see me; but I don’t +intend to go out of the hotel till my mother comes. I +shall stay in my room, or near it, the rest of the day.”</p> + +<p>The conversation was interrupted by the appearance +of Mrs. Kendall, who had been preparing for a ride +about the city. Paul conducted her to the carriage, +satisfied that the new scholar could be found when +wanted. During their excursion he told his wife the +adventures of Clyde.</p> + +<p>“But what a simpleton he was to tell you these +things!” added Grace.</p> + +<p>“He did not suspect me of knowing anything about +the ship. He is one of those fellows, who, having done +what he regards as a good thing, cannot help boasting +of it. He considers himself a first-class hero.”</p> + +<p>When Paul returned from the ride, he found Clyde +still walking about the hall, as uneasy as a fish out of +water.</p> + +<p>“Did you see anything of the Academy ship, sir?” +asked he, after Mrs. Kendall had gone to her room.</p> + +<p>“I saw her at anchor in the harbor, and all her people +are walking about the town,” replied Paul.</p> + +<p>“I’ve kept clear of them so far; but I want to catch +the two fellows with the gold bands.”</p> + +<p>“Perhaps some of them will catch you.”</p> + +<p>“Not they! I’m too cunning for clumsy fellows +like them.”</p> + +<p>“I see you are,” laughed Paul, amused at the assurance +of the young Briton.</p> + +<p>“If I see them, I’ll settle the Alabama claims with +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_141" id="Page_141">[Pg 141]</a></span> +them on my own account. But you ought to have +seen the big boatswain floundering in the water, sir.”</p> + +<p>“No doubt it was very funny.”</p> + +<p>“It was, indeed,” added Clyde, as the waiter appeared, +and handed a card to Captain Kendall.</p> + +<p>“In the court yard, sir,” said the servant; and Paul +followed the man to the place where the visitors were +waiting.</p> + +<p>Peaks, as dry, clean, and good-natured as ever, was +talking to Mr. Lowington. Paul could not help laughing +as he thought of the confidence which Clyde had +reposed in him, and that the fugitive had voluntarily, +and without any precautions, told his adventures to +one who really belonged to the fleet.</p> + +<p>“He has told me all about it,” said Paul.</p> + +<p>“Told you?” exclaimed Mr. Lowington.</p> + +<p>“Yes, sir; how he pushed Peaks overboard, and +then ran away,” laughed Paul. “I don’t often wear +my uniform on shore, for my wife thinks it attracts too +much attention; so that he did not suspect me of any +connection with the fleet.”</p> + +<p>“But where is he now?” asked the principal.</p> + +<p>“I left him in the hall only a moment since.”</p> + +<p>“Show me his room, my hearty,” said Peaks to the +waiter.</p> + +<p>“Call a carriage,” added Mr. Lowington. “He will +make a disturbance in the streets.”</p> + +<p>The servant led the way to the room of Clyde, followed +by the rest of the party. All were rather anxious +to see the clever Briton, who had done such wonders +of valor and cunning, captured.</p> + +<p>But Clyde had a pair of eyes, and, withal, a pair of +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_142" id="Page_142">[Pg 142]</a></span> +ears. From the hall where he promenaded were several +doors opening into the court-yard. Perhaps the +youth had a Yankee’s curiosity to see who called upon +his new acquaintance, and he went to one of these +doors. He saw Paul walk up to the principal, and +shake hands with him. There was the big boatswain +too, and there were two of the nobs with the gold +bands. It was evident enough to Clyde, then, that +he had made a blunder in relating his exploits to a +stranger. But the battle was not lost yet. His chamber +was on the ground floor, and had a window which +opened into Dronningensgaden. Without losing another +instant, he opened the window, and dropped out +into the street. He did not even wait to take the bundle +which contained his ship’s uniform.</p> + +<p>When Peaks entered the chamber, the bird had +flown, and the open window indicated the means by +which he had escaped; but Clyde had several minutes +the start of his pursuers, and had made good use +of his time. The boatswain dropped out of the window, +followed by Norwood and Lincoln, while the +principal and the doctor went round by the doors as +the more dignified means of egress. Peaks went one +way, and the two lieutenants the other way.</p> + +<p>Clyde, fearful that haste might look suspicious, +walked a short distance, till he came to a building on +which was a sign, <em>Hôtel du Nord</em>, and which appeared +to be under repairs. He stepped in at the open +door, and went up stairs. Men were at work in some +of the rooms; but he avoided them, and appeared to be +looking over the building. At last he came to an open +window on the street from which he had entered. He +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_143" id="Page_143">[Pg 143]</a></span> +looked out, and in the distance saw his pursuers running +rapidly in opposite directions. After he had remained +in the hotel about an hour, he ventured to +leave, and walked very cautiously up the street. Feeling +the need of an overcoat, he entered a store, and +purchased one, which still further disguised him, so +that if he met any of his late shipmates, they would +be still less likely to recognize him. He walked till +he came to a carriage stand; where, entering a vehicle, +he pointed in the direction he wished to go, which +was towards the king’s palace. When the driver +stopped at the gate, he pointed towards the hills in +the rear of the city. The Norwegian looked astonished, +and could not understand him.</p> + +<p>“I want to go out of town.”</p> + +<p>The driver drove his horse to the other side of the +street, and hailed a short, stout man, who was passing +at the time.</p> + +<p>“Do you want a guide, sir?” asked the stranger.</p> + +<p>“Yes,” promptly replied Clyde.</p> + +<p>“Where do wish to go?”</p> + +<p>“Over there,” replied Clyde, pointing again in the +direction he wished to go.</p> + +<p>“To Sandviken?”</p> + +<p>“Yes; that’s the place,” added the youth, who did +not care where he went, if he could only get out of +the city.</p> + +<p>“It is more than eight miles,” suggested the guide.</p> + +<p>“I don’t care if it is eighty; that’s where I want to +go. Are you a <em>commissionaire</em>?”</p> + +<p>“Yes. I belong to the Victoria Hotel.”</p> + +<p>“All right; jump in.”</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_144" id="Page_144">[Pg 144]</a></span> +The man made a bargain with the driver, and in a +few moments Clyde was on his way to Sandviken, +confident that he had escaped any further pursuit. He +had already come to the conclusion not to see his +mother until after the Young America had left Christiania.</p> + +<p>In the mean time, Peaks had given up the chase. +Paul assured the principal that Clyde would come back +as soon as his mother arrived. Mr. Lowington did +not care to have the new scholar see his mother again +if he was to be a student in the Academy; but as +Clyde could not be found, there appeared to be no +alternative.</p> + +<p>In a couple of hours, the fugitive reached Sandviken, +where he informed his astonished guide that he +intended to proceed to Christiansand by land. His +courier was willing to go with him so long as he was +paid; and as Clyde had plenty of money, and disbursed +it freely, there was no difficulty. Though the next day +was Sunday, the young traveller continued his journey, +and on Monday afternoon arrived at Apalstö, at +the head of one of the inland lakes, where he intended +to sleep; but the station-house was full. Clyde was +tired, and did not feel like going any farther. While he +was sending his courier to look up a bed for him, +about a dozen boys wearing the uniform of the Academy +ship flashed upon his view. He was astonished +and alarmed. He suspected that this party had been +sent to the interior to head him off. He was determined +not to be an easy victim.</p> + +<p>One of the party had a good-sized salmon in his +hand, which indicated that they had been a-fishing.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_145" id="Page_145">[Pg 145]</a></span> +They took no notice of him, though they could not +help seeing him, and Clyde took courage from this circumstance.</p> + +<p>The fishing squad was composed of the crew of the +second cutter—the unfortunates who had been run +down by the steamer.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_146" id="Page_146">[Pg 146]</a></span></p> +<h2>CHAPTER IX.</h2> + +<p class="center"><strong>THE EXCURSION WITHOUT RUNNING AWAY.</strong></p> + + +<p>The second cutter was a wreck on the water, +and the crew saved themselves by climbing up +the bow of the steamer which had run down the boat. +They received prompt assistance from those on board, +and, as the cutter did not sink, and would not have +done so, having no ballast, even if she had been cut +in two, the crew were so well trained that not one +of them was guilty of the absurdity of jumping overboard, +and therefore no one was even very wet.</p> + +<p>It appeared to be one of those cases where both +parties had struggled to avoid the catastrophe, but +the more they struggled the worse was the situation. +If the cutter, on the one hand, had continued on her +course, she would have escaped. If the steamer, on +the other hand, had not changed her course when the +calamity was threatened, the boat could have avoided +her. The change of purpose in each had confused +the other, and rendered unavailing the attempt to +avoid the collision. The boat would have gone clear +of the steamer if the latter had not put her helm to +starboard. But the catastrophe was accomplished so +quickly that there was not much time to philosophize; +and as nothing worse than a stove boat had resulted +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_147" id="Page_147">[Pg 147]</a></span> +from it, there was not much reason to complain. We +are not aware that any one did complain; and we +only state the appearances, not the facts.</p> + +<p>The steamer started her wheels again after the +cutter had been secured and made fast astern. The +captain spoke only a few words of English, and Sanford +found it quite impossible to hold a conversation +with him. But Ole Amundsen was at hand in this +emergency.</p> + +<p>“Tell him he needn’t stop for us, Ole,” said the +coxswain.</p> + +<p>“Don’t you want to return to the ship?” asked the +astonished waif.</p> + +<p>“No, no,” replied Sanford, in a low tone, so that +some of the doubtful members of his crew might not +hear him. “Where is the steamer going, Ole?”</p> + +<p>“To Christiania, stopping at all the ports on the +coast,” answered Ole, when he had obtained the information +from the captain.</p> + +<p>“All right; we will go to the first place where she +stops,” added Sanford. “Don’t say a word to the rest +of the fellows, Ole.”</p> + +<p>“The first port she stops at is Lillesand,” said Ole.</p> + +<p>“Very well; we will go there.”</p> + +<p>Ole explained to the captain that the boys he had +picked up wished to go to Lillesand, where they could +join their ship. This plan exactly suited the young +Norwegian, for he did not like the idea of being landed +at Christiansand, or taken back to the ship.</p> + +<p>“Where are we going? Why don’t he put us on +shore, or on board of the ship?” demanded Burchmore.</p> + +<p>“It’s a mail steamer; she is very late,” replied Ole.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_148" id="Page_148">[Pg 148]</a></span> +“But is she going to carry us off, because she is in +a hurry?”</p> + +<p>“Only to a port up here a little ways. We can +come right back in another steamer,” Ole explained; +and Burchmore was satisfied.</p> + +<p>Now, the captain had certainly declared that he was +in a great hurry, and was not willing to wait for the +boat which had put off from the ship; but he proposed +to hail a boat which was passing, and send his +involuntary passengers to the town in her. Ole assured +him his companions wished to go to Lillesand, +and he was too glad to avoid any delay. As the first +cutter followed the steamer, it was decided, after consultation +with the captain, to turn the stove boat adrift, +so that it could be towed back to the ship by the first +cutters. Sanford cast off the painter, and the pliant +master of the steamer was glad to get rid of this check +upon the speed of his boat. The boys watched the +water-logged craft till it was picked up by the first +cutter, and then passing behind an island, the squadron +was out of view.</p> + +<p>“How came you here, Ole?” asked Rodman.</p> + +<p>“Came in the boat; but I didn’t think you were +going to smash her. I thought I was killed that time, +sure,” laughed the waif.</p> + +<p>“But how came you in the boat?” inquired Wilde.</p> + +<p>“I got in, of course; nobody put me in.”</p> + +<p>“When?”</p> + +<p>“When it hung at the davits in the ship, just before +the pilot came on board.”</p> + +<p>“What do you get in there for?”</p> + +<p>“My education has been neglected, and I have to +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_149" id="Page_149">[Pg 149]</a></span> +do a great deal of thinking to make up for it. I don’t +like to be disturbed when I’m thinking; so I got into +the boat, and covered myself with the sail.”</p> + +<p>“Tell that to the fishes,” snuffed Wilde.</p> + +<p>“You can, if you wish; I don’t speak their language,” +laughed Ole.</p> + +<p>“But really, Norway, what did you get into the +second cutter for?” said Sanford.</p> + +<p>“The pilot was a first cousin of mine, and I was +afraid he would whip me for making faces at him +when I was a baby. He never forgets anything.”</p> + +<p>“Nonsense!”</p> + +<p>“Well, if you know better than I, don’t ask me +any more about it.”</p> + +<p>Ole was no more inclined to explain how he came +in the second cutter than he had been to solve the +mystery of being in a water-logged bateau, out of sight +of land. It only appeared that while the students +covered the rail and crowded the rigging to see the +land, he had put himself into the boat. When the +hands were called to man the braces, he, having no +duty to perform, had not answered the call, and was +left alone in the cutter. At sea, every precaution was +taken to provide for the safety of the crew in case of +any calamity. Each boat was provided with a sail, a +mast, a compass, and several breakers of water, and +a quantity of provisions was ready to be put in when +needed. Ole stowed himself beneath the sail, which +lay under the middle board, extending fore and aft. +Before De Forrest took his place in the stern-sheets, +Stockwell had discovered the absentee, and communicated +the fact of his presence to those near him. The +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_150" id="Page_150">[Pg 150]</a></span> +crew of the second cutter were entirely willing to +keep his secret, as they were that of any one who +needed their help. Among such boys it was regarded +as dishonorable in the highest degree to betray any +one; and, indeed, the principal discountenanced anything +like “tale-bearing,” to which the students gave +a very liberal construction. Sanford had proposed +that De Forrest should take a walk on shore, in order +to give Ole an opportunity to escape from his confinement, +which, on account of the singular obstinacy +and suspicion of that officer, had threatened to be indefinitely +continued, till the collision came to his aid.</p> + +<p>“How’s this?” said Stockwell, as he seated himself +by the side of the coxswain, on one of the settees +on the quarter-deck of the steamer.</p> + +<p>“How’s what?” asked Sanford.</p> + +<p>“It seems to me that we are clear of the ship, and +without running away.”</p> + +<p>“Don’t say a word. We got spilled out the boat, +and it was not our doing. We obeyed De Forrest’s +orders to the very letter, so that no fault can be found +with us.”</p> + +<p>“Of course not.”</p> + +<p>“If De Forrest had not ordered me to shove off, I +shouldn’t have done so.”</p> + +<p>“Then the boat might have been ground up on the +rocks.”</p> + +<p>“Do you see anything green in my eye?” replied +Sanford, suggestively.</p> + +<p>“You don’t mean to say that you smashed the boat +on purpose?”</p> + +<p>“Certainly I don’t mean to <em>say</em> anything of the +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_151" id="Page_151">[Pg 151]</a></span> +sort. I obey orders if I break owners, or boats either, +for that matter.”</p> + +<p>“What are you going to do next?”</p> + +<p>“I don’t know. The programme is to go back in +the steamer that returns to Christiansand to-morrow +night.”</p> + +<p>“O, then you mean to go back.”</p> + +<p>“Your head’s as thick as the broadside of an iron-clad. +Of course I mean to go back.”</p> + +<p>“Immediately?”</p> + +<p>“In the next boat.”</p> + +<p>Stockwell did not exactly like the sharp way with +which Sanford dealt with his innocence. Certainly +the coxswain and himself had talked about an excursion +to the interior of Norway without running away; +but now, though the circumstances favored the plan, +his friend plainly announced his intention to return to +Christiansand and join the ship. But it could be said +of the coxswain that his ways were dark, and Stockwell +was more inclined to wait than to question him. +In two hours the steamer arrived at Lillesand, and the +party went on shore. The place was only a small +village, but they found accommodations for the night.</p> + +<p>“What time does the steamer for Christiansand +leave this place?” asked Sanford, as the party gathered +at the station-house, which is the hotel, post-office, +and establishment for furnishing horses to +travellers.</p> + +<p>“To-morrow evening,” replied Ole.</p> + +<p>“To-morrow evening!” exclaimed the coxswain. +“That will never do! What time?”</p> + +<p>“About eight o’clock,” answered the waif, whose +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_152" id="Page_152">[Pg 152]</a></span> +devotion to the truth did not prevent him from stating +the time two hours later than the fact warranted. +“She may be two or three hours later.”</p> + +<p>“The squadron sails for Christiania to-morrow afternoon,” +added Sanford. “The ship will be gone before +we can get there.”</p> + +<p>“She will not go without us,” suggested Burchmore.</p> + +<p>“Yes, she will,” said Stockwell, who was beginning +to fathom the dark ways of the coxswain. “The +principal will suppose we have gone on to Christiania.”</p> + +<p>“That’s so.”</p> + +<p>“But what are we to do?” demanded Tinckner.</p> + +<p>“That’s the question,” added Sanford, with a blank +look, as though he considered the situation as utterly +hopeless.</p> + +<p>“We are not so badly off as we might be,” said +Boyden.</p> + +<p>“I don’t see how it could be any worse,” replied +Sanford. “But I don’t know that it is our fault. +The captain of the steamer would not stop, after he +had picked us up; at least, I don’t know anything +about it; but Ole said he wouldn’t stop.”</p> + +<p>“He could not stop,” protested the waif, vehemently. +“He had only just time enough to reach Frederiksværn +in season for the other steamer. If he lost +her, he would be turned off. He wouldn’t stop for +love or money.”</p> + +<p>“No matter, for that; here we are, and what are we +going to do? It’s no use to cry for spilled milk,” continued +Stockwell. “The ship will go to Christiania, +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_153" id="Page_153">[Pg 153]</a></span> +and won’t come near this place. Mr. Lowington will +expect to find us there when he arrives, and all we +have to do is to make good his calculation. We have +plenty of money, and we can get there somehow or +other.”</p> + +<p>Involuntarily, every fellow put his hands into his +pocket; and then, if not before, they recalled the +suggestion of the coxswain, made before they took +their places in the cutter, that they should bring their +money and their pea-jackets; but then, it seemed +simply absurd that the boat had been smashed by his +contrivance.</p> + +<p>“Was it for this, Sanford, that you told us to bring +our money?” said Burchmore.</p> + +<p>“I should say a fellow ought always to carry his +money with him. No one can tell what will happen +to him when he goes away from the ship,” replied the +coxswain. “You can see that it’s lucky you have it +with you. We might have to spend the summer here +if we had no money. When will a steamer go from +here to Christiania, Norway?”</p> + +<p>“Next Friday—just a week from to-day,” replied +the Norwegian, very seriously.</p> + +<p>“A week!” exclaimed Burchmore.</p> + +<p>“That is not long; a week is soon gone.”</p> + +<p>“But we can’t stay here a week,” protested Tinckner.</p> + +<p>“I don’t want to do it,” added Sanford; “but if we +have to do it, I suppose I can stand it as well as the +rest of you.”</p> + +<p>“We can’t any of us stand it,” said Wilde. “Who’s +going to stay a week in such a place as this? I’m +not, for one. I’ll swim up to Christiansand first.”</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_154" id="Page_154">[Pg 154]</a></span> +“Can’t we hire a boat, and go back to Christiansand?” +Burchmore proposed. “It is not more than +twenty miles, and it would be a fine sail among these +beautiful islands.”</p> + +<p>“All right; look up a boat, Norway,” replied Sanford, +as though entirely willing to adopt this plan.</p> + +<p>Ole walked about the place for half an hour, accompanied +by three of the boys. Perhaps he was +careful not to find what he wanted; at any rate, no +boat seemed to be available for the purpose desired, +and when the excursionists met again, it was reported +that no boat suitable for the accommodation of the +party could be found.</p> + +<p>“Then can’t we engage horses, and go round to +Christiansand by land?” inquired Burchmore.</p> + +<p>“In carioles?” queried Ole, with an odd smile.</p> + +<p>“Carioles or wagons; anything we can find.”</p> + +<p>“You can, but it will take you a day and a half,” +replied Ole.</p> + +<p>“A day and a half to go twenty miles.”</p> + +<p>“About seventy miles by land,” added Ole. “You +must go almost up to the north pole before you can +cross the river.”</p> + +<p>“O, nonsense!” exclaimed Burchmore, who could +not help feeling that Ole was not altogether reliable +on his figures and facts.</p> + +<p>“If you don’t believe it, go and ask the postmaster, +or any one in the town,” continued the waif.</p> + +<p>“That’s all very well to talk about asking any one, +when no one speaks a syllable of English.”</p> + +<p>“I will do the talking for you.”</p> + +<p>“Of course you will; you have done it all thus far.”</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_155" id="Page_155">[Pg 155]</a></span> +“I don’t mean to say that you must really double +the north pole, or that it is just seventy miles by land; +but it’s a long distance,” Ole explained.</p> + +<p>“No matter how far it is; we will go,” added the +pliant coxswain. “I’m willing to do whatever the +fellows wish. It shall not be said that I was mulish.”</p> + +<p>“But if it is seventy miles, or anything like it, we +couldn’t get to Christiansand before the ship left.”</p> + +<p>“That’s just what I was thinking,” answered Sanford, +with a puzzled expression on his face. “Ole +says it is a long way, and I have been told that these +Norwegians are very honest, and will not lie; so I +suppose he has told the truth.”</p> + +<p>It was barely possible that the waif had learned to +lie in England, where he had acquired his English.</p> + +<p>“I suppose we must give up the idea of going in a +boat, or going by land. We can only wait till the +steamer comes,” continued Burchmore, putting on a +very long face.</p> + +<p>“We can’t stand that,” protested Wilde.</p> + +<p>“Well, what are you going to do?” demanded +Burchmore.</p> + +<p>“Can’t you tell us, Norway?” said Tinckner.</p> + +<p>“I know what I should do if I were in your situation, +and wanted to make a sure thing of it.”</p> + +<p>“Well, what?” asked Burchmore, gathering a +hope from the words of the waif.</p> + +<p>“I should go to Christiania.”</p> + +<p>“But how?”</p> + +<p>“By land, of course.”</p> + +<p>“It’s up by the north pole.”</p> + +<p>“It is about a hundred and fifty miles from here by +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_156" id="Page_156">[Pg 156]</a></span> +water, and it can’t be any more by land,” said Sanford. +“But I don’t care what you do; I will do as the others +say.”</p> + +<p>“I like the idea,” added Stockwell. “It is the only +safe thing we can do. If we go back to Christiansand, +we shall be too late for the ship. If we wait for +a steamer to Christiania, she will be gone when we +get there.”</p> + +<p>“How much will it cost to go to Christiania in this +way?” inquired Wilde, who did not feel quite sure +that his funds would stand such a drain.</p> + +<p>“Here are the prices in the post-house,” said Ole, +as he led the way to a partition on which the posting +was put up. “For one mile, one mark six skillings.”</p> + +<p>“We know all about it now,” laughed Rodman. +“What’s a mark, and what’s a skilling?”</p> + +<p>“Twenty-four skillings make a mark, and a skilling +is about a halfpenny English,” Ole explained.</p> + +<p>“About a cent of our money,” continued Rodman. +“One mark and six skillings would be thirty skillings, +or about thirty cents.”</p> + +<p>“That will never do,” interposed Wilde, shaking +his head. “One hundred and fifty miles, at thirty +cents a mile, would be forty-five dollars; and I suppose +we have to pay for our grub besides.”</p> + +<p>“It would come to ten or twelve pounds, and +Wilde has only ten pounds,” added Rodman.</p> + +<p>“No, no; you are all wrong. That means a +Norwegian mile—about seven of ours. It would be +only four and two sevenths cents a mile; say, six or +seven dollars to Christiania; and the grub would cost +as much more,” said Stockwell. “Three pounds will +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_157" id="Page_157">[Pg 157]</a></span> +cover the whole expense, and that won’t break any +body.”</p> + +<p>After considerable discussion, it was agreed to adopt +the plan proposed, and Ole was instructed to make +the necessary arrangements with the station-master. +The party went out to the stable to examine the carioles. +They were a kind of gig, without any hood or +top, with a small board behind, on which stands or +sits the boy who drives the team back to the station +after it has left the passenger. Tourists generally purchase +the carioles in which they ride, and are not bothered +with the boys. The students were not very nice +about their accommodations; and finding that when +two persons went in the same vehicle only half a fare +extra was charged, they decided to engage but five carioles. +As the law did not require the station-master to +keep this number of horses in waiting, it was necessary +to send “forbud” before the party started. This +was an order to all the stations on the road to have +five horses ready, and may be forwarded by mail or +by special messenger, the expense of which was paid +by the young tourists.</p> + +<p>It was solemnly agreed that the expense should be +equally divided, and Burchmore was elected cashier +and paymaster. With the assistance of Ole, he +changed twelve pounds into Norwegian money, and +found himself heavily loaded with the small coins of the +country, which would be needed in making change at +the stations. After all this important business had +been disposed of, the party walked all over the town +and its suburbs, and were duly stared at by the astonished +people.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_158" id="Page_158">[Pg 158]</a></span> +“We ought to write a letter to Mr. Lowington, and +tell him how we are situated,” suggested Churchill, as +they were returning to the station.</p> + +<p>“Exactly so; and carry it to him ourselves,” replied +Stockwell. “I move you that Burchmore be +appointed bearer of despatches.”</p> + +<p>“I mean to have the letter sent by mail,” added +Churchill.</p> + +<p>“We shall be in Christiania as soon as any mail, if +there is no steamer for a week,” said Sanford.</p> + +<p>“True; I didn’t think of that,” continued the proposer +of this precaution. “The principal will be +worried about us.”</p> + +<p>“Let him worry,” replied the coxswain; “that is, +we can’t do anything to relieve his mind.”</p> + +<p>“I don’t see that we can,” added Churchill.</p> + +<p>For the want of something better to do, the students +turned in at an early hour in the evening, and turned +out at an early hour in the morning. They all slept +in the same room, some of them in beds, and the rest +on the floor; but those who slept on the floor were just +as well satisfied as those who slept in the beds. After +a breakfast consisting mainly of fish, they piled +into the carioles. They were all in exceedingly jolly +humor, and seated themselves in and on the vehicles in +various uncouth postures. One boy in each cariole +was to drive the horse, and he was carefully instructed +to do nothing but simply hold the reins, and let the +well-informed animal have his own way. The horses +were rather small, and very shaggy beasts; but +they went off at a lively pace. At the first hill they +insisted upon walking up, and most of the boys followed +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_159" id="Page_159">[Pg 159]</a></span> +their example. Behind three of the carioles +were the small boys who were to bring the teams back. +These juvenile Norwegians were as sober and dignified +as though they had been members of the Storthing, +refusing to laugh at any of the wild tantrums +of the crazy students.</p> + +<p>At the first station, where the road from Lillesand +joins that from Christiansand to the north, the horses +ordered by “forbud” were in readiness, and the party +had only to pass from one set of carioles to another. +The grim post-boys did smile faintly when they received +their perquisites, and others, just as immovable, +took their places for the next post. The road now lay +along the banks of a considerable river, and the scenery +was rather interesting, though by no means grand. +They passed an occasional farm; but generally the +buildings were of the rudest and shabbiest description, +though occasionally there was a neat residence, +painted white or yellow, with roof of red tile. The +boys walked up all the hills, leaving the sagacious +horses to take care of themselves. All the students +voted that it was jolly to travel in this manner, and +there was no end to the sky-larking and racing on +the road. At noon, they stopped long enough to +dine, and at night found themselves at Tvetsund, at +the foot of Nisser Lake, where they lodged. As this +was as far as they had sent their “forbud,” they decided +to proceed by boat through the lake, a distance +of about twenty miles.</p> + +<p>The next day was Sunday, which was always observed +with great strictness on board of the ship, +no play and no unnecessary work being permitted. +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_160" id="Page_160">[Pg 160]</a></span> +There was a little church in the village, but none but +Ole could understand a word of the preacher’s prayer +or sermon; so that the students voted it would be useless +for them to go there. Four of the party, still controlled +by the influences which prevailed on board of +the ship, did not wish to travel on Sunday; but when +it was represented that the ship might leave Christiania +before the party arrived, they yielded to the +wishes of the other five, and procuring boats, they proceeded +on their way. At the head of the lake they +took the road, and walked about seven miles to +Apalstö.</p> + +<p>“We are stuck here,” said Sanford, after they had +taken supper at the station-house. “This posting is a +first-class fraud.”</p> + +<p>“Why, what’s the matter?” demanded Burchmore, +alarmed by the manner of the coxswain.</p> + +<p>“No horses to be had till Tuesday morning.”</p> + +<p>“That’s a fraud.”</p> + +<p>“Well, it can’t be helped,” added Sanford, philosophically. +“I’m willing to walk, if the rest of the +fellows say so.”</p> + +<p>“We can’t walk to Christiania.”</p> + +<p>“That’s so; and we should not find any more horses +at the next station than here. Norway says we didn’t +send ‘forbud,’ which must be done when more than +three horses are wanted.”</p> + +<p>“Why didn’t Ole send ‘forbud,’ then?”</p> + +<p>“He said we had better go by boat part of the way; +it would be easier. But part of us can take the three +horses that are ready, and go on with them.”</p> + +<p>“I don’t believe in separating.”</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_161" id="Page_161">[Pg 161]</a></span> +“We are only a day and a half from Christiania, +and we shall arrive by Wednesday noon. The ship +won’t leave before that time.”</p> + +<p>So Burchmore was persuaded to submit to his fate +like a philosopher, which, however, was not considered +very hard, when it was announced that there was +excellent fishing in the vicinity. It is to be feared that +Ole and the coxswain had created this hinderance themselves, +for the law of the country allows only three +hours’ delay in the furnishing of horses. The farmers +are compelled to supply them, and doubtless twenty +could have been provided in the time allowed, though +the young tourists were able to give twelve hours’ notice. +This, however, did not suit the coxswain’s purposes, +and as he and Ole had occupied the same cariole, +there was no want of concert in their words and +actions. On Monday the students went a-fishing, +paying a small sum for a license to do so, though this +is not necessary in all parts of Norway. The united +catch of the whole party was one salmon, taken by +Burchmore, and weighing about eight pounds. It was +voted by the party, before this result was reached, in +the middle of the afternoon, that fishing in Norway +was “a first-class fraud.” We heard of a party of +three, who fished two weeks, and caught eight salmon, +though this want of luck is the exception, rather than +the rule, in the north.</p> + +<p>As the party returned from their excursion, bearing +the single trophy of their patience, Clyde Blacklock +discovered them. He was alarmed at first, but when +he recognized no one among them whom he had seen +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_162" id="Page_162">[Pg 162]</a></span> +on board of the ship, he concluded they did not belong +to her.</p> + +<p>“Good evening, sir,” said he, addressing Sanford, +who seemed to be the chief of the excursionists. +“You have been a-fishing?”</p> + +<p>“Yes; and ten of us have one fish to show for a +whole day’s work,” laughed the coxswain.</p> + +<p>“Poor luck; but you seem to be sailors,” continued +the Briton.</p> + +<p>“We belong to the ship Young America.”</p> + +<p>“Ah, indeed!”</p> + +<p>“That’s so.”</p> + +<p>In half an hour Clyde and Sanford were on excellent +terms. The former, when he learned that his +new acquaintance had not been sent after him, was +quite communicative, and even told the story of his +experience on board of the ship, and of his escape +from bondage. Sanford laughed, and seemed to enjoy +the narrative; but straightway the coxswain began +to tremble when he learned that Clyde had with +him a Norwegian who spoke English. It was necessary +to get rid of so dangerous a person without any +delay. The Briton liked Sanford so well that he was +not willing to leave him; and, indeed, the whole party +were so jolly that he desired to join his fortunes with +theirs. Sanford wrote a brief letter to Mr. Lowington, +stating the misfortunes of the party, and that they +expected to arrive in Christiania on Wednesday or +Thursday.</p> + +<p>“Now, Mr. ——, I don’t know your name,” said +Sanford, when he found Clyde, after he had written +the epistle.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_163" id="Page_163">[Pg 163]</a></span> +“Blacklock,” replied the Briton—“Clyde Blacklock.”</p> + +<p>“Well, Blacklock, if you want an up-and-down good +time, come with us.”</p> + +<p>“Where? To Christiania? into the lion’s den?”</p> + +<p>“Not yet, but—don’t open your mouth; don’t let +on for the world,” whispered the coxswain, glancing +at his companions.</p> + +<p>“Not a word,” added Clyde, satisfied he had found +the right friend.</p> + +<p>“We are going to the Rjukanfos to-morrow, but +only one or two of us know it yet. Your man will +spoil all. Send him back to Christiania this very afternoon. +Here’s a blind for him; let him take this +letter.”</p> + +<p>Clyde liked plotting and mischief, and as soon as +his guide had eaten his supper, he was started for +his home in the capital, glad enough to go, for he had been +paid for all the time agreed upon; and Sanford +ceased to tremble lest he should expose to his companions +the mistake in regard to horses, or another +blunder which was to be made the next morning.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_164" id="Page_164">[Pg 164]</a></span></p> +<h2>CHAPTER X.</h2> + +<p class="center"><strong>GOTTENBURG AND FINKEL.</strong></p> + + +<p>On Saturday night, as Clyde had anticipated, his +mother arrived at Christiania; and the people +at the Victoria informed her of the disappearance of +her son. The next morning she hastened on board of +the ship, and heard the principal’s story. Mrs. Blacklock +wept bitterly, and was fearful that her darling +boy was forever lost; but Mr. Lowington assured her +that no serious harm could befall him. He spoke very +plainly to her in regard to Clyde’s character and his +ungovernable passions, assuring her that he must certainly +come to an evil end within a few years, if he +was not restrained and controlled. The poor mother +felt the truth of all he said, and was willing that he +should continue the beneficent work upon which he +had commenced. She spent the forenoon on board, +and was introduced to Kendall and Shuffles and their +ladies. The principal illustrated what he had said +about Clyde by relating the history of the present +captain and owner of the Feodora, and Mrs. Blacklock +went away even hopeful that her boy might yet be +saved to her.</p> + +<p>On Monday, the first secular day of the month, the +new list of officers was announced in each vessel of +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_165" id="Page_165">[Pg 165]</a></span> +the squadron. The changes on board of the ship were +not very violent, though the third lieutenant became +captain, while Cumberland became the commodore.</p> + +<p>“I congratulate you, Captain Lincoln,” said Dr. +Winstock to the new commander, when he appeared +in the uniform of his new rank.</p> + +<p>“Thank you, sir,” replied Lincoln.</p> + +<p>“I have been satisfied for some time that you would +attain this position.”</p> + +<p>“I am only sorry to be promoted over Judson and +Norwood, for they have always been good friends of +mine.”</p> + +<p>“If they are good and true friends they will rejoice +at your success, though it places you over them. You +have worked very hard, and you are fully entitled to +your rank.”</p> + +<p>“Thank you, sir. I have tried to do my duty,” +replied Lincoln, modestly.</p> + +<p>“When I see a young gentleman use the library as +freely as you do, I am always tolerably confident that +he will attain a high rank. We go on shore this forenoon, +I believe.”</p> + +<p>“I heard we were to make an excursion to-day, +and another to-morrow.”</p> + +<p>“You will see something of the interior of Norway, +after all, though it is not quite possible to transport +two hundred boys over a country where the facilities +for travel are so meagre,” added the surgeon.</p> + +<p>“For my part, I should like to walk, even a hundred +miles.”</p> + +<p>“That is not practicable. How could such a crowd +be lodged and fed, in some of the small villages where +you would be compelled to pass the night?”</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_166" id="Page_166">[Pg 166]</a></span> +“I suppose it would not be possible, and I shall be +satisfied with whatever the principal thinks best,” +replied the captain.</p> + +<p>The students were called to muster, and Mr. Lowington +explained that he proposed to spend the day, +in picnic style, at Frogner Sæter, and that the party +would walk. The boats were then prepared, and the +crews of the several vessels went on shore. Captains +Kendall and Shuffles procured carriages, for the ladies +were not able to walk so far. Passing out of the +more densely settled portions of the city, the excursionists +came to a delightful region, abounding in +pleasant residences, some of which were grand and +lofty. For a time the landscape was covered with +small cottages, painted white or yellow; but as they +proceeded they came to a country very sparsely settled, +and very similar to that of New England. The +road lay through woods of pine and fir, and had been +constructed by Mr. Heftye, a public-spirited citizen, +who owned a large estate at the summit of the hill.</p> + +<p>“This looks just like Maine,” said Captain Lincoln, +who walked at the side of Dr. Winstock.</p> + +<p>“Exactly like it. There is a house, however, which +is hardly so good as those you see in Maine,” replied +the doctor.</p> + +<p>“It isn’t any better than a shanty, and the barn is +as good as the house. I wonder what that is for;” +and Lincoln pointed to a bunch of straw, on the top +of a pole, at the entrance of the barn. “I have seen +two or three of those here, and near Christiansand.”</p> + +<p>“It was grain placed there for the birds during the +winter.”</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_167" id="Page_167">[Pg 167]</a></span> +“That’s very kind of the people, I must say.”</p> + +<p>“They are very kind to all their animals.”</p> + +<p>Near the summit of the hill, the party came to the +summer-house of Mr. Heftye, a very neat structure of +wood, with a piazza, from which is obtained a beautiful +view of the surrounding country. Another half +hour brought them to the top of the hill, where the +proprietor had erected a wooden tower, or observatory. +It was some sixty or seventy feet high, and was +stayed with rope guys, extending to the trees on four +sides, to prevent it from being blown over. Only +twenty of the boys were permitted to go up at one +time, for the wind was tolerably fresh, and the structure +swayed to and fro like the mast of a ship in a sea. +From the top, mountains fifty miles distant could be +seen. Christiania Fjord lay like a panorama in the +distance, stretching as far as the eye could reach. To +the west the country looked wild and desolate, and +was covered with wood-crowned mountains, though +none of any considerable height could be seen. It +was a magnificent view, and some of the most enthusiastic +of the students declared that it was worth a +voyage to Norway; but boys are proverbially extravagant.</p> + +<p>A couple of hours were spent on the hill, the lunch +was eaten, and the boys declared that they were well +rested. The return walk was not so pleasant, for the +novelties of the region had been exhausted. The road +passed through private property, where there were at +least a dozen gates across it in different places; and +as the party approached, a woman, a boy, or a girl +appeared, to open them. Kendall or Shuffles rewarded +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_168" id="Page_168">[Pg 168]</a></span> +each of them with a few skillings for the service. +When their two and four skilling pieces were exhausted, +they were obliged to use larger coins, rather +than be mean; but it was observed that the Norwegians +themselves, though able to ride in a carriage, +never gave anything. It was amusing to see the astonishment +of the boys and girls when they received +an eight skilling piece, and the haste with which they +ran to their parents to exhibit the prize.</p> + +<p>The party reached the vessels at five o’clock, and +after supper the boats were again in demand for a +visit to Oscarshal, the white summer palace, which +could be seen from the ship. Mr. Bennett had provided +the necessary tickets, and made the arrangements +for the excursion. It is certainly a very pretty +place, but there are a hundred country residences in +the vicinity of New York, Boston, or any other large +city of the United States, which excel it in beauty +and elegance, as well as in the expense lavished upon +them. Before returning to the anchorage, the boat +squadron pulled about for a couple of hours among +the beautiful islands, and when the students returned +to the fleet, they felt that they had about exhausted +Christiania and its environs.</p> + +<p>The next day they went by the railroad train to +Eidsvold, and there embarked in the steamer Kong +Oscar for a voyage of sixty-five miles up the Mjosen +Lake to Lillehammer, where they arrived at half past +five in the afternoon. The scenery of the lake is +pleasant, but not grand, the slope of the hills being +covered with farms. Near the upper end, the hills +are higher, and the aspect is more picturesque. Some +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_169" id="Page_169">[Pg 169]</a></span> +of the western boys thought it looked like the shores +of the Ohio River, others compared it with the Delaware, +and a New Hampshire youth considered it +more like Lake Winnipiseogee.</p> + +<p>Lillehammer is a small town of seventeen hundred +inhabitants. M. Hammer’s and Madame Ormsrud’s +hotel were not large enough to accommodate the +party, and they began to experience some of the difficulties +of travelling in such large numbers; but Mr. +Bennett had done his work well, and sleeping-rooms +were provided in other houses for the rest. The +tourists rambled all over the town and its vicinity, +looked into the saw-mills, visited the farms, and compared +the agriculture with that of their own country; +and it must be added that Norway suffered very much +in the comparison, for the people are slow to adopt +innovations upon the methods of their fathers.</p> + +<p>Early in the morning—for steamers in Norway +and Sweden have a villanous practice of starting at +unseemly hours—the students embarked for Eidsvold, +and were on board the vessels long before the late +sunset. On the quarter, waiting for the principal, +was Clyde’s courier, who had arrived that morning, +after the departure of the excursionists. He evidently +had not hurried his journey, though he had been told +to do so. He delivered Sanford’s brief note, which +was written in pencil, and Mr. Lowington read it. +The absentees were safe and well, and would arrive +by Thursday. He was glad to hear of their safety, +but as the squadron was now ready to sail, he regretted +the delay.</p> + +<p>“Where did you leave the boys?” asked the principal +of the courier.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_170" id="Page_170">[Pg 170]</a></span> +“At Apalstö,” replied the guide, whose name was +Poulsen.</p> + +<p>“Do you belong there?”</p> + +<p>“No, sir; I live in Christiania. I went down there +with a young gentleman last Saturday.”</p> + +<p>“Who was he?”</p> + +<p>“Mr. Blacklock, sir; a young English gentleman.”</p> + +<p>“Ah! did you? And where is Mr. Blacklock +now?”</p> + +<p>“I left him at Apalstö with a party of young gentlemen +who were dressed like the people here; and +he sent me back with this letter,” replied Poulsen, +who proceeded to explain that Clyde had engaged +him as courier for Christiansand, but had changed his +mind when he met the party belonging to the ship, +and had concluded to return to Christiania with them.</p> + +<p>This was precisely what he had been told to say by +the young Briton, and probably he believed that it was +a correct statement. The principal saw no reason to +doubt the truth of it, for Clyde must be satisfied that +his mother was in Christiania by this time, and would +naturally wish to join her. Anxious to console Mrs. +Blacklock, Mr. Lowington called for a boat, and hastened +on shore to see her. He found her, her daughter, +and Paul Kendall and lady, in the reading-room at the +Victoria—a unique apartment, with a fountain in the +centre, a glass gallery over the court-yard, and lighted +with many-colored lamps. The principal communicated +the intelligence he had received of her son to +Mrs. Blacklock, whose face lighted up at the news.</p> + +<p>“Then you have heard from the absentees, Mr. +Lowington,” said Paul Kendall.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_171" id="Page_171">[Pg 171]</a></span> +“Yes; they are on their way to Christiania, and +Sanford says they will arrive to-morrow, at farthest; +but they may be delayed,” replied the principal.</p> + +<p>“No one need worry about them if they are safe +and well,” added Paul, glancing at Clyde’s mother.</p> + +<p>“They are safe and well, but I intended to sail for +Gottenburg to-morrow morning. I have almost concluded +to do so, and leave some one to accompany the +boys to Gottenburg in the steamer. I do not like to +delay the whole fleet for them.”</p> + +<p>“It would take a long time to beat out of the fjord +against a head wind,” added Paul.</p> + +<p>“If the wind is fair to-morrow morning, I shall +sail, whether they arrive or not.”</p> + +<p>“A steamer leaves for Gottenburg on Saturday +morning, and she may arrive as soon as your ship,” +added Paul.</p> + +<p>“Very true. I think I will leave Peaks to look +out for the absentees. Are you sure the steamer +goes on Saturday?”</p> + +<p>“Yes, sir; here is the time table,” replied Paul, +producing a paper he had obtained at Mr. Bennett’s. +“Dampskibet Kronprindsesse Louise.”</p> + +<p>“That’s Norwegian, Paul. Can you read it?” +laughed Mr. Lowington.</p> + +<p>“A little. ‘Hver Löverday;’ that means on Saturday; +‘at 6 fm.,’ which is early in the morning. She +arrives at Gottenburg about midnight.”</p> + +<p>“That will answer our purpose very well. We +shall get under way early in the morning, Paul.”</p> + +<p>“Then I will go on board of the yacht to-night, sir; +but you need not wait for me, for I think I can catch +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_172" id="Page_172">[Pg 172]</a></span> +you if you should get two or three hours the start of +me. I haven’t used my balloon jib yet, and am rather +anxious to do so.”</p> + +<p>“I shall not wait for you, then, Paul.”</p> + +<p>After a long conversation with Mrs. Blacklock, in +which he assured her again that nothing but firmness +on her part could save her son from ruin, the principal +left the hotel, and returned to the ship. In the evening +Mr. and Mrs. Kendall went on board of the Grace. +On the following morning, the wind being a little +north of west, the signal for sailing was displayed on +board of the Young America, and at six o’clock the +fleet were under way. The weather was beautiful, +and the fresh breeze enabled all the vessels to log +eight knots an hour, which brought them fairly into +the Skager Rack early in the afternoon.</p> + +<p>“I suppose we are off the coast of Sweden now,” +said Norwood, as he glanced at the distant hills on +the left.</p> + +<p>“The pilot said Frederikshald was in this direction,” +replied Captain Lincoln, pointing to the shore. +“It is at the head of a small fjord, and is near the +line between Norway and Sweden.”</p> + +<p>“Charles XII. was killed there—wasn’t he?”</p> + +<p>“That’s the place. The fortress of Frederiksteen is +there, on a perpendicular rock four hundred feet high.”</p> + +<p>“I wish we went nearer to the Swedish coast,” +added Norwood.</p> + +<p>“We shall see enough of it before we leave the +Baltic,” said Lincoln.</p> + +<p>“Probably we shall not care to see it after we have +been looking at it a week.”</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_173" id="Page_173">[Pg 173]</a></span> +“According to the chart, this part of the coast is +fringed with islands, but they don’t look so bare and +desolate as those of Norway. I had an idea that +everything on this side of the ocean was entirely different +from what we see on our side,” added the +captain.</p> + +<p>“That was just my idea.”</p> + +<p>“But it isn’t so. It is almost the same thing here +as the coast of Maine. The shore here is hilly, and +through the glass it looks as though it was covered +with pine forests.”</p> + +<p>“I expect to see something different before we +return.”</p> + +<p>“Not in the Baltic; for I fancy most of the southern +coast looks like that of our Middle and Southern +States.”</p> + +<p>“Up here, even the houses look just as they do at +home.”</p> + +<p>“I don’t believe we shall find it so in Denmark.”</p> + +<p>As there was little to be seen, the regular routine +of the squadron was followed, and those who were in +the steerage, attending to their recitations, did not feel +that they were losing anything. Later in the day, the +wind was light, and the vessels made very little progress, +though the course brought them nearer to the +coast, where on the port bow appeared a high promontory, +extending far out into the sea. The wind died +out entirely just before sunset, and the sails hung +motionless from the spars; for there was no swell to +make them thrash about, as at sea. It was utter +silence, and it was hard to believe that very ugly +storms often made sad havoc in this channel.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_174" id="Page_174">[Pg 174]</a></span> +When the sun rose the next morning it brought +with it a light breeze from the west, and the fleet +again skimmed merrily along over the water. Its +course was near the town of Marstrand, a noted +Swedish watering-place, situated on an island. Soon +after, pilots were taken, and the vessels stood into the +harbor of Gottenburg, which is formed by the mouth +of Göta River. Along the sides of the channel were +posts set in the water, for the convenience of vessels +hauling in or out of the harbor. The fleet came to +anchor in a convenient part of the port, and those on +board proceeded to take a leisurely survey of the city. +The portion of the town nearest to them was built on +low, flat land, and they could see the entrances of various +canals. Farther back was a series of rugged +hills, which were covered with pleasant residences +and beautiful gardens. After dinner the students +were mustered on deck, to listen to a few particulars +in regard to the city, though it was understood that +the general lecture on Sweden would be reserved until +the arrival of the squadron at Stockholm.</p> + +<p>“What city is this?” asked Mr. Mapps.</p> + +<p>“Gottenburg,” replied a hundred of the students.</p> + +<p>“That is plain English. What do the Swedes call +it?”</p> + +<p>“G-ö-t-e-b-o-r-g,” answered Captain Lincoln, spelling +the word.</p> + +<p>“Perhaps I had better call on Professor Badois to +pronounce it for you.”</p> + +<p>“Yāt-a-borg,” said the instructor in languages, repeating +the pronunciation several times, which, however, +cannot be very accurately expressed with English +characters. “And the river here is Ya-tah.”</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_175" id="Page_175">[Pg 175]</a></span> +“The French call the city <em>Gothembourg</em>. It is five +miles from the sea, and is connected with Stockholm +by the Göta Canal, which is a wonderful piece of +engineering. Steamboats ply regularly between Gottenburg +and the capital through this canal, the voyage +occupying three or four days.”</p> + +<p>“I intend to make a trip up this canal as far as the +Wenern Lake, with the students,” said Mr. Lowington.</p> + +<p>A cheer greeted this announcement, and then the +professor described the canal minutely.</p> + +<p>“The principal street of Gottenburg,” he continued, +“is on the canal, extending through the centre of the +city. There are no remarkable buildings, however, +for the city is a commercial place. It was founded by +Gustavus Adolphus, and, like many other cities of the +north, being built of wood, it has several times been +nearly destroyed by fire. The buildings now are +mostly of stone, or of brick covered with plaster. The +environs of the city, as you may see from the ship, are +very pleasant. Now a word about the money of +Sweden. The government has adopted a decimal +system, of which the unit is the <em>riksdaler</em>, containing +one hundred <em>öre</em>. The currency in circulation is +almost entirely paper, though no bills smaller than +one riksdaler are issued. The silver coins in use are +the half and the quarter riksdaler, and the ten-öre +piece; the latter being a very small coin. On the +coppers, the value in öre is marked. A riksdaler is +worth about twenty-seven cents of our money. Sweden +is a cheap country.”</p> + +<p>The signal was made for embarking in the boats, +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_176" id="Page_176">[Pg 176]</a></span> +and in a few moments the Gottenburgers, as well as +the people on board of the foreign vessels in the harbor, +were astonished by the evolutions of the squadron. +The students landed, and dividing into parties, +explored the city. Their first care was to examine +the canal, and the various craft that floated upon it; +but the latter, consisting mainly of schooners, were not +different from those they saw at home. They visited +the exchange, the cathedral, the residence of the governor +of the province, and other principal edifices.</p> + +<p>“How do you feel, Scott?” asked Laybold, after +they had walked till they were tired out, and it was +nearly time to go to the landing-place.</p> + +<p>“Tired and hungry,” replied the wag. “I wonder +if these Swedishers have anything to eat.”</p> + +<p>“Probably they do; here’s a place which looks like +a restaurant.”</p> + +<p>“I feel as though I hadn’t tasted food for four +months. Let’s go in.”</p> + +<p>They entered the store, which was near the <em>Bourse</em>. +A neatly-dressed waiter bowed to them, and Scott +intimated that they wanted a lunch. The man who +understood English, conducted them to a table, on +which a variety of eatables was displayed, some of +which had a familiar look, and others were utterly +new and strange. The waiter filled a couple of wine-glasses +from a decanter containing a light-colored +fluid, and placed them before the boys.</p> + +<p>“What’s that?” asked Scott, glancing suspiciously +at the wine-glass.</p> + +<p>“<em>Finkel</em>,” replied the man.</p> + +<p>“Exactly so; that’s what I thought it was,” replied +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_177" id="Page_177">[Pg 177]</a></span> +Scott, who had never heard of the stuff before. “Is it +strong?”</p> + +<p>“No,” answered the waiter, shaking his head with +a laugh. “Everybody drinks it in Sweden.”</p> + +<p>“Then we must, Laybold, for we are somebody.”</p> + +<p>Scott raised the glass. The fluid had the odor of +anise-seed, and was not at all disagreeable. The +taste, too, was rather pleasant at first, and Scott +drank it off. Laybold followed his example. We +must do them the justice to say that neither of them +knew what “finkel” was. Something like strangulation +followed the swallowing of the fluid.</p> + +<p>“That’s not bad,” said Scott, trying to make the +best of it.</p> + +<p>“No, not bad, Scott; but what are you crying +about?” replied the other, when he recovered the use +of his tongue.</p> + +<p>“I happened to think of an old aunt of mine, who +died and left me all her money,” added Scott, wiping +his eyes. “But you needn’t cry; she didn’t leave any +of the money to you.”</p> + +<p>“What are you going to eat?”</p> + +<p>“I generally eat victuals,” replied Scott, picking up +a slice of bread on which was laid a very thin slice of +smoked salmon. “That’s not bad.”</p> + +<p>The waiter passed to Laybold a small plate of sandwiches, +filled with a kind of fish-spawn, black and +shining. The student took a huge bite of one of them, +but a moment elapsed before he realized the taste of +the interior of the sandwich; then, with the ugliest +face a boy could assume, he rushed to the door, and +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_178" id="Page_178">[Pg 178]</a></span> +violently ejected the contents of his mouth into the +street.</p> + +<p>“What’s the matter?” demanded the waiter, struggling +to keep from laughing.</p> + +<p>“What abominably nasty stuff!” exclaimed Laybold. +“It’s just like fish slime.”</p> + +<p>“Don’t you like it, Laybold?” asked Scott, coolly.</p> + +<p>“Like it? I don’t like it.”</p> + +<p>“Everybody in Sweden eats it,” said the waiter.</p> + +<p>“What’s the matter with it? Is it like defunct +cat?” asked Scott.</p> + +<p>“More like defunct fish. Try it.”</p> + +<p>“I will, my lad,” added Scott, taking a liberal bite +of one of the sandwiches.</p> + +<p>“How is it?” inquired Laybold.</p> + +<p>“First rate; that’s the diet for me.”</p> + +<p>“Very good,” said the waiter.</p> + +<p>“You don’t mean to say you like that stuff, Scott.”</p> + +<p>“The proof of the pudding is the eating of the bag. +I do like it, even better than ‘finkel.’”</p> + +<p>“I don’t believe it. No one with a Christian stomach +could eat such stuff.”</p> + +<p>“You judge by your own experience. I say it is +good. Yours isn’t a Christian stomach, and that’s the +reason you don’t like it.”</p> + +<p>“You are a heathen, Scott.”</p> + +<p>“Heathen enough to know what’s good.”</p> + +<p>“Some more finkel, sir?” suggested the waiter.</p> + +<p>“No more finkel for me,” replied Scott, whose head +was beginning to whirl like a top.</p> + +<p>“Better take some more,” laughed Laybold, who +was in the same condition.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_179" id="Page_179">[Pg 179]</a></span> +“I can’t stop to take any more; I’m hungry,” +replied Scott, who continued to devour the various +viands on the table, till his companion’s patience was +exhausted.</p> + +<p>“Come, Scott, we shall be late at the landing.”</p> + +<p>“We won’t go home till morning,” chanted the +boozy student.</p> + +<p>“I will go now;” and Laybold stood up, and tried +to walk to the door—a feat which he accomplished +with no little difficulty.</p> + +<p>“Don’t be in a hurry, my boy. Come and take +some finkel.”</p> + +<p>“I don’t want any finkel.”</p> + +<p>“Then come and pay the bill. I shall clean out +this concern if I stay any longer.”</p> + +<p>“How much, waiter?” stammered Laybold.</p> + +<p>“One riksdaler.”</p> + +<p>“Cheap enough. I should have been broken if they +charged by the pound for what I ate.”</p> + +<p>“That’s so,” added Laybold, as he gave the waiter +an English sovereign, and received his change in +paper.</p> + +<p>“Now, my boy, we’ll go to sea again,” said Scott, +as he staggered towards the door. “See here, Laybold.”</p> + +<p>“Well, what do you want?” snarled the latter.</p> + +<p>“I’ll tell you something, if you won’t say anything +about it to any one.”</p> + +<p>“I won’t.”</p> + +<p>“Don’t tell the principal.”</p> + +<p>“No.”</p> + +<p>“Well, then, we’re drunk,” added Scott, with a +tipsy grin.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_180" id="Page_180">[Pg 180]</a></span> +“You are.”</p> + +<p>“I am, my boy; I don’t know a bob-stay from a +bowling hitch. And you are as drunk as I am, +Laybold.”</p> + +<p>“I know what I am about.”</p> + +<p>“So do I know what you are about. You are +making a fool of yourself. Hold on a minute,” added +Scott, as he seated himself on a bench before a shop.</p> + +<p>“Come along, Scott.”</p> + +<p>“Not for Joseph.”</p> + +<p>“We shall be left.”</p> + +<p>“That’s just what I want. I’m not going to present +myself before the principal in this condition—not +if I know it.”</p> + +<p>Laybold, finding that it was not convenient to stand, +seated himself by the side of his companion. Presently +they discovered a party of officers on their way +to the boats, and they staggered into a lane to escape +observation. The two students, utterly vanquished by +“finkel,” did not appear at the landing, and the boats +left without them.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_181" id="Page_181">[Pg 181]</a></span></p> +<h2>CHAPTER XI.</h2> + +<p class="center"><strong>ON THE WAY TO THE RJUKANFOS.</strong></p> + + +<p>“What may the Rjukanfos be?” asked Clyde +Blacklock, after his courier had started on +his return to Christiania.</p> + +<p>“O, it’s a big thing,” replied Sanford. “You can +bet high on it.”</p> + +<p>“Doubtless I can; but is it a mountain, a river, or +a lake?”</p> + +<p>“’Pon my word, I don’t know. Here, Norway!” +he shouted to Ole, who was with the rest of the party.</p> + +<p>“I’m here, Mr. Coxswain,” replied the waif.</p> + +<p>“What’s the Rjukanfos? You told me we ought +to go there; but I’ll be hanged if I know whether it’s +a lake or a river.”</p> + +<p>“Neither a lake nor a river,” replied Ole. “It’s a +big waterfall. <em>Fos</em>, on the end of a word, always +makes a waterfall of it. There’s another, the Vöringfos; +but that’s too far away.”</p> + +<p>“How far is it?”</p> + +<p>“I don’t know; but it’s a long distance,” added +Ole. “All the other fellows think we are going to +Christiania in the morning.”</p> + +<p>“All but Stockwell and Rodman,” answered Sanford, +who had told Ole about the new recruit.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_182" id="Page_182">[Pg 182]</a></span> +“So you are going to play it upon them—are +you?” laughed Clyde.</p> + +<p>“Just a little. We don’t want to leave Norway +without seeing something of the country, and the rest +of the fellows won’t go. So we are going to take them +along with us.”</p> + +<p>“Excellent! That will be a magnificent joke,” exclaimed +Clyde. “I’m with you. I suppose you all +ran away from the ship when you found the tyranny +was too much for you.”</p> + +<p>“O, no! We didn’t run away. We wouldn’t do +that. Somehow, by an accident, our boat was stove, +and we were carried off by a steamer. Then we +couldn’t get back to Christiansand before the ship +sailed, and we were obliged to come across the country +to Christiania, you see.”</p> + +<p>“I see,” replied Clyde, knowingly. “But you +don’t mean to go back to the ship—do you?”</p> + +<p>“Certainly we do,” protested Sanford.</p> + +<p>“Then you are bigger spoonies than I thought you +were.”</p> + +<p>“But we are afraid the ship will be gone before we +can reach Christiania.”</p> + +<p>“O, you are afraid of it.”</p> + +<p>“Very much afraid of it.”</p> + +<p>“You wouldn’t cry if you found she had gone—would +you?”</p> + +<p>“Well, perhaps we should not cry, for we think we +ought to be manly, and not be babies; but, of course, +we should feel very bad about it.”</p> + +<p>“O, you would!”</p> + +<p>“Certainly we should; for if we were caught running +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_183" id="Page_183">[Pg 183]</a></span> +away, staying away longer than is necessary, or +anything of that sort, our liberty would be stopped, +and we should not be allowed to go on shore with the +rest of the fellows.”</p> + +<p>“You are a deep one, Mr. Coxswain,” added Clyde.</p> + +<p>“O, no! I’m only a simple-minded young man, +that always strives to do his duty as well as he knows +how.”</p> + +<p>“I dare say you think it is your duty to visit the—what-ye-call-it?—the +waterfall.”</p> + +<p>“You see it is just as near to go that way as the +other.”</p> + +<p>“Is it?”</p> + +<p>“Well, if it isn’t, we shall not know the fact till +after we have been there.”</p> + +<p>“I think I understand you perfectly, Mr. Coxswain; +but I don’t intend to return to the ship under any circumstances.”</p> + +<p>“You can do as you please, but if we should +happen to miss the ship, why, we shall be obliged +to travel till we find her.”</p> + +<p>“Exactly so,” laughed Clyde.</p> + +<p>“But don’t understand me that we mean to run +away, or to keep away from the ship any longer than +is absolutely necessary; for we are all good boys, and +always mean to obey our officers.”</p> + +<p>“I don’t mean to do any such thing. After I hear +that the ship has left Christiania, I shall go there, find +my mother, and travel where I please.”</p> + +<p>The next morning the party started on their journey, +and by the middle of the afternoon arrived at a +station between Lysthus and Tinoset, where the road +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_184" id="Page_184">[Pg 184]</a></span> +to the Rjukanfos branched off from that to the capital. +They were compelled to wait an hour here for a +change of horses. Rogues rarely believe that they are +suspected, and Sanford was confident that his companions, +with the exception of Rodman and Stockwell, +had no idea of his intentions. Burchmore had +not failed to notice the repeated conferences between +those who were plotting the mischief. He was not +quite satisfied with the delay which had enabled the +party to catch that solitary salmon at Apalstö. He +was one of the first to enter the station-house where +the carioles stopped. On the table he found “The +Hand-book of Norway,” which contained a large +map. He was anxious to possess this book.</p> + +<p>“<em>Hvor</em>?” said he, using a word he had learned +of Ole, which meant “how much,” at the same time +holding up the book, and exhibiting his money.</p> + +<p>“<em>Tre</em>,” replied the woman in the room; by which +he understood her to mean three marks, for at the +same time she laughingly held up three fingers.</p> + +<p>Burchmore paid the money, and put the book into +his pocket. Retreating behind the stable with Churchill, +who rode in the cariole with him, he produced +the volume, and spread out the map. Without much +difficulty he found the road by which the party had +come. Everything was right so far, and he was +satisfied that they should arrive at Kongsberg that +night.</p> + +<p>“Can you make out what’s up, Burchmore?” asked +Churchill, with whom the former had discussed his +doubts and fears.</p> + +<p>“No; everything is right. Here we are, at the +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_185" id="Page_185">[Pg 185]</a></span> +branching off of these two roads,” replied Burchmore, +indicating the locality with the point of his knife.</p> + +<p>“But Sanford is up to something. He, and Ole, +and Stockwell are whispering together half the time. +Perhaps they mean to leave us somewhere on the +road.”</p> + +<p>“They can, if they like,” added Burchmore. “I +am cashier, you know. Each fellow has paid me +seven pounds, which I have changed into species and +marks. No other one has any Norwegian money, or, +at least, not more than a specie or two. They won’t +leave me.”</p> + +<p>“They wouldn’t make anything by it.”</p> + +<p>“And Sanford runs with that English fellow, who +seems to be a little fast.”</p> + +<p>“He’s a hard one,” added Churchill, shaking his +head.</p> + +<p>“Let them go it; I can keep the run of them now,” +said Burchmore, as he folded up the map, and put the +Hand-book in his pocket. “Don’t say anything about +this book, Churchy.”</p> + +<p>“Not a word.”</p> + +<p>“I know where we are now, and I think I shall +know better than to wait a whole day for horses again. +That was a sell.”</p> + +<p>“Do you think so?”</p> + +<p>“I thought so at the time, but I didn’t want to +make a fuss. I changed a sovereign for Ole yesterday, +and I believe Sanford has bought him up. Never +mind; we take the right hand road here, and as long +as we keep moving I haven’t a word to say.”</p> + +<p>In less than an hour the horses were ready, and the +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_186" id="Page_186">[Pg 186]</a></span> +procession of carioles moved off. Ole and Sanford +led the way, and turned to the left, instead of the +right.</p> + +<p>“That’s wrong,” said Burchmore, very much excited.</p> + +<p>“But what do they mean by going this way?” added +Churchill.</p> + +<p>“I don’t know, and I don’t care; I only know it is +the wrong way. Hallo!” he shouted to Sanford, +and stopped his pony, which compelled three others +behind him to stop also.</p> + +<p>“What’s the matter?” called Sanford.</p> + +<p>“You are going the wrong way,” replied the cashier.</p> + +<p>“No, this is right; come along;” and the coxswain +started his team again.</p> + +<p>But Burchmore refused to follow him, and continued +to block the way against those behind him.</p> + +<p>“Out of the way!” cried Clyde, who was in the +rear.</p> + +<p>“This is not the right way to Kongsberg,” said +Burchmore.</p> + +<p>“Out of the way, or I’ll smash you!” added the +imperious Briton.</p> + +<p>The cashier was a peaceable young gentleman, and +turned his horse out of the road. The cariole of +Sanford was now out of sight.</p> + +<p>“Why don’t you go ahead?” demanded Tinckner. +“How do you know it is the wrong road?”</p> + +<p>“I am certain of it. Those fellows are up to some +trick.”</p> + +<p>As a portion of the procession did not follow its +leader, Sanford and his companions turned back.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_187" id="Page_187">[Pg 187]</a></span> +“What’s the matter, Burchmore? Why don’t you +come along?” cried the coxswain, angrily.</p> + +<p>“This is not the right road.”</p> + +<p>“Isn’t it, Ole?” added the coxswain, turning to his +companion in the cariole.</p> + +<p>“Certainly it is.”</p> + +<p>“I know it isn’t,” protested the cashier, vehemently. +“You are up to some trick.”</p> + +<p>“What trick?” asked Sanford, mildly, as he put +on his look of injured innocence.</p> + +<p>“I don’t know what; but I know this is not the +right road to Kongsberg.”</p> + +<p>“Who said anything about Kongsberg? We intend +to go by the shortest way. Don’t we, Ole?”</p> + +<p>“To be sure we do,” replied the ready waif. “We +are not going way round by Kongsberg.”</p> + +<p>“You can’t bluff me.”</p> + +<p>“Don’t want to bluff you. Go whichever way you +like; and the one who gets to Christiania first is the +best fellow. That’s all I have to say.”</p> + +<p>Sanford turned his pony, and drove off again, followed +by Clyde, Stockwell, and Rodman.</p> + +<p>“How do you know this isn’t the right way?” inquired +Tinckner.</p> + +<p>“I’ll tell you,” replied the cashier, jumping out +of the cariole, and taking the Hand-book from his +pocket.</p> + +<p>The others soon joined him, and exhibiting the map, +he explained his position to his friends.</p> + +<p>“Here’s another road to Kongsberg,” said Summers, +indicating its direction on the map. “They +may be going that way.”</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_188" id="Page_188">[Pg 188]</a></span> +“It is possible,” added Burchmore, puzzled by this +discovery. “It is farther that way than by Lysthus.”</p> + +<p>“Not much; there’s hardly any difference. I’m in +favor of following Sanford.”</p> + +<p>So were nearly all of them, and the cashier finally +yielded. The tourists resumed their seats, and soon +overtook the coxswain, who had evidently expected to +be followed. Burchmore was annoyed by the discovery +he had made, but as the pony attached to the cariole +slowly climbed the hills, he studied the map and +the text of the book he had bought.</p> + +<p>“We can’t go much farther on this tack,” said he, +as he folded up his map.</p> + +<p>“What’s to prevent us from keeping on to the north +pole?” asked Churchill.</p> + +<p>“It is almost night, in the first place, and in the +second, we shall come to a lake in the course of an +hour, where we must take boats.”</p> + +<p>“I don’t believe anything is wrong about the matter.”</p> + +<p>“Don’t you? Then what are we doing up here?”</p> + +<p>“Never mind; we shall soon come to that other +road, and then we shall know whether Sanford means +to go to Kongsberg or not.”</p> + +<p>“He has stopped ahead of us. He is waiting for +us to come up,” added Burchmore.</p> + +<p>“Yes; and there is the road which turns off to the +right.”</p> + +<p>“Why don’t he go ahead?”</p> + +<p>Sanford and those who had arrived with him left +the carioles, and gathered at the junction of the two +roads. Burchmore followed their example.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_189" id="Page_189">[Pg 189]</a></span> +“What’s the matter? What are you stopping here +for?” demanded Clyde Blacklock, rather imperiously.</p> + +<p>“Some of the fellows think we are going to play +them a trick,” said Sanford, with his sweet and innocent +smile.</p> + +<p>“Who thinks so?” asked Clyde.</p> + +<p>“Burchmore.”</p> + +<p>“Which is Burchmore?”</p> + +<p>“That’s my name,” replied the cashier, rather indifferently.</p> + +<p>“Are you the fellow that wants to break up the +party?” blustered Clyde.</p> + +<p>“No, I’m not. I’m the fellow that wants to go to +Christiania. We ought to have kept to the right at +the last station.”</p> + +<p>“I insist on going this way.”</p> + +<p>“I don’t object; you can go whichever way you +please,” added the cashier, very gently.</p> + +<p>“But we mean to keep the party together; and +we might as well fight it out here as in any other +place.”</p> + +<p>Clyde threw off his overcoat, as though he intended +to give a literal demonstration of his remark.</p> + +<p>“I don’t consider you as one of the party,” added +Burchmore.</p> + +<p>“Don’t you?”</p> + +<p>“No, I do not. You don’t belong to our ship, and +I don’t pay your bills.”</p> + +<p>“No matter for that. If you are not willing to go +the way the rest of us wish to go, I’ll pound you till +you are willing.”</p> + +<p>“No, no, Old England; we don’t want anything +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_190" id="Page_190">[Pg 190]</a></span> +of that sort. Burchmore is a first-rate fellow,” interposed +the politic Sanford.</p> + +<p>“You leave this fellow to me; I’ll take care of him. +I can whip him out of his boots.”</p> + +<p>“I shall stick to my boots for the present,” replied +Burchmore, who did not seem to be intimidated by +the sharp conduct of the Briton. “I am willing to +listen to reason, but I shall not be bullied into anything.”</p> + +<p>“What do you mean by bullied? Do you call me +a bully?” foamed Clyde.</p> + +<p>“You can draw your own inferences.”</p> + +<p>“Do you call me a bully?” demanded Clyde, doubling +his fists, and walking up to the cashier.</p> + +<p>“Enough of this,” said Sanford, stepping between +the Briton and his intended victim. “We shall not +allow anybody to lick Burchmore, for he is a good +fellow, and always means right.”</p> + +<p>“I don’t allow any fellow to call me a bully,” replied +Clyde.</p> + +<p>“He didn’t call you a bully. He only said he would +not be bullied into anything.”</p> + +<p>“It’s the same thing.”</p> + +<p>“No matter if it is, Old England. You volunteered +to pound him if he wouldn’t go with us; and it strikes +me that this is something like bullying,” added the +coxswain, with a cheerful smile.</p> + +<p>“I shall thrash him for his impudence, at any rate.”</p> + +<p>“It isn’t exactly civil to tell a fellow you will pound +him if he won’t go with us; and who shall thrash you +for your impudence, eh, Old England?”</p> + +<p>“I mean what I say.”</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_191" id="Page_191">[Pg 191]</a></span> +“We shall allow no fight on this question, my gentle +Britisher. If you should happen to hit Burchmore, +I have no doubt he would wallop you soundly +for your impudence.”</p> + +<p>“I should like to see him do it,” cried Clyde, pulling +off his coat, and throwing himself into the attitude of +the pugilist.</p> + +<p>“No, you wouldn’t, Albion; and if you would you +can’t have that pleasure. There will be no fight to-day.”</p> + +<p>“Yes, there will,” shouted Clyde.</p> + +<p>“Not much;” and Sanford, Rodman, and Stockwell +placed themselves between Burchmore and Clyde.</p> + +<p>“Dry up, Great Britain!” added Wilde.</p> + +<p>“We have a point to settle here,” continued Sanford, +taking no further notice of the belligerent Briton. “The +right hand road goes to Kongsberg; but there is no +hotel in that direction where we could sleep to-night. +I propose, therefore, that we go on to—what’s the +name of the place, Norway?”</p> + +<p>“Tinoset,” replied Ole.</p> + +<p>“To Tinoset, where there is a big hotel.”</p> + +<p>“How far is it?” asked Churchill.</p> + +<p>“Only two or three miles. Then to-morrow we +can go on to Kongsberg, unless you prefer to go a +better way. I’m always ready to do just what the rest +of the fellows say,” added Sanford.</p> + +<p>The matter was discussed in all its bearings, and +even Burchmore thought it better to sleep at Tinoset.</p> + +<p>“All right,” said Sanford, as he moved off towards +his cariole.</p> + +<p>“Not yet,” interposed Clyde, who still stood with +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_192" id="Page_192">[Pg 192]</a></span> +his coat off. “I haven’t settled my affair with this +spoony.”</p> + +<p>Burchmore and Churchill walked leisurely towards +their vehicle, while Rodman and Stockwell covered +the retreat.</p> + +<p>“If you thrash him, you thrash the whole of us, +Great Britain,” said Rodman.</p> + +<p>“What kind of a way is that?” demanded the disgusted +Briton.</p> + +<p>“We won’t have any fight over this matter,” added +Stockwell. “Jump in, and let us be off.”</p> + +<p>“We’ll settle it when we get to that place,” replied +Clyde, seeing that this opportunity was lost.</p> + +<p>The procession resumed its journey, and in half an +hour arrived at Tinoset. As it was early in the season, +the hotel was not crowded, as it sometimes is. +The town is at the foot of Lake Tins, upon which the +little steamer Rjukan made three trips a week each +way. The boat was to depart the next morning for +Ornæs, which is only a few miles from the Rjukanfos. +Sanford declared that the most direct route to Christiania +was by steamer through this lake, and then by +cariole the rest of the journey. Ole, of course, backed +up all he said, and most of the boys wished to go that +way. For some reason or other, Burchmore kept still, +though he did not assent to the coxswain’s plan, and +the question was still open when the tourists were +called to supper.</p> + +<p>“Ole, I want to see you alone,” said the cashier, +after the meal was finished.</p> + +<p>“What for?” asked Ole.</p> + +<p>“I have some money for you.”</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_193" id="Page_193">[Pg 193]</a></span> +“For me?”</p> + +<p>“Come along.”</p> + +<p>Burchmore led the way to the lake, where they +found a retired place.</p> + +<p>“What money have you for me?” demanded the +astonished Norwegian.</p> + +<p>“How much did Sanford give you for humbugging +us?”</p> + +<p>“For what?”</p> + +<p>“For playing this trick on us?”</p> + +<p>“I don’t know what you mean.”</p> + +<p>“The coxswain gave you a sovereign for fooling us. +I’ll give you five species, which is more than a sovereign, +if you do what I want.”</p> + +<p>“I will,” replied Ole, promptly.</p> + +<p>“In the first place, where are you taking us?”</p> + +<p>“To Christiania.”</p> + +<p>“Nonsense!” exclaimed the cashier, producing his +book. “I know all about it. You ought to have gone +to Lysthus, instead of taking the left hand road. We +are two Norwegian miles out of our way now. Sanford +has paid you a sovereign to lead us to some +place he wishes to visit. Where is it?”</p> + +<p>“I only do what’s right,” protested Ole.</p> + +<p>“Bah! I know better! The story that no horses +could be had at Apalstö was a humbug. I’ll give you +five species if you will do as I tell you.”</p> + +<p>Ole looked complacent, and held out his hand for +the money.</p> + +<p>“I don’t pay till the work is done; but my word is +as good as my bond.”</p> + +<p>The waif had an “itching palm,” and, after considerable +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_194" id="Page_194">[Pg 194]</a></span> +discussion, the terms of payment were +settled.</p> + +<p>“Now, where are we going?” asked the cashier.</p> + +<p>“To the Rjukanfos. It is a big waterfall, with +high mountains—one of the finest places in Norway.”</p> + +<p>“Exactly so; but we are not going there,” added +Burchmore, decidedly. “You will engage the carioles +for to-morrow morning, and we must be in +Kongsberg by noon, and near Christiania by night.”</p> + +<p>“Sanford will kill me,” replied Ole.</p> + +<p>“No, he won’t; we will take care of him.”</p> + +<p>“I can manage it, first rate. I will tell Sanford +that we can go up quicker on the other side of the +lake, and then cross over.”</p> + +<p>“Tell him what you please, but my plan must be +carried out,” answered Burchmore, who, perhaps, believed +that he should be justified in fighting the coxswain +with his own weapons.</p> + +<p>“Here you are; I’ve been looking for you,” said +Clyde, presenting himself sooner than he was wanted. +“You thought you would keep out of my way—did +you?”</p> + +<p>“I have not given that subject any attention,” replied +Burchmore, coolly.</p> + +<p>“Yes, you have; you sneaked off here to keep out +of my way.”</p> + +<p>“As you please,” replied Burchmore, who began +to walk slowly towards the road.</p> + +<p>“You don’t escape me this time,” added Clyde, +placing himself in front of the cashier.</p> + +<p>“I have no wish to escape you.”</p> + +<p>“Yes, you have; you are a Yankee coward!”</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_195" id="Page_195">[Pg 195]</a></span> +“Perhaps I am; but I’m not afraid of a British +bully.”</p> + +<p>“Do you call me a bully?”</p> + +<p>“Most distinctly I do, and I can prove my words.”</p> + +<p>Clyde was rather startled by this exhibition of +pluck, which he had not expected.</p> + +<p>“You call me a bully—do you?”</p> + +<p>“I do.”</p> + +<p>“Then we’ll settle it here. Off with your coat,” +blustered Clyde, as he divested himself.</p> + +<p>“I never fight if I can help it; but I always defend +myself,” replied Burchmore, resuming his walk towards +the road.</p> + +<p>“Do you mean to run away?” demanded Clyde.</p> + +<p>“No; I mean to walk very leisurely back to the +station-house.”</p> + +<p>“No, you don’t!” said the Briton, again placing +himself before the cashier.</p> + +<p>Ole, who did not care, under the circumstances, to +be seen with Burchmore by any one of the party, had +disappeared by this time; but meeting Sanford near +the lake, he had informed him what Clyde was doing. +The coxswain hastened to the spot, with Stockwell +and two or three others. But they were a little too +late; for Clyde, feeling that he had gone too far to +recede with honor, had struck Burchmore. When +Sanford and the rest of the party reached the place, +the belligerent Briton lay on the ground, where, after +a sharp set-to and a black eye, he had been thrown +by his cool opponent. He picked himself up, and was +preparing for another onslaught, when the coxswain +stepped between the combatants.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_196" id="Page_196">[Pg 196]</a></span> +“Enough of that, Albion,” said he.</p> + +<p>Clyde made a rush towards Burchmore, but the +others interfered, and held him back. In vain he +struggled in his wrath, but the stout coxswain and his +companions threw him upon the ground, and held +him there till his anger had in a measure subsided.</p> + +<p>“Be off, Burchmore,” said Sanford. “We will +take care of him.”</p> + +<p>“I am not afraid of him,” replied the cashier.</p> + +<p>“Of course you are not; but clear out, and let us +have peace.”</p> + +<p>“He is afraid of me!” roared Clyde.</p> + +<p>“Nonsense, Great Britain! He would have mauled +you to death if we hadn’t interfered. He can whip +his weight in wildcats.”</p> + +<p>Burchmore walked away, and soon disappeared +beyond the houses. Clyde foamed in his wrath for a +while, but finally consented to be pacified, promising, +very faithfully, to whip the cashier the next time he +caught him alone.</p> + +<p>“Don’t you do it, Albion. You never will see +your mother again if you attempt it. Wait a few +days, and then, if you insist upon it, we will let Burchmore +thrash you all you want,” replied Sanford, as +they walked back to the station-house.</p> + +<p>Clyde had a bad-looking eye, and perhaps believed +that he had had a narrow escape; but he still maintained +his credit as a bully. At the hotel, the question +of the route for the next day came up. Burchmore +insisted upon going to Christiania by the way of +Kongsberg, and Sanford, who had consulted Ole +again, assented. The waif had assured him that they +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_197" id="Page_197">[Pg 197]</a></span> +could reach the Rjukanfos quicker and better by the +road than by the lake.</p> + +<p>The next morning the carioles were ready, and the +tourists renewed their journey, and went back on the +road by which they had come, till they came to that +which led to Kongsberg. The “forbud” had been +duly forwarded, and there were no delays or interruptions.</p> + +<p>“Where’s the lake?” asked Sanford, when they +had been riding about two hours.</p> + +<p>“O, the road don’t go near the lake, till we get to +the place where we cross,” replied Ole, who was +carrying out in good faith the arrangement he had +made with the cashier.</p> + +<p>“How shall we cross the lake?”</p> + +<p>“In a steamer which goes at seven o’clock in the +morning.”</p> + +<p>“All right,” replied the unsuspecting Sanford.</p> + +<p>“We shall come to a large town at noon; and we +musn’t stop a minute there, or those fellows will find +where they are. We can tell them it is Kongsberg, +you know,” added the wily waif.</p> + +<p>“Just so,” laughed Sanford; “we’ll tell them it +is Kongsberg, and they won’t know the difference.”</p> + +<p>“I don’t think they will.”</p> + +<p>At noon, agreeably to the promise of Ole, the travellers +arrived at the large town, where they were +obliged to change horses.</p> + +<p>“This is Kongsberg, Burchmore,” said the coxswain.</p> + +<p>“Is it, really? or are you playing some trick upon +us?” replied the cashier.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_198" id="Page_198">[Pg 198]</a></span> +“’Pon my word this is Kongsberg. Isn’t it, Ole?”</p> + +<p>“Yes, certainly,” answered the waif, winking slyly +to Burchmore.</p> + +<p>“All right, Sanford; if you are satisfied, I am.”</p> + +<p>“I know it is Kongsberg. I have been here before,” +added Clyde, wishing to give his testimony in +carrying out the deception.</p> + +<p>It was quite true that he had been in Kongsberg, but +Ole took care that he should not go to the part of the +town he had visited before. The road looked familiar +to him; but as he rode alone, he had no opportunity to +state the fact to others. Before night the party arrived +at Drammen, where a regular line of steamers runs to +Christiania.</p> + +<p>“That’s the lake—is it?” said Sanford, pointing +to the Drammen River, which, below the town, is +nearly two miles wide.</p> + +<p>“That’s it.”</p> + +<p>“What does Burchmore say? Does he know where +he is?”</p> + +<p>“Not yet; I shall tell him this is Drammen, and he +will believe me.”</p> + +<p>“Good! and we will all stick to it that this is Drammen,” +added Sanford.</p> + +<p>“But suppose we should meet some one here who +knows about the ship? This is a large town—bigger +than that other which we called Kongsberg.”</p> + +<p>“Whom can we meet?”</p> + +<p>“I don’t know.”</p> + +<p>“I should hate to have any one tell the principal +that we have been to the Rjukanfos.”</p> + +<p>“Some of the officers may come up here.”</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_199" id="Page_199">[Pg 199]</a></span> +“We must keep out of sight, then.”</p> + +<p>Others thought this would be good policy in a large +town. As they were fatigued, they retired early, and +did not come down the next morning till it was nearly +time to leave in the steamer. They all went on board, +and were soon moving down the river.</p> + +<p>“Are we going across the lake, Ole?” asked Sanford.</p> + +<p>“This is a kind of arm of the lake, about a dozen +miles long. We shall come to the lake in a couple of +hours,” replied the waif.</p> + +<p>“All right; but it must be a very large lake.”</p> + +<p>“The biggest in Norway.”</p> + +<p>In a couple of hours the steamer arrived at Holmsbo, +on the Christiania Fjord.</p> + +<p>“Now you can see that this is a large lake,” said +Ole.</p> + +<p>“But where are we?” demanded Burchmore. “Is +this the way to Christiania?”</p> + +<p>“Certainly it is,” replied Sanford, who did not yet +recognize the fjord, though the truth could not +be much longer concealed. “Don’t you know this +water?”</p> + +<p>“No, I don’t.”</p> + +<p>“This is Christiania Fjord.”</p> + +<p>“Is it, really?”</p> + +<p>“Yes, it is; you can bet your life upon it.”</p> + +<p>“I am satisfied then.”</p> + +<p>In another hour the steamer was fairly in the fjord; +Sanford and Stockwell began to rub their eyes; for +the scenery looked strangely familiar, though they +could not fully identify anything.</p> + +<p>“What place is that ahead?” asked Sanford. “I +am almost sure I have seen it before.”</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_200" id="Page_200">[Pg 200]</a></span> +“So am I,” replied Stockwell.</p> + +<p>“That place?” added the cashier.</p> + +<p>“Yes; what is it?”</p> + +<p>“If this is Christiania Fjord, that must be Dröbak. +I have a map here,” said Burchmore, producing his +book, and displaying the map. “Here we are; there’s +Holmsbo, and this must be Dröbak.”</p> + +<p>“I don’t understand it,” replied the perplexed coxswain.</p> + +<p>“Don’t you? Why, I think it is as clear as mud,” +laughed Burchmore. “We shall be in Christiania in +a couple of hours. I thought you were playing some +trick upon us, Sanford; but I see now that you were +all right. There’s the captain; he speaks English.”</p> + +<p>“What town is that, captain?” asked the coxswain.</p> + +<p>“Dröbak; we shall be in Christiania in about two +hours,” answered the master.</p> + +<p>“Where’s Ole?” demanded the coxswain, much +excited.</p> + +<p>“What does it mean?” said Clyde.</p> + +<p>“I don’t know. Where’s Ole?”</p> + +<p>The waif evidently considered discretion the better +part of valor, for he could not be found; and the +coxswain and those in his confidence realized that +they had been “sold” in their own coin.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_201" id="Page_201">[Pg 201]</a></span></p> +<h2>CHAPTER XII.</h2> + +<p class="center"><strong>THE BOATSWAIN AND THE BRITON.</strong></p> + + +<p>“Where’s Ole? I don’t understand it,” repeated +Sanford, after he had made another +ineffectual search for the missing waif.</p> + +<p>“We have been sold, instead of selling those fellows,” +added Stockwell.</p> + +<p>“That’s so; and I should rather like to know how +it was done. Ole has sold us out.”</p> + +<p>“Is this your Rjukanfos?” demanded Clyde Blacklock, +who had been looking for some one upon whom +to pour out his wrath.</p> + +<p>“Not exactly,” answered Sanford, indifferently, for +he did not particularly enjoy the airs of the Briton.</p> + +<p>“But what do you mean by bringing me here?” +added Clyde.</p> + +<p>“I didn’t bring you here. You came of your own +free will and accord.”</p> + +<p>“No, I didn’t; you said we were going to the +waterfall.”</p> + +<p>“We thought so ourselves; but we have been deceived. +Ole has sold out and made fools of us. You +are no worse off than the rest of us.”</p> + +<p>“To whom did he sell out?” asked Clyde, appeased +when he learned that he was not the only sufferer.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_202" id="Page_202">[Pg 202]</a></span> +“I don’t know. I don’t understand it at all. We +have been cheated out of the Rjukanfos, and brought +to Christiania.”</p> + +<p>“Well, what are you going to do about it?” inquired +Stockwell.</p> + +<p>“We can’t do anything about it. I suppose we +shall be on board of the ship in an hour or two, telling +the principal how hard we tried to be here before.”</p> + +<p>“But I’m not going back to Christiania,” protested +Clyde.</p> + +<p>“I don’t see how you can help yourself. This boat +don’t stop again till she arrives there.”</p> + +<p>“I will not go to the ship again, at any rate,” added +Clyde.</p> + +<p>“Do as you like about that; it isn’t our business.”</p> + +<p>Clyde was much disturbed by the situation. As he +always regarded himself as the central figure of the +group, he began to suspect that the apparent miscarriage +of the plan was a trick to lure him back to the +ship; but Sanford seemed to be honest, and to be +entirely discomfited by the discovery. Burchmore and +Churchill were highly elated at the success attending +their scheme, which had, indeed, exceeded their expectations; +but they were as much mystified by the +disappearance of Ole as the victims of the trick. +Being unable to speak the language, they could not +inquire for the absentee; but they made a very diligent +search for him. They were more successful than +Sanford’s party had been, for, in going forward, they +heard some high words in the quarters of the steamer’s +crew, in the forecastle. Listening for a moment, +they heard the voice of Ole, who appeared to have +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_203" id="Page_203">[Pg 203]</a></span> +concealed himself in that part of the vessel, and was +properly regarded as an intruder by the rightful occupants +thereof.</p> + +<p>“Come out here, Ole,” shouted Burchmore. “We +want you.”</p> + +<p>Ole turned from the Norwegian sailors, who were +scolding at him for taking possession of their quarters, +to his friends and allies.</p> + +<p>“Where’s Sanford?” he asked, rather timidly.</p> + +<p>“On deck.”</p> + +<p>“He’ll kill me.”</p> + +<p>“Nonsense! We will take care of you against any +odds,” said the cashier, laughing heartily at the fears +of the waif. “They have only just ascertained where +they are. Come up, Ole.”</p> + +<p>Thus assured, the young Norwegian climbed up +the ladder, much to the satisfaction of the sailors. +Burchmore was too well pleased with the trick he had +played upon the conspirators to confine the knowledge +of it to Churchill and himself, and had explained +it to all who were not actually in the confidence of the +coxswain. A majority of the party were thus arrayed +on his side, though two or three of them would as +readily have chosen the other side. The cashier was +evidently the safer leader.</p> + +<p>“Sanford and that Englishman will pound me for +the trick,” repeated Ole, as he glanced at the quarter-deck, +where his victims were considering the situation.</p> + +<p>“No, they won’t; we are able and willing to protect +you,” replied Burchmore. “Come, we will go +aft, and hear what they have to say.”</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_204" id="Page_204">[Pg 204]</a></span> +The cashier led the way, and the waif reluctantly +followed him.</p> + +<p>“I believe you wanted to see Ole,” said Burchmore, +who could hardly look sober, he was so pleased with +the result of his operations.</p> + +<p>“Yes; I did wish to see him,” answered Sanford, +rather coldly. “I will see him some other time.”</p> + +<p>“O, I thought you wanted him now,” laughed +Burchmore. “I am satisfied that this is really Christiania +Fjord.”</p> + +<p>“So am I,” added the coxswain, with a sickly +smile.</p> + +<p>“And you were quite right, too, in saying that large +place was Drammen,” chuckled Burchmore.</p> + +<p>“Certainly I was.”</p> + +<p>“Neither were you mistaken in regard to Kongsberg.”</p> + +<p>“I find that I was not.”</p> + +<p>“I suppose you remember the Irishman’s turtle, +that swallowed his own head, Sanford?”</p> + +<p>“Of course.”</p> + +<p>“I don’t mean to say that you swallowed your own +head; but you found it just where you didn’t expect +to find it. Isn’t that so?”</p> + +<p>“We are going to talk the matter over with Ole +by and by.”</p> + +<p>“Do it now. I know all about it. You and Ole +arranged the first part of our journey, including the +day’s fishing we had at Apalstö; and Ole and I arranged +the last part of it. It is an even thing now, +and if you won’t complain of the last part, I won’t +say a word about the first.”</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_205" id="Page_205">[Pg 205]</a></span> +“I don’t understand it.”</p> + +<p>“Don’t you! Well, you gave Ole a sovereign to +arrange things for you in the beginning, and I gave +him five species to arrange them for me afterwards. +You can’t complain of a fellow, who sells himself at +all, for making as much money as he can. Ole only +did that.”</p> + +<p>“He sold us out,” growled Sanford.</p> + +<p>“Of course he did; if you buy a man, you mustn’t +grumble when he does a second time what you encouraged +him to do in the first instance. But you +were going to take us off to the Rjukanfos, fifty or +sixty miles out of our way, without our knowledge or +consent. I smelt a mice, and turned the tables,” +laughed the cashier.</p> + +<p>“Yes, and you cheated me,” interposed Clyde.</p> + +<p>“I had nothing whatever to do with you,” answered +Burchmore, mildly.</p> + +<p>“You led me here when I wanted to go another +way.”</p> + +<p>“You went where you pleased, so far as I was concerned. +I never invited you to come with me, or even +consented to your doing so.”</p> + +<p>“Did you say the place we came to yesterday was +Kongsberg?”</p> + +<p>“I did, and so it was. But I think it was Sanford +who first proclaimed the fact, and I cheerfully assented +to its correctness,” chuckled Burchmore.</p> + +<p>“But you deceived me, and I’ll have it out with +you,” continued Clyde.</p> + +<p>“Just as you please about that; but you had better +let that black eye bleach out before you begin again.”</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_206" id="Page_206">[Pg 206]</a></span> +“I can whip you!” blustered Clyde. “I’ll meet you anywhere.”</p> + +<p>“No, I thank you. If we meet for any such purpose +as you suggest, it will be by accident.”</p> + +<p>“See here, Great Britain; you needn’t make another +row,” said Sanford.</p> + +<p>“I’m going to whip this fellow for what he has +done, and for calling me a bully.”</p> + +<p>“You are a bully,” added Sanford.</p> + +<p>“That’s so,” exclaimed Stockwell.</p> + +<p>“Now you can lick the whole of us, if you insist +upon it,” continued the coxswain.</p> + +<p>“Perhaps I will,” retorted Clyde, shaking his head +fiercely. “You have got me into a pretty scrape.”</p> + +<p>“You are in the same boat as the rest of us.”</p> + +<p>“The squadron isn’t here,” shouted Wilde; for the +steamer had by this time arrived within sight of the +harbor.</p> + +<p>“Can the ship have sailed?” asked Sanford, after +the party had satisfied themselves that not one of the +vessels of the little fleet was there.</p> + +<p>“I suppose she has,” replied Burchmore. “To-day +is Friday, and she didn’t intend to lie here all +summer.”</p> + +<p>“Good!” exclaimed Clyde. “That makes everything +all right for me. I’m satisfied now.”</p> + +<p>Indeed, he was so delighted with the discovery that +the ship had sailed, as to be even willing to forego the +pleasure of thrashing his companions. The steamer +went up to the wharf, and the party landed. Sanford +and his friends appeared to be willing to take a reasonable +view of the situation, and to accept it without +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_207" id="Page_207">[Pg 207]</a></span> +grumbling, satisfied that they had been beaten with +their own weapons. They were not sorry that the +squadron had departed, for this circumstance gave +them a new respite from the discipline of the ship, +and enabled them to prolong “the trip without running +away.”</p> + +<p>“What are you going to do now?” asked Clyde, +as they landed.</p> + +<p>“We shall follow the ship, and try to join her,” +replied Sanford. “That’s what we’ve been trying to +do ever since we left Christiansand—isn’t it, Burchmore?”</p> + +<p>“Certainly it is,” replied the cashier; “though we +were detained one day at Apalstö, and narrowly +escaped being carried by accident to the Rjukanfos.”</p> + +<p>“Are you going to blow upon us, Burch?” demanded +Stockwell, warmly.</p> + +<p>“Am I? Did you ever know me to do such a +thing?” added Burchmore, earnestly.</p> + +<p>“No! no!” replied the whole party.</p> + +<p>“I don’t think it was just the thing to cheat some +of us as you did; but I believe we are about even on +that now.”</p> + +<p>“Of course we all want to get back to the ship as +soon as possible,” added Sanford, rubbing his chin, +significantly.</p> + +<p>“Certainly. She has gone to Gottenburg, and all +we have to do is to follow her,” said Churchill.</p> + +<p>“But if you want to go there by the way of the +Cape of Good Hope, Sanford, it will be better to have +the matter understood so in the beginning,” added +Burchmore. “I, for one, don’t like to be bamboozled.”</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_208" id="Page_208">[Pg 208]</a></span> +“I won’t try it on again,” said Sanford.</p> + +<p>“All right, then; if you do, you may fetch up at +Cape Horn.”</p> + +<p>“Where shall we go now?” asked Sanford.</p> + +<p>“To the Victoria Hotel. It is the best in the +place,” replied Clyde.</p> + +<p>“That’s the very reason why we don’t want to go +there. We are not made of money, and we may run +out before we are able, with our utmost exertions, to +reach the ship,” added the cashier.</p> + +<p>“But my mother is there,” continued Clyde.</p> + +<p>“Go to your mother, Great Britain, if you like. +We shall stay at some cheap hotel,” added Sanford.</p> + +<p>Clyde protested in vain against this arrangement, +and the Americans, with the aid of Ole, found a small +hotel, suited to their views of economy. The Briton +went with them; but when they were installed in their +new quarters, he left them to find his mother, at the +Victoria. After dinner, the coxswain and his party +wandered all over the city. At the Castle of Agerhaus, +they saw an English steamer receiving freight. +They ascertained that she was bound to Gottenburg, +and would sail at seven o’clock that evening. They +immediately decided, as they had seen enough of +Christiania, to take passage in her. The arrangement +was speedily made, and they went on board, without +troubling themselves to inform Clyde of what they +intended to do. When the sun went down that evening +the party were far down the fjord.</p> + +<p>Sanford had ascertained that the ship sailed early on +Thursday morning, and the steamer on which they +had taken passage could not arrive at Gottenburg till +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_209" id="Page_209">[Pg 209]</a></span> +nearly noon on Saturday. It was understood that the +squadron would remain but a short time at this port, +and it was possible that it would have departed for +Copenhagen before the steamer arrived. He hoped +this would prove to be the case; but he studied a plan +by which the excursion of the party could be prolonged, +if the hope should not be realized. He did +not wish to return to the ship, because he thought it +was pleasanter to travel without the restraints of discipline. +Perhaps most of his party sympathized with +him, and thought they could have a better time by +themselves. Sanford desired to inform Clyde of the +intention of the party to leave in the English steamer, +and to take him along with them; but his companions +overruled him unanimously, for they were too glad to +get rid of an impudent, overbearing, and conceited +puppy, as he had proved himself to be. The coxswain +had no better opinion of him than his friends; +but as Clyde was a runaway, according to his own +confession, it might smooth their own way, in returning +to their duty, if they could deliver him up to the +principal. He was even willing to resort to strategy +to accomplish this end; but Clyde was so disagreeable +that he was saved from this trap.</p> + +<p>The ship had gone, and every vessel of the squadron +had departed with her. Clyde felt that all his +trials were ended, and he had nothing more to fear +from the big boatswain. He walked confidently to +the Victoria Hotel, where he was sure to find his +mother. He had even arranged in his mind the reproaches +with which he intended to greet her for delivering +him over to the savage discipline of the Young +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_210" id="Page_210">[Pg 210]</a></span> +America, as he regarded it, and as, doubtless, it was for +evil-doers. He passed into the passage-way which led +to the court-yard. As he entered the office on the +right to inquire for Mrs. Blacklock, he encountered +Peaks, who no sooner saw him than he laid violent +hands upon him.</p> + +<p>“Let me alone!” shouted Clyde, struggling to escape +from the grasp of his powerful antagonist.</p> + +<p>“Not yet, my beauty,” replied the boatswain, as he +dragged his victim into his own room, which was near +the office. “I’ve been looking for you.”</p> + +<p>“I want to see my mother,” growled Clyde, when +he had exhausted his strength in the fruitless struggle +to escape.</p> + +<p>“I dare say you do; babies always want to see their +mothers.”</p> + +<p>“I’m not a baby.”</p> + +<p>“Then behave like a man.”</p> + +<p>Peaks deposited him on a chair, and permitted him +to recover his breath.</p> + +<p>“Where is my mother?” demanded Clyde.</p> + +<p>“She is safe and well, and you needn’t bother your +head to know anything more about her,” answered +Peaks. “She has turned over a new leaf, so far as +you are concerned, youngster, and is going to have us +make a man of you.”</p> + +<p>“Where is she?”</p> + +<p>“No matter where she is.”</p> + +<p>“Can’t I see her?”</p> + +<p>“No, sir.”</p> + +<p>“I must see her.”</p> + +<p>“Perhaps you must, my hearty; but I don’t think +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_211" id="Page_211">[Pg 211]</a></span> +she wants to see you till you are a decent young gentleman. +She told me to be sure and put you on board +of the ship, and I’m going to do it.”</p> + +<p>“Where is the ship?”</p> + +<p>“She sailed for Gottenburg yesterday morning; but +we shall find her in good time,” replied Peaks, taking +a bundle from the bureau, which contained the young +Briton’s uniform. “Now, my bantam, you don’t look +like a gentleman in that rig you’ve got on. Here’s +your gear; put it on, and look like a man again, +whether you are one or not. Those long togs don’t +become you.”</p> + +<p>The boatswain unfolded the uniform of Clyde, which +he had left in his chamber when he leaped out of the +window.</p> + +<p>“I’m not going to put on those clothes,” protested +the unhappy youth.</p> + +<p>“No?”</p> + +<p>“I’m not!”</p> + +<p>“Then I’m going to put them on for you.”</p> + +<p>“I’ll cry murder.”</p> + +<p>“If you cry anything, I shall put a dirty handkerchief +in your mouth. Look here, my chicken; don’t +you know that you are making a fool of yourself? You +mean to strain your own timbers for nothing. You’ll +put this rig on anyhow, and it depends on yourself +whether you will do it with or without a broken +head.”</p> + +<p>Clyde looked at the clothes and then at the brawny +boatswain. It was foolish to resist, and he yielded to +the force of circumstances. He put on the ship’s uniform, +and threw himself into a chair to await the further +pleasure of his tyrant.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_212" id="Page_212">[Pg 212]</a></span> +“Now you look like a respectable young gentleman, +my lad,” said Peaks.</p> + +<p>“What are you going to do with me?” demanded +Clyde, in a surly tone.</p> + +<p>“I’m going to keep my eye on you every moment +of the time till you are on board of the ship again.”</p> + +<p>“I want to see my mother before I go.”</p> + +<p>“It can’t be done.”</p> + +<p>Clyde relapsed into silence. He had never before +been subjected to such unheard-of tyranny. It was +useless to resist, and the future looked as dark as the +present. Probably his mother was in the hotel, but +he was not permitted even to see her. Though the +boatswain seemed to have it all his own way, he was +not at all satisfied with the situation. Mrs. Blacklock +and her daughter had gone to ride, but in the course +of an hour or two they would return. The waiters +would inform her that Clyde had arrived, and she +would insist on seeing him. Though she had fully +given up the control of him to the ship, the weakness +of the mother might induce her to change her mind. +Peaks only desired to discharge the duty with which +he had been intrusted. The crew of the second cutter +had not yet arrived, and he could not depart with his +prisoner before they came. He was perplexed; but +being a man of expedients, he decided upon his course +in a short time. It was absolutely necessary to seek +another hotel, where the dangerous proximity of Mrs. +Blacklock might be avoided. The boatswain rang +his bell, and sent for the <em>commissionnaire</em> whom he +had employed while prosecuting his search for the +runaway. When this man came, he ordered a carriage, +and paid his bill.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_213" id="Page_213">[Pg 213]</a></span> +“Now, youngster, we are going to take a ride,” +said Peaks to his victim.</p> + +<p>“Where are you going?”</p> + +<p>“That’s my affair. If you make a row in the street, +I shall just hand you over to the police, who will lock +you up in that stone castle over there. You must understand +that you are a deserter from your ship, and +will be treated so, if you don’t behave like a man. +Now come with me.”</p> + +<p>As a deserter from his ship! The boatswain certainly +had the weather-gage of him, and the idea of +being thrown into prison was absolutely startling to +Clyde. He had no doubt the savage boatswain would +do all he threatened, and, almost for the first time in +his life, he felt no inclination to bully. He stepped +quietly into the carriage with Peaks and the <em>commissionnaire</em>. +The driver was directed to convey the party +to the landing-place. The steamer would sail the next +morning; but unless the absent crew of the cutter arrived +before that time, he could not go in her. Remaining +in Christiania, he feared to encounter Mrs. +Blacklock, for the honest tar dreaded a lady’s power +more than the whole battery of a ship of the line. He +was fully resolved, if he passed through fire and water +in doing it, to discharge the duty intrusted to him by +the principal. The lady was in the city, and the problem +was to keep his charge out of sight of her during +the rest of his stay. He might meet her; some one at +the hotel might, and probably would, inform her of the +arrival of Clyde.</p> + +<p>After deliberating for some time, he directed his +<em>commissionnaire</em> to procure a boat, in which he embarked +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_214" id="Page_214">[Pg 214]</a></span> +with his prisoner and interpreter. By his order +the two oarsmen pulled over to the hotel which +was located so picturesquely on the island. Taking a +room, he ordered dinner for his little party, and contrived +to pass away the afternoon till sunset, when he +returned to the city. His man, at his request, conducted +him to an obscure hotel, which happened to +be the one which Sanford and his friends had just +left, to depart by the English steamer. The landlord +recognized the uniform which Clyde wore.</p> + +<p>“We had more of the young gentleman here,” said +he, in broken English.</p> + +<p>“More of them!” exclaimed Peaks, interested in +the intelligence.</p> + +<p>“Yes; more as ten of them,” added the landlord.</p> + +<p>“Arn’t they here now?” asked Clyde, who had felt +a ray of hope when Peaks brought him to the hotel +where he had left his late companions.</p> + +<p>“All gone; no more here.”</p> + +<p>“Where have they gone?” asked the boatswain.</p> + +<p>“To Gottenburg. They eat some dinner in my +hotel, and at seven o’clock they go in the steamer.”</p> + +<p>“I saw that steamer go out, but I didn’t think the +cutter’s crew were in her. I’m sorry I didn’t know it +before,” said Peaks, chagrined by this tardy discovery. +“How many were there of them?”</p> + +<p>“Ten.”</p> + +<p>“That couldn’t be; there were only nine of the +crew.”</p> + +<p>“There was more as ten, but one of them went +away.”</p> + +<p>“I went away,” said Clyde.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_215" id="Page_215">[Pg 215]</a></span> +“You! Were you with them?” demanded Peaks.</p> + +<p>“I was.”</p> + +<p>“Why didn’t you say so before?”</p> + +<p>“You didn’t ask me; and as you were not remarkably +civil to me, I didn’t feel obliged to tell you the +news.”</p> + +<p>“But there were not ten of them.”</p> + +<p>“Yes, ten,” said Clyde.</p> + +<p>“There were only nine when they left the ship.”</p> + +<p>“I know there were ten with me. One of them +was a Norwegian, and a rascal; but he wore the same +uniform as the rest of them.”</p> + +<p>“What was his name?”</p> + +<p>“Ole.”</p> + +<p>“Ole! Why, he’s the fellow we picked up out at +sea,” exclaimed the astonished boatswain. “Where +have they been all this time?”</p> + +<p>But Clyde suddenly bethought himself that he was +altogether too communicative, considering the relations +that subsisted between himself and his great +enemy and persecutor, and he decided to answer no +more questions.</p> + +<p>“All right, my hearty,” laughed the boatswain, +when the Briton declined to answer. “They are on +their way to the ship, and you will be very soon.”</p> + +<p>Peaks was cunning enough to detain his interpreter +so that he should not return to the Victoria and inform +Mrs. Blacklock where her son was. The way +was clear now, for he had no further responsibility in +regard to the cutter’s crew, and his spirits rose accordingly. +He sent his man to engage a “hütte,” or state-room, +in the steamer, and then, at a late hour in the +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_216" id="Page_216">[Pg 216]</a></span> +evening, paid and discharged him. He compelled +Clyde to sleep in the same chamber with him, for it +contained three beds, and it is probable that the boatswain +kept one eye open during the night, for every +time the prisoner moved, his tyrant was on his feet. +The Kronprindsesse Louise sailed at six o’clock in the +morning, and Peaks and his victim were betimes on +board. The boatswain was a happy man when the +boat was clear of the wharf, and on her way to Gottenburg. +He flattered himself that he had managed +the affair very well indeed, for he was not above the +vanities of the flesh.</p> + +<p>It was midnight when the Kronprindsesse arrived +at her destination. Peaks had kept one eye on Clyde +all the time, and brought him in safety to his journey’s +end. Late as was the hour, the first person he saw at +the landing was Mr. Blaine, the chief steward of the +ship.</p> + +<p>“I’m glad to see you, Blaine,” shouted the boatswain +when he identified his shipmate, and grasped his hand. +“Shiver my timbers if I’m not rejoiced to see a man +that speaks plain English! Where’s the ship?”</p> + +<p>“She sailed for Copenhagen this evening.”</p> + +<p>“No; you don’t say so!”</p> + +<p>“It’s a fact. The students went up the canal as far +as the falls, and returned about dark. The squadron +got under way at once. I suppose you have the cutter’s +crew with you, Peaks?”</p> + +<p>“No; arn’t they on board yet?”</p> + +<p>“I haven’t seen them.”</p> + +<p>“But they came down on an English steamer that +left Christiania last night.”</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_217" id="Page_217">[Pg 217]</a></span> +“An English steamer came in this forenoon, but we +haven’t seen the cutter’s crew.”</p> + +<p>“That’s strange. I shouldn’t wonder if those fellows +were cutting up a little.”</p> + +<p>“But we lost two students yesterday, Scott and Laybold. +I suppose they ran away.”</p> + +<p>“There’s a screw loose somewhere. These boys +have too much money,” added Peaks. “But what are +you going to do, and what am I to do?”</p> + +<p>“I was left here to look out for Scott and Laybold, +and meet you when you came. Now, it seems that +about a dozen of the rascals are missing.”</p> + +<p>“I have the Briton here.”</p> + +<p>“If I were you, Peaks, I should go right on to Copenhagen +in this steamer, and you can report the facts +to the principal.”</p> + +<p>The boatswain decided to do this, while the head +steward remained to search for the absentees; and in +due time Peaks delivered his prisoner on board of the +ship in the harbor of Copenhagen.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_218" id="Page_218">[Pg 218]</a></span></p> +<h2>CHAPTER XIII.</h2> + +<p class="center"><strong>THE MEETING OF THE ABSENTEES.</strong></p> + + +<p>Scott and Laybold, after imbibing a single glass +of “finkel” each, which proved to be more +than they could carry, retreated into a narrow lane, to +escape the observation of a party of officers who were +on their way to the landing. Neither of them had +any inclination for intoxicating drinks, and had taken +the stuff without knowing what it was. But they were +conscious that everything was not right with them. +They found it quite impossible to walk in a straight +line, and even the problem of standing up was not +demonstrated to the entire satisfaction of either of +them. Talking was not without its difficulties, for +their tongues seemed to be double their ordinary thickness, +and their lips and other organs of speech were +not as manageable as usual. For a time the effects +of the potent liquor increased upon them, and as they +had taken it in a hungry condition, they realized its +full power.</p> + +<p>They staggered up the lane, conscious that they were +making a ridiculous figure, though the solemn Swedes +hardly smiled as they observed the effects of the national +beverage. They dreaded an encounter with any +of the officers, or others connected with the squadron; +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_219" id="Page_219">[Pg 219]</a></span> +but in this unfrequented lane they were not likely to +meet any of their shipmates. As there is more power +in four legs than in two, however weak in detail they +may be, the tipsy students locked arms, and leaned on +each other, one attempting to counteract the obliquities +of the other. They wandered along without knowing +whither they were going, till they came to a small +public house, which had a bench in front of it for the +accommodation of the topers who frequented the bar-room. +By mutual consent, and without argument, +the unfortunate couple aimed for this seat as soon as +they saw it, for it promised a grateful respite from the +perils of locomotion. The “finkel” was now doing +its utmost upon them. Their heads were dizzy, and +everything was wofully uncertain; still they knew what +they were about, and had sense enough left to dread +the consequences of their indiscretion. After they had +seated themselves, they glanced at each other, as if +to ascertain the condition one of the other.</p> + +<p>“Lay—bold,” said Scott.</p> + +<p>“Well, old fellow,” replied the other, with a desperate +attempt to stiffen his muscles.</p> + +<p>“We’re zrunk,” added Scott, trying to laugh.</p> + +<p>“I know that.”</p> + +<p>“We’re very zrunk.”</p> + +<p>“I’m not zbad zyou.”</p> + +<p>“I don’t zknow.”</p> + +<p>The conversation extended no further then, for +speech required an effort they were incapable of +making. Scott gaped violently, and seemed to be +sick; but his contortions ended in his falling asleep, +with his head tipped back against the wall. Laybold, +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_220" id="Page_220">[Pg 220]</a></span> +more nice in the disposition of his helpless body, +stretched himself on the bench, and was soon lost to +all consciousness of the outer world. The publican +who kept the house came out and looked at the juvenile +tipplers. Doubtless he had seen too many drunken +sailors to misapprehend their condition. He understood +the matter perfectly, and being a thrifty Swede, he +was disposed to turn their condition to his own emolument. +He had sundry vacant chambers in his hotel, +whose revenues swelled the sum total of his annual +profits, and it hurt his feelings to have them remain +unoccupied. Besides, the air was chilly, and the +young strangers might take cold, and contract a severe +illness by such exposure. But whether he was a publican +or a Samaritan in his intentions, he decided to +remove the strangers to the rooms beneath his hospitable +roof. Summoning the porter to his aid, they +jointly bore Laybold to his apartment, and laid him on +the bed, which, in spite of the low character of the +house, was a model of Swedish neatness. When +Scott’s turn came, he offered some resistance to the +good intentions of the publican; but his head was too +thoroughly muddled for successful opposition. Between +the effects of sleep and “finkel” he could not +obtain a very clear idea of what was going on. He +was placed on another bed in the room with his shipmate. +They were both comfortably disposed on their +clean couches, the pillows nicely adjusted beneath +their heads, and their bodies covered with blankets.</p> + +<p>The two students were very tired as well as very +tipsy, and their slumbers were deep and heavy. It +was after nine o’clock, though it was still light in the +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_221" id="Page_221">[Pg 221]</a></span> +chamber, and the young tars usually retired, when not +on watch, before this seemly hour. “Finkel” and +fatigue did the rest, and they slept, without rocking, +till long after the early sun broke into the windows of +their apartment. We have seen the effect of “finkel” +upon one unaccustomed to the use of liquor, and upon +boys of fifteen or sixteen it could not but be entirely +overpowering. It is a dangerous fluid, and is taken +by the Swedes at all times, being the first thing at +meals, and especially at the inevitable “snack” that +precedes a regular dinner. There is, doubtless, good +ground for the fear which has been expressed that the +people of Sweden are in danger of becoming “a +nation of drunkards.”</p> + +<p>Scott was the first to open his eyes and come to +his senses. He raised himself in the bed, shook off +the blanket, and then jumped out upon the floor. He +did not comprehend the situation, and was unable, in +his own words, to “figure up how he happened to be +in that room.”</p> + +<p>“Laybold, ahoy!” shouted he, after he had examined +the apartment, and mentally confessed his +inability to solve the problem. “Laybold! All hands +on deck!”</p> + +<p>“What is the matter?” cried Laybold, springing +up, only half awake.</p> + +<p>“I’ll be muzzled if I know what the matter is, but I +believe that the Norway god—what’s his name?—Odin, +came aboard the ship last night, and turned her +into a country tavern,” replied Scott, going to the +window, and looking down into the lane below.</p> + +<p>“How came we here?” asked Laybold, rubbing +his eyes.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_222" id="Page_222">[Pg 222]</a></span> +“That’s more than I know; but I think we have +been transplanted by the spirits.”</p> + +<p>“The spirits?” gaped Laybold.</p> + +<p>“Yes; I believe they call them ‘finkel.’ We were +tight last night, my boy.”</p> + +<p>“I remember all about it now. I dreamed that +somebody lugged me in here.”</p> + +<p>“You didn’t exactly dream it, for here we are. +We are in a pretty scrape.”</p> + +<p>“That’s so,” added Laybold, shaking his head. +“We didn’t mean to run away, but that’s just what +we have done.”</p> + +<p>“We didn’t run a great way; for, if I remember +rightly, running wasn’t our <em>forte</em> last evening. Who +runs may reel, if he can’t read, and I reckon we did +more reeling than running. But what’s to be done?”</p> + +<p>“I don’t know.”</p> + +<p>“In the first place, where are we? It’s no use to +lay out a course till we know the ship’s position.”</p> + +<p>They were utterly unable to determine this question. +Each of them had a tolerably vivid recollection +of their unfortunate condition on the preceding evening, +and even that he had been carried by a couple of +men; but they had no idea of time or locality. They +washed themselves at the sink in the room, combed +their hair with their pocket-combs, and looked then as +though nothing had happened. Their heads were a +little light, but they did not absolutely ache, and +they realized but a small portion of the after effects of +a regular “spree.” Having made their simple toilet, +they decided to explore the premises, and make their +way back to the ship. Leaving the chamber, they +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_223" id="Page_223">[Pg 223]</a></span> +descended a flight of steps, and, in the hall below, encountered +the Samaritan landlord.</p> + +<p>“<em>God morgon</em>,” said the latter, with a jolly smile +on his face; and it was probable that he had taken his +morning dose of “finkel.” “<em>Hur star det till?</em>” +(How are you?)</p> + +<p>“Nix,” replied Scott, shrugging his shoulders.</p> + +<p>“You are English,” added the landlord, a large +portion of whose customers were foreign sailors.</p> + +<p>“No; Americans.”</p> + +<p>“I’m glad to see you.”</p> + +<p>“I’m glad to see you, too, if you can tell us how +we happen to be here.”</p> + +<p>“Too much ‘finkel,’” laughed the publican, as he +proceeded to explain the situation, and to enlarge upon +the fatherly interest which had induced him to take +them in for the night.</p> + +<p>“All right, my hearty. I see you can keep a hotel,” +added Scott. “How much have we to pay?”</p> + +<p>“Two rigsdalers; but you want some breakfast.”</p> + +<p>“I do, for one,” replied Scott.</p> + +<p>“So do I,” said Laybold. “We only had a little +lunch last night, and that ‘finkel’ spoiled my appetite—or +the fish spawn. I don’t know which.”</p> + +<p>About five o’clock they sat down to breakfast, which +consisted of a great variety of little things, such as +the small fishes, herrings, smoked salmon, sausages. +The coffee was magnificent, as it generally is in +Sweden, even on board of steamers, where, in our +own country, it is least expected to be good.</p> + +<p>“What is this?” said Scott, taking up half a great +brown biscuit.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_224" id="Page_224">[Pg 224]</a></span> +“That’s Swedish bread. We bake it once in six +months,” replied the landlord.</p> + +<p>“Not bad,” added Scott, as he tasted the article.</p> + +<p>“This is Graham bread, I suppose,” said Laybold, +as he took a slice of the coarse brown bread. “Bah! +it’s sour.”</p> + +<p>It always is; and both the students rejected it, +though they ate a hearty meal of white bread, herring, +salmon, and sausage.</p> + +<p>“Now, how much?” asked Scott, when they were +ready to go.</p> + +<p>“One rigsdaler and fifty öre each—three rigsdalers +in all.”</p> + +<p>“Cheap enough,” said Scott. “Two lodgings and +two breakfasts for eighty-one cents.”</p> + +<p>The students walked through the lane in which +they had made their devious way the night before, to +the main street on the canal. At the landing-place +there were no boats belonging to the squadron, and +everything looked exceedingly quiet on board of the +ship. Seating themselves on the pier, with their legs +hanging over the water, they decided to wait till a +boat came to the shore.</p> + +<p>“We shall catch it for this,” said Laybold.</p> + +<p>“No more liberty for a month at least,” said Scott, +shrugging his shoulders after his fashion.</p> + +<p>“I don’t think it’s fair. We didn’t mean to get +drunk, and didn’t know what ‘finkel’ was,” added +Laybold. “I don’t half like to go on board again.”</p> + +<p>“Nor I; but I suppose we must face the music,” +answered Scott, dubiously. “I’m glad we didn’t go +on board while we were boozy. The fellows would +have laughed at us for a year, if we had.”</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_225" id="Page_225">[Pg 225]</a></span> +“That’s so; and Lowington would have put us in +the brig.”</p> + +<p>“I don’t exactly like to explain the reason why we +didn’t go on board last night; I always was a bashful +fellow.”</p> + +<p>“You didn’t go with the others,” said a man, +coming up to them at this moment, and speaking in +broken English.</p> + +<p>“What others? Where?” replied Scott.</p> + +<p>“The other students. They took the steamer up +the canal at two o’clock this morning.”</p> + +<p>“Whew!” whistled Scott. “We have lost Göta +Canal and the falls.”</p> + +<p>“They will return to-night by the railroad from +Wenersberg,” added the man, who was an agent of +the canal steamers.</p> + +<p>“That’s too bad!” exclaimed Laybold, as the man +walked away.</p> + +<p>“I don’t know that it is too bad. Our leave would +have been stopped if we had gone on board,” laughed +Scott, who generally took the most cheerful view of +any disagreeable subject. “Why can’t we go on our +own hook?”</p> + +<p>“I like that idea,” added Laybold.</p> + +<p>But inquiring of the agent, they learned that the +canal steamers left only at two o’clock in the morning.</p> + +<p>“There’s a railroad, or the fellows couldn’t come +back that way,” suggested Laybold.</p> + +<p>“That’s so; you have more wisdom than a Duxbury +clam.”</p> + +<p>They ascertained that a train left Gottenburg at +noon, by which they could reach Wenersberg the same +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_226" id="Page_226">[Pg 226]</a></span> +day. They knew nothing of the plan of the principal, +which included a special train from the canal to +the main line of railway; but they desired to see more +of the interior of Sweden, and they were confident +they should see the excursionists either at Wenersberg +or on the way. It suited them better to make a trip +even for a few hours, than to wander about a city +which they had already exhausted. But they were +obliged to wait some time for the train, and, after a +couple of hours of “heavy loafing” about the streets, +they returned to the pier. An English steamer had +just arrived, and a boat was landing her passengers.</p> + +<p>“Who are those fellows?” said Laybold, pointing +to the steamer’s boat. “They wear the ship’s uniform.”</p> + +<p>“Right; they do, and they came from that steamer,” +replied Scott.</p> + +<p>“There’s Sanford! I should know him a mile off. +They are the second cutters, or I am a Dutchman.”</p> + +<p>“Right again,” added Scott, as the passengers +landed.</p> + +<p>The steamer was the one in which Sanford and his +companions had taken passage at Christiania the evening +before. The absentees, “on a cruise without +running away,” were sorry to see the ship at anchor +in the harbor, for some of them had hoped to be too +late for her. When they landed, the first persons they +encountered were Scott and Laybold, who gave them +a very cordial greeting. Each party had a story to +tell of its own adventures, and Scott knew Sanford +and his associates too well to think it necessary to +conceal from them the fact that he and Laybold had +been the sad victims of “finkel.”</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_227" id="Page_227">[Pg 227]</a></span> +“But why don’t you go on board?” asked Burchmore.</p> + +<p>“What’s the use? All the fellows have gone up to +Wobblewopkins, or some other place, to see the falls, +and take an inside view of Sweden,” replied Scott. +“We intend to go and do likewise.”</p> + +<p>“Won’t you go with us?” added Laybold.</p> + +<p>The intentions of the two were explained to the +others, and they all decided to join the party. Sanford +was not without a hope that something would +occur to prolong the “independent trip without running +away.”</p> + +<p>“How are you off for stamps?” asked Burchmore +of the two who were by this arrangement added to +his party, for which he had thus far done the financiering.</p> + +<p>“We have a little Swedish money, and some sovereigns,” +replied Scott.</p> + +<p>“But how many sovereigns? We may be prevented +from joining the ship for a few days, and we +want to know where we are in money matters,” interposed +Sanford.</p> + +<p>“We have enough to buy out one or two of these +one-horse kingdoms, like Denmark and Sweden. I +have twenty sovereigns, and Laybold has about a +thousand,” answered Scott.</p> + +<p>“No I haven’t,” protested Laybold, laughing at the +extravagance of his friend. “I have only twenty-five +sovereigns.”</p> + +<p>“And a letter of credit for a thousand more; so it’s +the same thing.”</p> + +<p>“No, no; knock off one cipher, Scott.”</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_228" id="Page_228">[Pg 228]</a></span> +“Well, seeing it’s you, I’ll knock off just one; but +not another to please any fellow, even if he were my +grandmother’s first cousin,” added Scott.</p> + +<p>“There’s some difference between a hundred and a +thousand pounds,” suggested Sanford.</p> + +<p>“A slight difference,” said Laybold.</p> + +<p>“I don’t expect any of us will live long enough to +spend a hundred pounds in this country, which is +about eighteen hundred of these tricks-bunker dollars, +to say nothing of a thousand. Why, we paid only +three bunkers for two lodgings and two breakfasts. +How’s a fellow ever to spend eighteen hundred bunkers? +For my part, I think I’m lucky in having less +than four hundred of the things to get rid of.”</p> + +<p>“But you needn’t feel under the necessity of spending +all your money in this country,” laughed the +cashier.</p> + +<p>“My father promised to send me some more; but I +hope he won’t do it till I get out of Sweden. If he +does I shall be ruined. Here’s poor Laybold, with a +letter of credit for a hundred pounds, besides twenty-five +in cash. I pity the poor fellow. It wouldn’t be +so bad in London, where it costs a fellow from ten to +twenty shillings a day to breathe.”</p> + +<p>“I think I shall be able to survive,” added Laybold.</p> + +<p>“I hope so; but you ought to hear him talk about +his bankers. Topsails and topping-lifts! His bankers! +Messrs. Pitchers Brothers & Co.”</p> + +<p>“No! Bowles Brothers & Co,” interposed Laybold.</p> + +<p>“It’s all the same thing; there isn’t much difference +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_229" id="Page_229">[Pg 229]</a></span> +between bowls and pitchers. One breaks as easy as +the other.”</p> + +<p>“But my bankers don’t break.”</p> + +<p>“His bankers! Do you hear that? Well, I don’t +believe they’ll break, for all my folks, when they travel +in Europe, carry the same letter of credit in their trousers +pocket. I had to write to my paternal parent all +last year, care of Bowles Brothers & Co., 449 Strand, +Charing Cross, W. C. London, England. You see +I’ve learned my lesson.”</p> + +<p>“My letters from home come through the same +house,” said Laybold, “and so do those of fifty other +fellows.”</p> + +<p>“About the money matters,” interposed Burchmore. +“Shall I act for the crowd, as I did in Norway?”</p> + +<p>“For me, yes; and I hope you’ll help Laybold out +on the big financial job he has on his hands,” said +Scott.</p> + +<p>“All right,” added Laybold.</p> + +<p>“I have settled up for the fellows on the Norway +trip. Now, each of you give me a couple of sovereigns, +which I will change into Swedish money.”</p> + +<p>This arrangement was made to the satisfaction of +all, and the cashier went to an exchange office, where +he procured Swedish paper for the gold.</p> + +<p>“Scott, I shouldn’t wonder if the principal saved +you the trouble of spending your twenty pounds before +we go much farther,” said Sanford.</p> + +<p>“I shall thank him with tears in my eyes if he +does,” replied Scott, with a solemn look.</p> + +<p>“I don’t believe you will. When the ship came +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_230" id="Page_230">[Pg 230]</a></span> +over before, every fellow had to give up his money, +and the purser doled it out to the fellows in shillings +or sixpences when they went ashore.”</p> + +<p>“I’m sure it was very kind of him to take so much +trouble.”</p> + +<p>“You don’t think so.”</p> + +<p>“Of course I do. Only think of poor Laybold, +with a letter of credit for a hundred pounds on his +hands! I’m thankful I haven’t the responsibility of +spending so much money on my conscience. I should +apply for admission to the first lunatic asylum, if I had +to spend so much.”</p> + +<p>“Nonsense! I made up my mind not to give up +my money,” said the coxswain. “That rule made +plenty of rows on the other cruise, and I expect the +fellows on this cruise will be called upon to give up +their stamps very soon.”</p> + +<p>“I was going to say we could get even with the +principal by spending it all before we go on board +again; but we are in Sweden, and it is quite impossible. +They won’t let you pay more than seventy-five +cents or a dollar for a day’s board in this country.”</p> + +<p>“You went to a sailor’s boarding-house, Scott. +When you are at a first-class hotel, you will find that +they bleed you enough.”</p> + +<p>“I hope they do better than the landlord where we +staid last night; if they don’t I shall make money in +Sweden. Why, they wouldn’t even pick our pockets +when we were boozy on ‘finkel.’ I’m sure they are a +great deal more accommodating at sailors’ boarding-houses +in Boston and New York.”</p> + +<p>“Come, be serious, Scott. Shall you give up your +money when you return to the ship?”</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_231" id="Page_231">[Pg 231]</a></span> +“Cheerfully, for there is no chance to get rid of it +in this country.”</p> + +<p>“But you will want some in Russia, where everything +is dear.”</p> + +<p>“I’m afraid my letter of credit will arrive by that +time, and I shall be burdened with new trials.”</p> + +<p>“Poor fellow!”</p> + +<p>The old rule of the ship had not been enforced on +the present cruise, and the principal did not intend to +renew it until it was absolutely necessary. It had +caused much complaint among the wealthy parents +of the former students, while it had wonderfully improved +the discipline; but Mr. Lowington consented +to make the experiment of permitting every boy to +manage his own finances.</p> + +<p>At noon the party took their places in a second-class +compartment of the carriage on the railway, and +started for Wenersberg. Ole spoke Swedish as well +as Norwegian, and acted as interpreter. Sanford +had made peace with the waif, who was now as popular +as ever with all the party. Each of them, in +turn, had tried to induce Ole to tell how he happened +to be in that boat at sea; but he still refused to explain.</p> + +<p>The train moved off, and the tourists observed the +country through which it passed; but Scott could not +help grumbling because the fare was only about a dollar +and a quarter for fifty miles, declaring that he +should never be able to get rid of his twenty sovereigns +at this rate, and that he was threatened with a +letter of credit for a hundred more at St. Petersburg. +At Herrljunga, the junction of the branch to Wenersberg +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_232" id="Page_232">[Pg 232]</a></span> +and the main line, the guard insisted that the +tourists should leave the carriage.</p> + +<p>“How’s this, Ole?” asked Sanford.</p> + +<p>“Change for Wenersberg; but the train don’t start +till five o’clock. We must wait two hours.”</p> + +<p>“But what time does it get to Wenersberg?”</p> + +<p>“About half past eight.”</p> + +<p>“That’s a pretty go!” exclaimed the coxswain. +“You made a beautiful arrangement for this trip, +Scott.”</p> + +<p>“What’s the matter now?”</p> + +<p>“We cannot get to Wenersberg till half past eight; +and of course that will be too late to join the ship’s +company there.”</p> + +<p>“It isn’t necessary to join them there. We shall +meet them on the way, and go back with them. They +will be at this place some time this afternoon.”</p> + +<p>“What did we come up here for?” asked Sanford.</p> + +<p>“In the first place, to get rid of four or five rix-bunkers; +and in the second, to see something of this part +of Sweden. We have done both, and ought to be +satisfied.”</p> + +<p>“O, I’m satisfied!”</p> + +<p>“You ought to be; you have four and a half bunkers +less to spend. We will loaf about this place till +the principal comes with the crowd, and when he sees +what good boys we have been to look him up, and +see that he didn’t get lost, he’ll forgive Laybold and +me for drinking ‘finkel.’”</p> + +<p>“All right. What time does the train leave for +Gottenburg, Ole?” added the coxswain, turning to the +interpreter.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_233" id="Page_233">[Pg 233]</a></span> +“Half past five,” replied the waif.</p> + +<p>No one took the trouble to examine the time-table +in the station-house, which, though in Swedish, was +perfectly intelligible so far as it related to hours and +towns.</p> + +<p>The tourists decided to improve the time they were +obliged to wait by taking a walk about the country, +examining Swedish houses and investigating Swedish +agriculture. Doubtless this was a very interesting +amusement; but at quarter past five, the party returned +to the station. A long train was just departing +in the direction of Gottenburg.</p> + +<p>“What train’s that?” demanded Sanford.</p> + +<p>“I don’t know,” replied Ole, with a look of alarm.</p> + +<p>“Inquire, then,” added the excited coxswain.</p> + +<p>The party hastened into the little station. It was +the regular train for Gottenburg.</p> + +<p>“But how’s that?” cried Sanford. “You said it +left at half past five.”</p> + +<p>“Yes; I looked at the time-table in Gottenburg, +and it said half past five,” replied Ole. “Here is one, +and I will look again.”</p> + +<p>“Better wait till morning before you look again,” +said Scott.</p> + +<p>“Here it is; five—”</p> + +<p>“That’s all, Norway.”</p> + +<p>“I’m sure it was half past five in Gottenburg,” +pleaded Ole, whom the coxswain had privately requested +to make this blunder.</p> + +<p>“What sort of chowder do you call this, son of +Odin?” demanded Scott.</p> + +<p>“He has made a blunder; that’s all,” laughed Burchmore, +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_234" id="Page_234">[Pg 234]</a></span> +who, though not in the confidence of the coxswain, +at once suspected the trick, and, to tell the +truth, was not sorry for the mistake.</p> + +<p>The mishap was discussed for an hour, and poor +Ole was severely blamed, especially by Sanford, for +his carelessness; but he bore the censure with becoming +meekness.</p> + +<p>“What’s to be done?” inquired Scott, at last.</p> + +<p>“Here’s another train at 8.56,” replied Ole, pointing +to the time-table. “We can return to Gottenburg +in that.”</p> + +<p>“Right, Norway,” added Scott.</p> + +<p>They found a small hotel in the place, where they +obtained a supper, and at the time indicated returned +to Gottenburg, where they arrived at about one in the +morning. It was too late to go on board of the ship, +and they went directly to the little hotel in the lane, +where Scott and Laybold had passed the preceding +night. It was closed, but they easily roused the landlord.</p> + +<p>“So you have again come,” said the good-natured +host.</p> + +<p>“Yes; we have again come. It is too late to go on +board of the ship,” replied Scott.</p> + +<p>“Your ship have sail to-night to Copenhagen.”</p> + +<p>“No! Impossible!”</p> + +<p>“I have seen her sail,” persisted the landlord. “I +have make no mistake.”</p> + +<p>“We are dished!” exclaimed Sanford.</p> + +<p>“The young gentleman come down at seven o’clock, +and the ship have sail at nine o’clock. I know it so +well as I know how to speak the English.”</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_235" id="Page_235">[Pg 235]</a></span> +“It must be so, then,” laughed Scott; “for you +have spoke the English more better as nice.”</p> + +<p>“What shall we do?” continued Sanford, who +seemed to be positively distressed at the unfortunate +circumstance.</p> + +<p>“Do? Go to bed, and go to sleep. What else can +we do? You are too big a boy to cry over your misfortunes,” +replied Scott.</p> + +<p>“I don’t intend to cry; but I feel very bad about it.”</p> + +<p>“Dry your tears,” said Burchmore. “We may +as well take a biscuit, turn in, and call it half a +day.”</p> + +<p>“But when will there be a steamer to Copenhagen?” +asked Sanford.</p> + +<p>“The Najaden must go Monday afternoon,” answered +the landlord, who, for some reason best known +to himself, did not deem it prudent to mention the +fact that the Kronprindsesse Louise would sail within +half an hour.</p> + +<p>“This will never do,” interposed Rodman. “We +have been chasing the ship now for a week, and by +the time we get to Copenhagen she will be gone. I +move we go to Stockholm. We shall be sure to catch +her there.”</p> + +<p>“Good!” exclaimed Wilde.</p> + +<p>The proposition was fully discussed, and when a +majority favored the movement, the others, among +whom was Sanford, yielded an apparently reluctant +assent. The Wadstena would start at two o’clock, +and there was not a moment to lose. The landlord +was astonished at the decision, and his hotel was not +filled that night, as he intended it should be. Just as +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_236" id="Page_236">[Pg 236]</a></span> +the canal steamer was starting, the young tourists +hurried on board, and were soon on their way to +Stockholm.</p> + +<p>Not a quarter of a mile distant at this moment were +Peaks and his prisoner, and Blaine, the head steward, +who was on the lookout for them.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_237" id="Page_237">[Pg 237]</a></span></p> +<h2>CHAPTER XIV.</h2> + +<p class="center"><strong>THROUGH THE SOUND TO COPENHAGEN.</strong></p> + + +<p>Mr. Lowington was almost forced to the conclusion +that the experiment of permitting the +students to manage their own finances was a failure. If +it could be a success anywhere, it must be in the northern +countries, where none of the boys spoke the language, +and where the lighter intoxicants were not so common +as in the more southern portions of Europe. Though +he was not aware that any pupils had made an improper +use of their money, the non-arrival of the crew +of the second cutter, and the disappearance of Scott and +Laybold in Gottenburg, seemed to have some relation +to the condition of their funds. But he was willing to +carry the experiment as far as practicable, and to +restore the obnoxious rule only when it was absolutely +necessary to do so. Two thirds of the students could +be safely trusted to manage their money matters, and +it was not pleasant to restrain the whole for the benefit +of the minority.</p> + +<p>After the boys had walked all over Gottenburg, they +were weary enough to retire at eight bells in the evening, +especially as they were to turn out at two o’clock +the next morning, for the trip up the Göta Canal. At +the appointed time, the steamer came alongside the +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_238" id="Page_238">[Pg 238]</a></span> +ship, where she took the excursionists on board, the +boats of the other vessels conveying their crews to the +Young America. As it was still dark, not a few of +the boys finished their nap in the little steamer. About +eight o’clock, she reached the long series of locks by +which the canal passes the Falls of Trollhätten, and +the excursionists walked for a couple of hours through +the beautiful scenery, and embarking again in the +steamer, arrived at Wenersberg, where they obtained +a view of the Wenern Lake, and proceeded by +special train to Herrljunga, and thence, by regular +train, to Gottenburg, where they arrived before eight +in the evening. The wind was fair, and the squadron +immediately sailed to the southward.</p> + +<p>The principal was annoyed by the absence of not +less than a dozen of the students; but he had every +confidence in the zeal and discretion of Peaks, who +was to take charge of the cutter’s crew, and he left the +head steward at Gottenburg to find Scott and Laybold. +He feared that the success of these wanderers +would encourage others to follow their example, and +increased vigilance seemed to be necessary on the part +of the instructors. The next day was Sunday, and it +was doubly a season of rest. The breeze was fair, but +very light, so that the squadron made only about four +knots an hour; but on Monday morning she was fairly +in the Sound, which is about three miles in width. +On the left was the town of Helsingborg, in Sweden, +and on the right Kronberg Castle, with Elsinore, on a +kind of land-locked basin, behind it. The vessels +continued on their course, keeping within a short distance +of the shore, so that those on board could distinctly +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_239" id="Page_239">[Pg 239]</a></span> +see the towns and villages. The houses were +neat, with red roofs, each one having its little garden. +There were plenty of groves and forests, and the trees +were oaks and beeches, instead of pines and firs which +the voyagers had seen in Norway and Sweden. The +country was flat, with nothing like a hill to be seen.</p> + +<p>The breeze freshening, the squadron hastened its +pace, and in the middle of the forenoon the spires of +Copenhagen were in plain sight. Off in the water +were several detached forts, built on small islands. +The Young America led the way, and soon dropped +her anchor off the citadel of Frederikshavn, and near +the landing-place, where a crowd of small steamers +were lying at the wharf.</p> + +<p>“Have you been here before, Dr. Winstock?” +asked Captain Lincoln, as he saw the surgeon examining +the aspect of the city.</p> + +<p>“Yes; several years ago. I have been in every +country in Europe.”</p> + +<p>“Copenhagen don’t look just as I expected it +would,” added the commander. “I thought it must +be a very old, black, and musty-looking place.”</p> + +<p>“You see that it is not,—at least not from the +water; but you will find plenty of dismal and gloomy-looking +buildings in it. The fact is, Denmark is too +small a kingdom to support all the show and expense +of royalty: its palaces are too large and costly to be +retained as such, and many of them have been permitted +to fall into partial decay. But I will not anticipate +Mr. Mapps’ lecture, for I see the signal is flying.”</p> + +<p>“She makes a tremendous display of forts and +guns,” added Lincoln, glancing from the batteries of +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_240" id="Page_240">[Pg 240]</a></span> +Trekroner and Lynetten to the bristling guns of Frederikshavn.</p> + +<p>“Doubtless it is a strong place, but the English +have twice captured the city. Here are the boats +from the other vessels. I suppose we shall go ashore +after dinner.”</p> + +<p>The steerage was soon crowded with students, and +Mr. Mapps took his usual position at the foremast, on +which appeared the map of Denmark.</p> + +<p>“In English this country is called Denmark,” said +the professor; “but it has this name in no other language. +The Danes call it <em>Danmark</em>, the adjective of +which is <em>Danske</em>; and the country is also called the +<em>Danske Stat</em>, or Danish States. In German it is +<em>Dänemark</em>; in French, <em>Danemark</em>; in Italian, <em>Danimarca</em>. +It is bounded on the north by the Skager +Rack, or Sleeve; on the east by the Cattegat, the +Sound, and the Baltic Sea; on the south by the Duchy +of Schleswig and the Baltic; and on the west by the +North Sea. When this ship was in Europe before, +Schleswig-Holstein and Lauenburg belonged to Denmark; +but now they belong to Prussia, and Jutland is +all that remains of continental Denmark. This peninsula +has an area of nine thousand six hundred square +miles, or about the size of the State of New Hampshire. +With the several islands, the entire area of +Denmark is fourteen thousand five hundred square +miles. Greenland, Iceland, the Faroe Islands, and +several small islands in the West Indies, belong to +her. The population is nearly one million eight hundred +thousand—about equal to that of Massachusetts +and New Hampshire united.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_241" id="Page_241">[Pg 241]</a></span> +“The country is flat, or gently undulating, and the +highest hill is only five hundred and fifty feet high. +The soil is sandy on the peninsula, and not very fertile, +but very rich on some of the islands. It is indented +to a remarkable degree with bays and inlets, +and the whole interior is dotted with small lakes, usually +connected by a river, like a number of eggs on a +string. The Lim Fjord, which you see in the north, +formerly only extended to within a short distance of +the North Sea; but in 1825 a tempest broke through +the narrow neck of land, and opened a passage for +small vessels. These inland lakes are full of fish, and +salmon was once so plenty that householders were forbidden +by law to feed their servants with this food +more than once a week.</p> + +<p>“The two largest islands are Fünen and Seeland, +which are separated by the Great Belt, and the former +from the main land by the Little Belt. In winter +these are frozen over, as is the Sound in the severer +seasons, and have been crossed by armies engaged in +military operations. The country is well wooded, and +you will find plenty of large oaks and beeches. This +morning you passed Elsinore, where Shakespeare locates +Hamlet; but you cannot find where ‘the morn +walks o’er the dew of yon high eastern hill,’ for there +are no hills there; nor ‘the dreadful summit of the +cliff, that beetles o’er his base into the sea.’ It is a +flat region, with only a low cliff to border the sea; +certainly with no such tremendous steeps as the poet +describes. Besides, Hamlet lived and died in Jutland. +But Shakespeare used the poet’s license.</p> + +<p>“Nearly all of Denmark lies between latitude fifty-five +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_242" id="Page_242">[Pg 242]</a></span> +and fifty-eight; but, though the thermometer sometimes +falls to twenty-two degrees below zero in winter, +the average temperature is mild. The climate does +not materially differ from the eastern coast of Massachusetts. +The air is so humid that the grass and trees +have a livelier green than the countries farther south, +and droughts are almost unknown. When France +and Germany are parched and dry, Denmark is fresh +and green. The people are engaged principally in +agriculture and commerce. The chief exports are +grain, cattle, and horses.</p> + +<p>“The government is a constitutional monarchy. +The king is assisted in the executive department by a +‘Royal Privy Council’ of seven ministers. The legislature +is called the Rigsdag, and consists of the Landsthing, +or upper house, and the Folkething, or lower +house. Of the former, twelve are nominated for life, +by the king, from the present or past members of the +lower house, and the remaining fifty-four are elected, +in four classes, by the largest tax-payers in country +districts, in towns, in cities, and by deputies representing +the ordinary voters. The members of the +lower house are chosen directly by the people. All +male citizens of twenty-five, except paupers, and servants +who are not householders, are voters.</p> + +<p>“The established religion of the state is Lutheran, +and the king must be of this church. He nominates +the bishops, who have no political power, as in England. +They have the general supervision and management +of all the affairs of the church in the kingdom. +Although there are only about thirteen thousand non-Lutherans +in Denmark, entire religious toleration prevails, +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_243" id="Page_243">[Pg 243]</a></span> +and no man can be deprived of his civil and +political rights on account of his creed.</p> + +<p>“Free education is provided by the government for +all children whose parents cannot afford to pay for +tuition, and attendance at school, between the ages of +seven and fourteen, is compulsory. All the people, +therefore, are instructed in the elementary branches; +and, besides the University of Copenhagen, there is a +system of high and middle schools, available for the +children of merchants, mechanics, and the more prosperous +of the laboring classes.</p> + +<p>“Every able-bodied man in Denmark, who has attained +the age of twenty-one, is liable to serve as a soldier +for eight years in the regular army, and eight more +in the army of the reserve. In preparation for this +duty, every man is enrolled, and required to drill for a +period of from four to six months, according to the +arm of the service in which he is placed; and those +who do not become proficient in this time are required +to drill for another and longer period. The kingdom +is divided into military districts, and all the soldiers +are required to drill from thirty to forty-five days +every year. The navy of Denmark consists of thirty-one +steamers of all classes, six of which are iron-clads, +carrying three hundred and twelve guns, and manned +by nine hundred men.</p> + +<p>“Little is known of the history of this country before +the eighth century, but the Cimbri occupied it before +the time of Christ. The Danes conquered portions of +England, and in the eleventh century, Canute, who introduced +Christianity into his realm, completed the +conquest. Norway was also included in his kingdom, +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_244" id="Page_244">[Pg 244]</a></span> +and under him and his successors, during the next two +hundred years, Denmark attained the summit of her +power and glory. Holstein, Lauenburg, and several +other of the northern provinces of Germany, and even +a portion of Prussia, were subjected to her sway. +Waldemar II., a successor of Canute, with his eldest +son, was daringly captured, while resting from the +fatigues of the chase, one evening, by Count Schwerin, +whom the king had provoked to wrath by some flagrant +injustice. This bold act of retaliation was carried +to a successful issue, and the king and his son +were transported by water to Castle Schwerin, in +Mecklenburg, where they were kept as prisoners for +three years—a most remarkable instance of retribution, +if we consider that Waldemar was the most powerful +sovereign of the north. By threats and bribes +his release was procured; but during his confinement +the conquered provinces had revolted, and the king +was unable to recover his lost possessions. Denmark +was thus reduced from her lofty position by the injustice +of her king.</p> + +<p>“Towards the close of the fourteenth century, Margaret—the +Semiramis of the North—succeeded to the +thrones of Norway and Denmark, and added Sweden +to her dominions by conquest, in the compact of Calmar. +The Swedes, under Gustavus Vasa, established +their independence after the union had existed for +one hundred and twenty-five years. At the death of +the last of Margaret’s line, in 1439, the states of Denmark +elected the count of Oldenburg their king, who +reigned as Christian I. He was made duke of Schleswig +and count of Holstein, and thus the sovereign of +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_245" id="Page_245">[Pg 245]</a></span> +Denmark became the ruler of these duchies, about +which there has been so much trouble within the last +ten years, and which caused the war of 1866 between +Prussia and Austria. He was followed by his son +Hans, or John, whose heir was Christian II., deposed +in 1523. This prince was a tyrant, and was kept +a prisoner for twenty-seven years. His crown was +given to Frederick, Duke of Schleswig and Holstein, +in whose reign Sweden established her independence. +His son Christian III. succeeded him. In the great +wars which followed the Reformation, the kings of +Denmark took the Protestant side. In repeated conflicts +with the Swedes, Denmark lost much of her territory. +After Christian III. came Frederick II., and +then Christian IV., who was followed by Frederick +III., in whose reign the crown, which had been nominally +elective, was made hereditary in the Oldenburg +line. Under Christian V. the country was at peace; +but Frederick IV., who came after him, brought on a +war with Sweden by invading the territory of the +Duke of Holstein, an ally of the King of Sweden, +which continued till 1718. Under Christian VI. and +Frederick V. the country was at peace. Christian +VII. married the sister of George III. of England, +and was followed, in 1808, by Frederick VI., their son.</p> + +<p>“In 1780, Russia, Sweden, and Denmark, under +the influence of France, established a new code of +maritime laws, which operated against the interests +of England. This action in convention was called +‘Armed Neutrality,’ and in 1800, during the reign +of Christian VII., its principles were revived, and a +new agreement was signed by Russia, Prussia, Denmark, +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_246" id="Page_246">[Pg 246]</a></span> +and Sweden. It declared that arms and ammunition +alone were contraband of war, that merchandise +of belligerents, except contraband of war, was to +be protected by a neutral flag, and that ‘paper blockades’ +should be regarded as ineffectual. England immediately +laid an embargo on the vessels of the powers +signing it. In 1801, a British fleet under Sir Hyde +Parker, with Nelson as second in command, bombarded +Copenhagen. Again, in 1807, England, fearing +that Denmark would be compelled by Napoleon +to take part against her, bombarded Copenhagen, and +compelled the government to give up its entire fleet, +which was sent to England. This ended the armed +neutrality. At the final treaty of peace, in 1814, Norway +was ceded to Sweden, which, in return, gave to +Denmark Pomerania, and the Island of Rügen; but the +next year Pomerania was passed over to Prussia, in +exchange for the Duchy of Lauenburg.</p> + +<p>“Frederick VI. reigned till 1839, when he was +followed by Christian VIII. The two Duchies of +Schleswig and Holstein were still subjects of dispute. +The king claimed them, but the people of +Holstein were German in sentiment, and objected +to the incorporation of their country in the Kingdom +of Denmark, to which the continued efforts of +the latter were directed. The Danish language +was required to be used to the exclusion of the German. +In 1848, Frederick VII. came to the throne, +and was more energetic in pushing his claims to the +duchies than some of his predecessors had been. The +people of Holstein, which was a member of the German +Confederation, were in a state of insurrection, +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_247" id="Page_247">[Pg 247]</a></span> +when the King of Denmark virtually annexed both +duchies to his kingdom. War ensued, and continued +for three years. The interference of some of the great +powers restored peace, but left the question in dispute +unsettled.”</p> + +<p>“What was the question in dispute?” asked Captain +Lincoln.</p> + +<p>“I will explain it, though there are so many complications +to it, that only a general view of the subject +can be given. For four hundred years the line of +Oldenburg has occupied the throne of Denmark. +Schleswig and Holstein were governed by the same +rulers, though each country was separately organized. +But the law of succession was different. In Denmark +a female could rule, while in the duchies the line was +limited to males. Frederick VII. had no children, +and it was seen that the direct line of the house of +Oldenburg would be extinct at his death. A treaty +made by the several powers interested gave the succession +to Prince Christian, whose wife was entitled +to the throne by right of her descent from Christian +III., who died in 1559; but she yielded her right to her +husband, who ascended the throne in 1863, as Christian +IX., and is the present king. At the death of +Frederick VII., the Duke of Augustenburg claimed +the duchies. Germany desired to separate Schleswig-Holstein +from Denmark. The German troops entered +Holstein, which was a member of the Confederation, +and entitled to its protection. Denmark refused to +yield her title to the duchies, and war ensued. The +Danes were overwhelmed, and repeatedly defeated. +England declined to assist Denmark, as had been expected +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_248" id="Page_248">[Pg 248]</a></span> +by the latter, and Denmark was compelled to +renounce all her claims to Schleswig-Holstein and +Lauenburg, in favor of Prussia and Austria. The +main question in regard to the final disposition of the +duchies was left open for future adjustment, and Prussia +took temporary possession of Schleswig, and Austria +of Holstein. The Duke of Augustenburg was +permitted to remain in the latter, but forbidden to get +up any demonstration in aid of his own claims.</p> + +<p>“Austria favored the claim of the duke, while Prussia +denied it, and accused her then powerful rival of +encouraging revolutionary movements in Holstein dangerous +to the thrones of Europe. Then followed the +great war of 1866, which resulted in the utter humiliation +of Austria, and the annexation of all the disputed +territories to Prussia. Denmark, thus shorn of her territories +and her power, has become an insignificant kingdom. +With less than two million inhabitants, she supports +all the costly trappings of royalty, and keeps an +army and navy. The king has a civil list of nearly +three hundred thousand dollars, and the heir apparent +has an allowance exceeding the salary of the President +of the United States, while the entire revenue of the nation +is only about thirteen million dollars. Prince Frederick, +the king’s oldest son, who succeeds to the throne, +married the daughter of the King of Sweden and Norway. +The princess Alexandra, the oldest daughter, +is the wife of the Prince of Wales. Prince Wilhelm, +the second son, was elected King of Greece, under the +title of Georgios I. in 1863. The Princess Dagmar is +the wife of the Grand Duke Alexander, of Russia, heir +of the throne. By their connections two of the sons +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_249" id="Page_249">[Pg 249]</a></span> +are, or will be, kings, one daughter Queen of England, +and another Empress of Russia.</p> + +<p>“In 1348, the King of Denmark levied duties on +all vessels passing through the Sound, at the Fortress +of Kronberg, which were applied to the expenses of +the light-houses, and the protection of shipping from +pirates. The United States first objected to the payment +of this tax, and called the attention of the commercial +nations of Europe to the annoyance. All vessels +were obliged to anchor, and submit to vexatious +delays; but none doubted the right to levy the dues, +which had been formally regulated by treaties. Denmark +consented to abandon her claims on the payment +of about fifteen millions of dollars by the nations of +Europe, and about four hundred thousand on the part +of the United States.”</p> + +<p>The professor completed his lecture, and the students +separated. Most of them climbed into the rigging, +or seated themselves on the rail, where they +could see the city and the various objects of interest in +the harbor. The view shoreward from the ship was +very unsatisfactory, for the city, built on a dead level, +presented but little to challenge the attention of the +voyager. While they were observing the surroundings, +a shore boat approached the vessel, in which +were two persons wearing the uniform of the squadron. +One of them was a stout man, in whom the students +soon recognized Peaks.</p> + +<p>“But who is that with him?” asked Norwood.</p> + +<p>“It’s one of the second cutter’s crew, I suppose,” +replied De Forrest. “I didn’t think, when I went +ashore with them, that I shouldn’t see any of them +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_250" id="Page_250">[Pg 250]</a></span> +again for so long a time. I wonder where the rest of +them are.”</p> + +<p>“That’s not one of the second cutters,” added Judson. +“It is the English fellow.”</p> + +<p>“So it is.”</p> + +<p>Peaks came alongside, and directed Clyde Blacklock +to mount the accommodation ladder, which he did +without making any objection. They had arrived the +day before. The prisoner seemed to have lost some +portion of his stubborn spirit. The boatswain followed +him to the deck, and touching his cap to the captain +and other officers on the quarter-deck, went aft, where +the principal was talking with the surgeon.</p> + +<p>“We have come on board, sir,” said the boatswain, +as he took off his cap and pointed to Clyde.</p> + +<p>“I see you have,” replied Mr. Lowington. “I’m +glad to see you again, Clyde.”</p> + +<p>The young Briton nodded his head with a jerk, +but made no reply.</p> + +<p>“Have you seen Mr. Blaine, Peaks?” asked the +principal.</p> + +<p>“Yes, sir; I met him on the wharf night before +last at Gottenburg.”</p> + +<p>“But where are the crew of the second cutter? I +expected you to bring them.”</p> + +<p>“They came back to Christiania on Friday, and +took the steamer for Gottenburg the same evening; +but Mr. Blaine had not seen them. Their steamer +arrived in the forenoon, and the ship did not sail till +night.”</p> + +<p>“I am afraid there is something wrong about it.”</p> + +<p>“I left Mr. Blaine in Gottenburg. I suppose he +will find them.”</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_251" id="Page_251">[Pg 251]</a></span> +Peaks reported in detail the result of his mission +on shore. So far as Clyde was concerned it was entirely +satisfactory; but the continued absence of the +second cutter’s crew was very annoying to the principal.</p> + +<p>“How do you feel, Clyde?” asked Mr. Lowington, +turning to the new student.</p> + +<p>“I feel well enough,” replied the runaway, roughly.</p> + +<p>“I am glad you do. I hope you feel better than +when you left the ship.”</p> + +<p>“I don’t.”</p> + +<p>“While you were on board before, I neglected to +explain to you the consequences of leaving the ship +without permission.”</p> + +<p>“It wouldn’t have made any difference. I should +have gone just the same,” answered Clyde, doggedly.</p> + +<p>“The less trouble you make, the better it will be for +you.”</p> + +<p>“Perhaps it will; but I don’t intend to stay in this +ship a great while.”</p> + +<p>“I intend that you shall stay here; and since you +avow your purpose to run away again, I must see that +you are put in a safe place. Peaks, the brig.”</p> + +<p>“The brig? What’s that?” demanded Clyde, who +was very suspicious of the calm, unmoved tones of +the principal.</p> + +<p>“Come with me, my lad, and I will show you,” replied +the boatswain.</p> + +<p>The Briton knew by sad experience how useless it +was to contend against this tyrant, who, however, always +used him well when he behaved in a reasonable +manner. He followed the boatswain into the steerage, +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_252" id="Page_252">[Pg 252]</a></span> +and the door of the brig, which was a small prison +formed of plank slats, set upright under the steps, +about three inches apart, was opened.</p> + +<p>“That’s the brig, my boy,” said Peaks. “It’s a +regular institution on board a man-of-war; but this +one has not been opened for months.”</p> + +<p>“Well, what’s it for?” asked Clyde, who even yet +did not seem to comprehend its use.</p> + +<p>“Walk in, and I will make it all plain to you in a +moment.”</p> + +<p>“I don’t know what you mean.”</p> + +<p>“Sail in!” shouted a student, who, with others, was +observing the treatment.</p> + +<p>“On deck, sir!” said the boatswain, sternly, to the +speaker. “Report yourself.”</p> + +<p>It was a principle in the discipline of the ship that +no person should say or do anything to irritate a student +undergoing punishment, and no one was permitted, +on such occasions, to take part on either side, +unless called upon by the officer or instructor to do so. +In ordinary cases no boy was required, or permitted, +to be a “tell-tale,” and all were expected to remain +neutral. The student who had spoken left the steerage, +and went on deck, before Clyde had time to +“open upon him,” as he intended to do.</p> + +<p>“Step in, my lad,” added Peaks.</p> + +<p>“What for?” asked the Briton, as he obeyed the +order, but not without a suspicion that he was to +step upon a red-hot gridiron, or be precipitated through +some opening in the deck into the dark depths beneath.</p> + +<p>No such calamity happened to him, and he was +rather astonished to find that no harsher punishment +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_253" id="Page_253">[Pg 253]</a></span> +was used for the flagrant offence he had committed. +He had pushed the boatswain overboard, and then +run away. Peaks had never manifested any resentment +towards him on account of his cowardly trick; +but he anticipated some severe discipline on board of +the ship. The boatswain closed and locked the door +of the brig, and then looked in at the prisoner through +the slats.</p> + +<p>“Do you understand what the brig is for now?” +asked Peaks.</p> + +<p>“You have locked me in—that’s all.”</p> + +<p>“That’s all, my lad.”</p> + +<p>“How long am I to stay here?”</p> + +<p>“Till you make up your mind not to run away.”</p> + +<p>“This isn’t a bad place, and I shall stay here till I +grow gray before I promise not to be off when I get +a chance.”</p> + +<p>“All right, my hearty. Think of it a few weeks.”</p> + +<p>To one who had expected some horrible punishment +for his misdemeanors, the brig seemed like very +mild discipline. Clyde seated himself on the stool in +his prison, and leisurely surveyed the surroundings. +He was an enterprising youth, and the bars of his +cage looked small and weak. At dinner time, the +meal was handed in to him, and he ate with an excellent +appetite. Soon after, he heard the call for all +hands, and then the waiter in the steerage told him +they had gone on shore to see the city. Everything +was quiet and still, and he devoted himself to a more +particular examination of the bars of the brig. They +were two inches thick, but the case looked hopeful. +Pursuing his investigations still farther, he found, under +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_254" id="Page_254">[Pg 254]</a></span> +the steps, a saw, a hammer, a chisel, and some +other tools, which Bitts, the carpenter, had placed +there a few days before, and forgotten to remove. +Clyde took up the saw; but just then, Peaks, with a +book in his hand, seated himself at a table near the +brig, and began to read.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_255" id="Page_255">[Pg 255]</a></span></p> +<h2>CHAPTER XV.</h2> + +<p class="center"><strong>COPENHAGEN AND TIVOLI.</strong></p> + + +<p>All the boats of the squadron came into line, each +with the flag in the bow and stern. They pulled +along the water front of the city, around a couple of +Danish men-of-war, and of course created a sensation. +One by one the boats rowed up to the landing, and +the students went on shore, each crew securing its +cutter at the wharf, near the steps. The custom-house +officers were on the alert; but as no one had parcels +of any kind, the students were not detained. Mr. and +Mrs. Kendall landed, and as they intended to spend a +few days in the city, they had a couple of valises, +which the porters, who are always in waiting at all +the ports in Europe, conveyed into the custom-house. +The Toldbod, as this edifice is called by the Danes, is +surrounded by a high wall, which also encloses the +entire landing-place, so that none can visit the city +from the sea without passing through its gates.</p> + +<p>One of the officers spoke English very well, and +evidently took pride in doing so, for he asked a great +many questions so pleasantly, that it was impossible +to explain his object in any other way. He wished to +know whether the travellers had any clothing they +had not worn, and whether Mrs. Kendall had any +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_256" id="Page_256">[Pg 256]</a></span> +tobacco or liquor. She protested that she did not use +tobacco or liquor; and the actual examination of the +baggage was a mere form. The man was so polite, +that Paul at once concluded he was only practising his +English. A carriage was procured, and Dr. Winstock +and Captain Lincoln were invited to join the +party. The inquiring students deemed it a great privilege +to be permitted to go with the surgeon, for he +was a walking encyclopædia of every city and country +in Europe. As Paul Kendall had been before, Captain +Lincoln was now, the favorite of the doctor, and +the little party were to see the city together.</p> + +<p>The carriage went out at the gate, and passed into +Amaliegade. The houses were plain and substantial, +without much ornament. They were of brick, but +most of them were covered with stucco.</p> + +<p>“What’s this?” asked Paul, as the carriage entered +an open space, with an equestrian statue in the +centre.</p> + +<p>“Frederiksplads,” replied the doctor; “and that is +the statue of Frederik V., who came to the throne in +1746, and in whose reign this palace was erected.”</p> + +<p>The place was an octagon, surrounded on all sides +by public buildings.</p> + +<p>“This is the residence of the king on the left. On +the other side is the palace of the crown prince. +There is the foreign office, and on the other side lives +the queen dowager.”</p> + +<p>“They are not very elegant buildings,” said Captain +Lincoln.</p> + +<p>“No; there are no very fine buildings in Copenhagen, +though the Exchange is a very curious structure, +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_257" id="Page_257">[Pg 257]</a></span> +and some are very large and unwieldy. There’s the +Casino,” added the doctor.</p> + +<p>“What’s a casino?” inquired the captain.</p> + +<p>“Here it is a building for dancing, concerts, theatrical +performances, and similar amusements in the +winter season. Everything is cheap here, and the +price of admission to the Casino, where one joins the +dance or sees a play, is two or three marks.”</p> + +<p>“How much is that? I haven’t looked up the +money yet,” said Paul.</p> + +<p>“A rigsbank dollar is the unit, worth about fifty-four +cents of our money. It is divided into six marks, +of nine cents each, and a mark into sixteen skillings, of +about half a cent each. When the Italian opera is at +the Casino, the prices are only three or four marks. +This is Gothersgade,” added Dr. Winstock, as the +carriage turned into another street. “In plain English, +Gothic street.”</p> + +<p>“There’s another equestrian statue,” added Captain +Lincoln, pointing to a large, irregular space, surrounded +by public buildings.</p> + +<p>“The statue of Christian V. This is Kongens, or +King’s Square. There are the Academy of Arts, the +Royal Theatre, the Guard House, the New Market—none +of them very fine, as you can see for yourselves.”</p> + +<p>The carriage crossed this square, and came out at a +canal, on the other side of which was the vast palace +of Christiansborg. A short distance farther brought +the party to the Royal Hotel. The carriage stopped +at the door in the arch, and the two landlords, the +porter, the waiters, and the clerk, half a score strong, +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_258" id="Page_258">[Pg 258]</a></span> +turned out to receive its occupants. All of them +bowed low, and all of them led the way up stairs. +Paul took a parlor and chamber for himself and lady.</p> + +<p>“Now, where’s Joseph?” asked Dr. Winstock.</p> + +<p>“Who’s Joseph?” inquired the captain.</p> + +<p>“He is the guide at this hotel, if he is still living.”</p> + +<p>Joseph was sent for, and soon made his appearance. +He was an elderly man, with gray hair and whiskers, +neatly dressed in black. His manners were very +agreeable, and he exhibited a lively zeal to serve the +tourists. Mr. Lowington had been courteously waited +upon by an officer of the government, who had +volunteered to have the various palaces, museums, +and other places of interest, opened during the afternoon +and the next day. Joseph had procured a two-horse +carriage, and the party at the hotel seated themselves +in it, with the guide on the box with the driver.</p> + +<p>“That’s the Slot,” said Joseph, pointing across the +canal.</p> + +<p>“The what?” exclaimed Captain Lincoln.</p> + +<p>“The Slot, or Palace of Christiansborg.”</p> + +<p>“Slot! What a name!”</p> + +<p>“But not any worse than the German word +<em>Schloss</em>,” added Joseph, laughing. “Do you speak +German, sir?”</p> + +<p>“Not much.”</p> + +<p>The guide uttered a few sentences in German, evidently +for the purpose of demonstrating that he spoke +the language.</p> + +<p>“The palace is on an island called Slotsholm, and is +as big as it is ugly. Shall we go there now?”</p> + +<p>“No; we want a general view of the city first,” +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_259" id="Page_259">[Pg 259]</a></span> +replied Dr. Winstock. “I think we had better +ascend to the top of the Round Tower.”</p> + +<p>Joseph gave the order, and the carriage proceeded to +the tower. The canal in front of the hotel was filled +with small craft, which had brought pottery and various +wares from other parts of Denmark, to sell. The +goods were arranged on the decks and on the shore +of the canal. Near were groups of women, who were +selling fish, vegetables, and other articles, around +whom was a crowd of purchasers.</p> + +<p>“I suppose you have heard of Andersen?” said +Joseph to the captain.</p> + +<p>“Heard of him! I have read all his books which +have been translated into English,” replied Captain +Lincoln.</p> + +<p>“He has rooms in that building some of the time. +Do you see that sign—Melchoir?”</p> + +<p>“Yes.”</p> + +<p>“This Melchoir is a very dear friend of Andersen, +who lives with him a portion of the time.”</p> + +<p>“Is it possible to see Hans Christian Andersen?” +asked Mrs. Kendall.</p> + +<p>“Quite possible, madam. I will see about it to-day. +He is a very agreeable man, and willing to meet +all who wish to see him,” answered Joseph. “There’s +the Town Hall,” he added, as the carriage passed a +large building, with an extensive colonnade in front.</p> + +<p>“‘<em>Med Lov skal man Land bygge</em>,’” said Lincoln, +reading an inscription on the front. “Those are +my sentiments exactly.”</p> + +<p>“‘With law must the land be built’ is the English +of that,” laughed Joseph. “All the Jutland laws begin +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_260" id="Page_260">[Pg 260]</a></span> +with this phrase, which was spoken by Waldemar II. +We Danes believe in law, and everything that is +good. Copenhagen is a very fine city, and everything +is remarkably cheap here.”</p> + +<p>“What do you call your city in your own lingo, +Joseph?”</p> + +<p>“Kjöbenhavn; pronounce it Chép-en-ahn.”</p> + +<p>“Chepenahn,” repeated Lincoln.</p> + +<p>“Speak it a little quicker, and you will have it +right. It was first called simply the Haven; then in +Danish, when many merchants carried on business +here, <em>Kaupmannahöfn</em>, or merchants’ haven, from +which it was shortened into <em>chepenahn</em>. Here is +the Round Tower,” added Joseph, as the carriage +stopped.</p> + +<p>The party alighted and entered the structure, which +was the tower of the Church of the Trinity.</p> + +<p>“This used to be the watch tower, where men were +kept to give the alarm in case of fire; but the observatory +has been moved to the tower of St. Nicholas, and +now we have a telegraphic fire alarm. Won’t you +walk up to the top of this tower, where you can have +a fine view of the whole city? The ascent is very +easy,” continued Joseph.</p> + +<p>There were no stairs, but an inclined plane, gradual +in its rise, permitted the tourists to ascend to the summit +with very little labor.</p> + +<p>“We might have driven up in the carriage,” said +Captain Lincoln.</p> + +<p>“There would be no difficulty at all in doing so. +In fact, Peter the Great, when he was in Copenhagen, +in 1716, drove to the top with the Empress Catharine, +in a coach and four.”</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_261" id="Page_261">[Pg 261]</a></span> +“Is that so?” asked the captain.</p> + +<p>“I can’t remember so far back myself,” chuckled +Joseph, “for I’m not much over a hundred years old; +but everybody says it is true, and I see no reason to +doubt the story. Peter the Great liked to do strange +things, and you can see for yourself that a carriage +would run very well here.”</p> + +<p>“If he went up with a coach and four, of course he +must have come down, unless the carriage and horses +are up there now. How did he turn his team?”</p> + +<p>“It is easier to ask some questions than to answer +them,” replied Joseph. “History does not say that he +drove down, only that he drove up.”</p> + +<p>“Perhaps he backed down, which kings and emperors +are sometimes obliged to do, as well as common +people,” suggested Paul Kendall.</p> + +<p>“Very likely he did; I don’t see any other way for +the team to descend,” added Joseph. “This tower +was begun in 1639.”</p> + +<p>At the top of the structure the travellers took a +general survey of the city, and then proceeded to +examine it in detail.</p> + +<p>“Do you remember the latitude of Copenhagen, +Captain Lincoln?” asked Dr. Winstock.</p> + +<p>“About fifty-five and a half.”</p> + +<p>“The same as the middle of Labrador. Quebec is +about forty-seven, and this is a long way farther north. +What is the population of this city, Joseph?” asked +the doctor.</p> + +<p>“One hundred and eighty-one thousand,” replied +the guide, giving the census of 1870. “Formerly the +city was a walled town, with ramparts and moats. It +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_262" id="Page_262">[Pg 262]</a></span> +was built partly on Seeland, and partly on the small +island of Amager. The channel between them is the +harbor. You can see where the old line of fortifications +was. The old town lies nearest to the sea, but +the city is now spreading rapidly out into the country.”</p> + +<p>“What is that broad sheet of water, with two bridges +over it?” asked Lincoln, pointing to the land side.</p> + +<p>“That is the reservoir. Formerly the water in the +city was bad, but now it has an excellent system of +water-works. The water comes in from the country, +and is pumped up by steam before it is distributed. +Beyond that, for miles, the country is covered with +beautiful villas and country residences. You must ride +out there, for the environs of Copenhagen are as fine as +anything in Europe.”</p> + +<p>“You are right, Joseph,” added the doctor. “Some +parts of the city are not unlike Holland, you see. The +Slotsholm canal gives that part of the town a decidedly +Dutch look.”</p> + +<p>“The part on Amager, called Christianshavn, is all +cut up by canals,” added the guide.</p> + +<p>“Now, we will take a ride around the city,” said +Paul Kendall.</p> + +<p>The party descended, and having driven through +some of the principal streets, and obtained a very +good idea of the city, returned to the hotel.</p> + +<p>“Now you can dismiss the carriage, and we will +go to some of the museums and churches,” suggested +Joseph.</p> + +<p>“We don’t care to walk far; we will retain the +carriage,” replied Paul.</p> + +<p>“It will be much cheaper to walk, as you have to +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_263" id="Page_263">[Pg 263]</a></span> +pay four marks an hour for the carriage,” pleaded the +economical guide. “Thorwaldsen’s Museum and the +Northern Antiquities are only a few steps from here.”</p> + +<p>“Very well; we will walk, then, if you insist upon +it,” laughed Paul.</p> + +<p>“I thought these guides made you spend as much +money as possible,” said Captain Lincoln to the surgeon.</p> + +<p>“I never found it so. I think they are a very useful +class of men. They charge here about two rigsdalers +a day, and I remember that Joseph would not let me +throw away a single mark. They know the prices for +carriages and everything else, and it is for their interest +not to let any one cheat their employers. Perhaps +it is not well to make purchases with them, for they +compel the merchant to pay them a commission, +which increases the price charged for the articles. +But I think, in many places, I have done better with +a <em>commissionnaire</em> than without one, in making purchases.”</p> + +<p>Joseph led the way across the bridge to Slotsholm, +which was nearly covered by the immense palace of +Christiansborg and its dependencies. The first building +was Thorwaldsen’s Museum, the outer walls of +which were covered with an Etruscan fresco of the +arrival and debarkation of the great sculptor and his +goods, mostly works of art. The figures are about +life size, and the situation in which the pictures are +placed is novel and quaint. The work was done by +inlaying cement of different colors in the wall. Joseph +described the various scenes. Thorwaldsen is still +held in the highest regard and veneration by all Denmark, +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_264" id="Page_264">[Pg 264]</a></span> +and especially by all Copenhagen; indeed, he +seems to be the great genius of the country. He was +born in 1770, near the city. His father was an Icelander, +and a carver in wood—a calling in which the +son assisted him when he was only a dozen years +old. At seventeen he received the prize of a silver +medal from the Academy of Arts, and at twenty-three +the grand prize, which carried with it a royal pension, +that enabled him to go abroad for the study of his art. +He went to Rome in 1796, where he had but little +success, and was reduced almost to despair, when his +model of Jason and the Golden Fleece attracted the +attention of an English gentleman, who commissioned +him to complete the work in marble. This event was +the dawn of success, and orders continued to pour in +upon him from the rich and the powerful, including +kings and emperors, until his fortune was made. His +works adorn many of the great cities of Europe, and +Canova was his only actual rival. His fame extended +to every nation, and a visit to his native land in 1819 +was a triumphal progress through Italy and Germany. +In 1838 he returned to Copenhagen, to pass the remainder +of his days, in a frigate sent to Italy for his use by +the Danish government. On one side of his museum +are depicted his arrival in this ship, and his reception +by the citizens; and on the other side, the conveyance +of his works from the ship to their final destination. +Thorwaldsen went to Rome again on a visit for his +health, and died in Copenhagen in 1844. He was a +modest, generous, and amiable man. The museum +was erected by subscription, though the sculptor gave +a fourth part of the sum necessary for its erection, and +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_265" id="Page_265">[Pg 265]</a></span> +in his will bequeathed to it the works of art from his +cunning brain, of which its contents are almost entirely +composed. His biography has been written by +Hans Christian Andersen.</p> + +<p>After examining the frescoes on the outer wall, the +party entered the building. It is an oblong structure, +with a court-yard in the middle. It is two stories in +height, with connected rooms extending entirely around +it. The works of art, and memorials of the sculptor, +are classified in these apartments, forty-two in number.</p> + +<p>“That is the grave of Thorwaldsen,” said Joseph, +leading the way into the court-yard. “His body lies +there, surrounded by his works, as he requested.”</p> + +<p>The grave is an oblong enclosure of polished granite, +raised a few inches above the ground, and covered +over with ivy. At the foot of it is a black cross, with +the date of his death inscribed upon it.</p> + +<p>The tourists walked through the various rooms, and +examined the works of the immortal genius, most of +which were in plaster, being the models of all his +great achievements set up in marble in various parts of +Europe. His pictures, his library, his collections of +coins, vases, and antiquities, are placed in the museum. +One room is fitted up with his furniture, precisely +as he used it, and various interesting mementos +of the man are to be seen there. Among the pictures +are some mere daubs, which are preserved only +because they belonged to Thorwaldsen; but they have +an interest as an illustration of the benevolent character +of the great sculptor, who ordered many of them +merely to save the artists from starvation.</p> + +<p>“Did you ever see Thorwaldsen?” asked Lincoln, +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_266" id="Page_266">[Pg 266]</a></span> +as Joseph conducted his charge from the +building.</p> + +<p>“Often,” replied the guide. “He was a venerable-looking +old man, with long, white hair. He made a +statue of himself, which is very like him. He died +suddenly in the theatre, and the king and royal family +followed his remains to the church.”</p> + +<p>The Museum of Northern Antiquities was in the +old palace of a prince, on the other side of the canal. +On the front of the building were some quaint carvings, +which gave it a picturesque appearance. Joseph +seemed to be in his element at this museum. He +spoke glibly and learnedly of “the stone age,” “the +bronze age,” and “the iron age,” each designated by +the material of which the implements used for domestic +purposes, in war and agriculture, were composed. +Numberless utensils of all kinds are contained in the +cabinets, classified with rare skill, and arranged with +excellent taste. All these objects were found below +ground, in various parts of Scandinavia. In Denmark +the law requires that all antiquities of metal shall belong +to the government, which, however, pays the full +value of the articles to the finder. In 1847 a pair of +solid gold bracelets, very heavy, and elegantly wrought, +were dug up from the earth, and added to this collection. +There is a great variety of ornaments, in gold +and silver, consisting of necklaces, rings, bracelets, +and similar trinkets. One necklace contains three +pounds of pure gold.</p> + +<p>There are plenty of knives, arrow-heads, hatchets, +hammers, chisels, and other implements, skilfully made +of stone. Runic writings, the most valuable in the +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_267" id="Page_267">[Pg 267]</a></span> +world, are collected here. Joseph said that certain +long pieces of wood, with signs carved upon them, +were Icelandic Calendars. The remains of a warrior, +who had fought and died in the ancient time, with the +iron mail of his day, were examined with interest, as +were also a number of altars, coffers containing relics, +and some gold crosses, one of which is said to contain +a splinter from the true cross, which were exhibited +as specimens of the Catholic form of worship in remote +times.</p> + +<p>Recrossing the bridge over the canal, the party +entered the great, barn-like palace of Christiansborg. +It consists of several connected buildings, containing +a theatre, riding-school, stables, coach-houses, bake-house, +and the usual royal apartments. In 1168 a +castle was erected on this spot, as a protection against +pirates, which was repeatedly demolished, rebuilt, +altered, and enlarged, till it was levelled to the ground +in 1732, and a new palace erected, but was destroyed +by fire in 1784. It was rebuilt, in its present cumbrous +proportions, in 1828. The visitors entered +the large court-yard, passed through the picture gallery, +the “Hall of the Knights,” the throne-room, +looked into the riding-school,—which is a large, oblong +room, with an earth floor, where the royal family +may practise equestrianism,—the arsenal, the legislative +chambers, and other rooms, none of which were +very striking to those who had visited the palaces of +Paris, London, Berlin, and St. Petersburg.</p> + +<p>In front of the palace is a beautiful green, beyond +which is the Exchange, or Börsen, built by Christian +IV. It is the most picturesque edifice in the city, +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_268" id="Page_268">[Pg 268]</a></span> +though the interior is entirely commonplace. It is +long and very narrow, and ornamented with a vast +number of figures cut in the stone, with elegantly-wrought +portals at the entrances. But the spire is the +most remarkable portion of the building, and consists +of four dragons, the heads at the apex looking towards +the four points of the compass.</p> + +<p>From the Exchange the party walked to the Fruekirke, +or Church of our Lady, which is interesting +only on account of the works of Thorwaldsen which +it contains. Behind the altar is the majestic and +beautiful statue of Christ, which stretches out its +wounded hands, as if he were saying, “Come unto +me, ye that labor and are heavy-laden, and I will give +you rest.” On each side of the church are the figures +of the twelve apostles, placed against the walls at +equal distances, so as to include the whole extent. In +the middle of the choir, in front of the altar, is the +figure of an angel, holding a baptismal font, in the +shape of a shell, which some call Thorwaldsen’s masterpiece. +In the sacristy of the church are several other +works of the great sculptor, who was first interred in +this place, before the museum was ready to receive +his remains.</p> + +<p>Mrs. Kendall declared she had seen enough for one +day, for sight-seeing is the hardest work one can do +when it is overdone. After supper, when the lady was +rested, she consented to visit Tivoli, where the students +were to spend the evening. This celebrated +resort of the Copenhageners is situated just outside of +the old walls of the city, near the arm of the sea which +divides Amager from Seeland. One of the two horse-railways, +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_269" id="Page_269">[Pg 269]</a></span> +which the people in Europe generally persist +in calling “tramways,” extends through the city, +passing the gates of this garden. Several of the officers +and seamen of the ship came by the cars, which hardly +differ from those in use in the principal cities of the +United States; but all of them have accommodations +for passengers on the top.</p> + +<p>Captain Lincoln—who had been on board of the +ship since he left the party with whom he had spent +the afternoon—and Norwood were passengers in a +car; but though they could not speak a word of Norsk, +they were not disturbed by the situation. Presently the +conductor presented himself, which caused a general +sounding of pockets among the occupants of the car. +He had a tin box, suspended by a strap, which passed +around his neck, to contain the money he received. +In his hand he held a compact little roll of yellow +paper, an inch and a half in width, across which was +printed a succession of little tickets, each with a number. +The fare was four skillings, or two and one +fourth cents, and, as each +person paid, the conductor +handed him one of these +papers, torn from the roll. +Captain Lincoln gave him +a piece of money, and held +up two fingers, pointing to +his companion at the same time, to indicate that he +paid for both. The man gave him his change, and +two of the yellow tickets.</p> + +<div class="figright" style="width: 250px;"> +<img src="images/img002.jpg" width="250" height="148" alt="Kjobenhavns Sporvei 4 Skilling 904" title="" /> +</div> + + +<p>“What are these for?” asked Lincoln, glancing at +the little papers.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_270" id="Page_270">[Pg 270]</a></span> +“They are tickets, of course,” replied Norwood.</p> + +<p>“I don’t think so,” added the captain. “All the +people seem to throw them away, and the floor of the +car is covered with them.”</p> + +<p>“O, I know now what they are!” exclaimed Norwood. +“I have heard of such things.”</p> + +<p>“I never did.”</p> + +<p>“I suppose you know what ‘knocking down’ +means—don’t you?” laughed the second lieutenant.</p> + +<p>“It means stealing.”</p> + +<p>“Precisely so. It is said that conductors and omnibus +drivers at home ‘knock down’ a good deal, which +is the technical name for taking a portion of the fares. +They use ‘spotters’ in our country to keep the conductors +and drivers honest.”</p> + +<p>“Spotters?”</p> + +<p>“Yes, that’s the name of them. They are men and +women, whom the conductors cannot distinguish from +other passengers, employed by the railway companies +to ride in the cars, and report the number of passengers +on certain trips, so that the agents can tell whether +the fares are all paid over. These tickets are used for +the same purpose.”</p> + +<p>“I don’t see what good they do. They certainly +can’t keep the men honest, for almost everybody +throws away his ticket.”</p> + +<p>“They are called control-marks,” said a gentleman +next to the captain, who had been listening with interest +to the conversation, and who spoke good English. +“The man has to tear one of them off every +time a passenger pays him.”</p> + +<p>“They are all numbered, I see; mine is nine hundred +and four,” added Lincoln.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_271" id="Page_271">[Pg 271]</a></span> +“When the man gives up this roll at night, the +next number will show how many he has torn off. +If he began at No. 200 this morning, he has taken +seven hundred and four fares.”</p> + +<p>“But he might neglect to tear off fifty or a hundred +in the course of a day,” suggested Lincoln, “and put +the money for them in his pocket.”</p> + +<p>“If he does so, everybody is watching him, and +anybody may report him to the agent. I am a share-owner +of the company, and for aught the conductor +knows, there may be one in every car. If the man +neglects his duty, my interest would prompt me to +look after him.”</p> + +<p>“I see; thank you, sir.”</p> + +<p>“Here is Tivoli,” added the gentleman. “I suppose +you are going there.”</p> + +<p>“Yes, sir.”</p> + +<p>“It is a fine garden, and very cheap.”</p> + +<p>The young officers left the car, and bought tickets +at the gate, for which they paid one mark, or nine +cents, each. Near the entrance they found a man +selling programmes of the evening’s entertainment, at +two skillings each. Captain Lincoln bought one, for +he carefully preserved every handbill, ticket, or programme +for future reference. He could read a little +of it. The performances were varied, and covered the +time from six o’clock till midnight. But the young +officers preferred to take a general view of the premises. +It was an extensive garden, prettily and tastefully +laid out, with accommodations for concerts, +circus, and theatrical performances. In the centre +was a “beer garden,” with table and seats, for little +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_272" id="Page_272">[Pg 272]</a></span> +parties, who drank their beer and chatted, while a +band played in a kiosk. Near it was a bazaar, where +all kinds of fancy articles were arranged for sale, with +the attendant raffles and lotteries. Farther removed +from the centre was a theatre, consisting, however, of +only the stage, the audience seating themselves in the +open air. The performance, from six to seven, as +the captain read in his programme, was</p> + +<div class='center'> +<table border="0" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="0" summary=""> +<tr> <td align='center'><img src="images/r16.jpg" width="47" height="17" alt="R1. 6." title="" /> </td> + <td class="tdp"></td> + <td align='center'><span style="font-size: 1.2em;"><strong>Entrée gymnastique</strong></span></td> + <td class="tdp1"></td> + <td align='center'><img src="images/hermann.jpg" width="183" height="20" alt="Brodrene Hermann" title="" /> </td> </tr> +</table> +</div> + +<p>Or, in plain English, a gymnastic exhibition by the +brothers Hermann.</p> + +<p>In the circus there was a performance at half past +seven, such as one sees in the United States, and “Hr. +Wallet” was clown. At half past nine o’clock, another +exhibition was given in an enclosed building, to which +an extra admission fee was charged. At the theatre, +dancing by some “celebrated sisters” was in progress +at nine o’clock. A Russian mountain was in operation +during the whole evening. It was a railroad down +one inclined plane, and up another, and back over +the same track, a ride costing a few skillings. The +concert was continued at intervals during the entire +evening. The “<em>café chantant</em>” was in full blast after +nine o’clock, in two places, one of which was a small +hall, with a bar, and the other the interior of a Swiss +cottage, with a gallery surrounding it. In each of +these were tables, where the audience seated themselves, +and drank brandy, wine, beer, and milder +beverages. The singers, who are all females, stood +upon a stage, and were accompanied by a piano. +After one or two songs had been sung, one of the +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_273" id="Page_273">[Pg 273]</a></span> +singers passed around among the audience with a +plate to receive their contributions, each person generally +giving a small copper coin. This order was +continually repeated, and the money thus received is +the only salary of the performers, whose singing is +villanously vile, and whose character is worse than +their singing. A canal, extending from the sea, comes +up to Tivoli, and passes around an island. Boats are +to let here; and, indeed, there is no end to the variety +of amusements, and “all for nine cents,” as Joseph +had said half a dozen times during the afternoon to +his party, and a dozen times more during the evening. +At half past ten the students returned to the squadron, +for by that time they had seen all they desired.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_274" id="Page_274">[Pg 274]</a></span></p> +<h2>CHAPTER XVI.</h2> + +<p class="center"><strong>AN EXCURSION TO KLAMPENBORG AND ELSINORE.</strong></p> + + +<p>Peaks sat near the brig and read his book, which +he had procured from the librarian in anticipation +of a dull and heavy afternoon. Clyde sat in his +cage, watching the boatswain. The book was evidently +a very interesting one, for the reader hardly raised +his eyes from it for a full hour, and then only to bestow +a single glance upon the occupant of the ship’s +prison. The volume was Peter Simple, and the boatswain +relished the adventures of the hero. Once in a +while his stalwart frame was shaken by an earthquake +of laughter, for he had a certain sense of dignity which +did not permit him to laugh outright all alone by +himself, and so the shock was diffused through all his +members, and his body quaked like that of a man in +the incipient throes of a fever and ague fit. The magnanimous +conduct of O’Brien, who flogged Peter for +seasickness, simply because he loved him, proved to +be almost too much for the settled plan of the boatswain, +and it was with the utmost difficulty that he +restrained an outbreak of laughter.</p> + +<p>For a full quarter of an hour Clyde convinced himself +that he was entirely satisfied with the situation. +The brig was not a bad place, or, at least, it would +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_275" id="Page_275">[Pg 275]</a></span> +not be, if the boatswain would only leave the steerage +and allow the prisoner to be by himself. He wished +very much to try the carpenter’s saw upon the slats of +his prison. At the end of the second quarter of an hour, +the Briton was slightly nervous; the close of the third +found him rather impatient, and at the expiration of +an hour, he was decidedly provoked with Peaks for +staying where he was so long. When the stout sentinel +glanced at him, he flattered himself with a transitory +hope; but the boatswain only changed his position +slightly, and still appeared to be as deeply absorbed +as ever in the book.</p> + +<p>Clyde was disgusted, and emphatically angry at the +end of another half hour. The brig was a vile place, +and putting a free-born Briton into such a den was +the greatest indignity which had yet been offered to +him. It was even worse than ordering him to be +silent, or to go forward. It was an insult which required +both redress and vengeance. He rose from his +seat, and walked to the door of his prison, but with +his gaze still fixed upon his jailer. He had come to +the conclusion that, if he moved, Peaks would, at least, +look at him; but that worthy did not raise his eyes +from his book. Clyde took hold of the barred door +and began to shake it, making considerable noise by +the act. Peaks took no notice whatever of him, and +it seemed just as though the boatswain intended to insult +him by thus disregarding him. He shook the +door again with more violence, but did not succeed +in attracting the attention of his custodian. Then he +began to kick the door. Making a run of the length +of the brig, he threw himself against it with all the +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_276" id="Page_276">[Pg 276]</a></span> +force he could, hoping to break it down; but he might +as well have butted against the side of the ship. It +yielded a little, and rattled a great deal; but it was too +strong to be knocked down in any such manner.</p> + +<p>The prisoner was boiling over with wrath, as much +because Peaks did not notice him, as on account of the +indignity of his confinement. He kicked, wrenched, +and twisted at the door, till he had nearly exhausted +his own strength, apparently without affecting that of +the door. The boatswain still read, and still shook +with suppressed laughter at the funny blunders and +situations of Peter Simple. He had seen just such fellows +as Clyde in the brig; had seen them behave just +as the present prisoner did; and he had learned that +it was better to let them have their own way till they +were satisfied, for boys are always better satisfied when +they solve such problems for themselves.</p> + +<p>“I’m not going to stay in this place!” howled Clyde, +when he had wasted all his powers upon the obstinate +door.</p> + +<p>“No?”</p> + +<p>The boatswain happened to be at the end of a +chapter in his book, and he closed the volume, uttering +only the single negative participle, with the interrogative +inflection, as he glanced at his charge in the +brig.</p> + +<p>“No, I’m not!” roared Clyde, rousing from his +seat, upon which he had dropped in sheer exhaustion, +and throwing himself desperately against the unyielding +door. “I won’t stay in here any longer!”</p> + +<p>“Well, now, I thought you would,” added Peaks, +with the most provoking calmness.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_277" id="Page_277">[Pg 277]</a></span> +“I won’t!”</p> + +<p>“But it seems to me that you do stay there.”</p> + +<p>“I won’t any longer.”</p> + +<p>“Well?”</p> + +<p>“I’ll send for the British minister.”</p> + +<p>“Do.”</p> + +<p>“I won’t stand it any longer.”</p> + +<p>“Sit down, then.”</p> + +<p>Clyde dashed himself against the door again with +all the remaining force he had; but the boatswain, +apparently unmoved, opened his book again. It was +terribly lacerating to the feelings of the Briton to be so +coolly disregarded and ignored. Clyde had the saw, +but he had sense enough left to know that any attempt +to use it would attract the attention of his jailer, and +end in the loss of the implement, with which he could +remove a couple of the slats when left alone, or when +all hands were asleep at night. Finding that violence +accomplished nothing, he seated himself on his stool,—which, +however, was far from being the stool of repentance,—and +considered the situation more calmly. +He was in a profuse perspiration from the energy of +his useless exertions. Perhaps he was conscious that +he had made a fool of himself, and that his violence +was as impolitic as it was useless. In a few moments +he was as quiet as a lamb, and remained so for half +an hour, though his bondage was no less galling than +before.</p> + +<p>“Mr. Peaks,” said he, in the gentlest of tones.</p> + +<p>“Well, my lad, what shall I do for you?” replied +the boatswain, closing his book, and going to the door +of the brig.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_278" id="Page_278">[Pg 278]</a></span> +“I’m very thirsty, and want a glass of water. Will +you give me one?”</p> + +<p>“Certainly, my boy.”</p> + +<p>The boatswain passed a mug of water through the +bars, and Clyde drank as though he was really thirsty.</p> + +<p>“You have worked hard, and it makes you dry,” +said Peaks. “You can keep a mug of water in the +brig if you like.”</p> + +<p>“I will,” replied Clyde, as he placed the mug on +the deck, after the boatswain had filled it. “Can’t +you let me out, Mr. Peaks?”</p> + +<p>“Certainly I can.”</p> + +<p>“You will—won’t you?”</p> + +<p>“With all my heart.”</p> + +<p>“Do, if you please.”</p> + +<p>“On certain conditions, you know.”</p> + +<p>“What conditions?”</p> + +<p>“That you won’t attempt to run away. But, my +lad, it is only a few hours since you said the brig was +a very nice place, and you would grow gray in it before +you would promise not to leave when you got a +good chance.”</p> + +<p>“I hadn’t tried it, then. But I think it is an insult +to a fellow to put him in here. I would rather be +flogged outright.”</p> + +<p>“We don’t flog the boys.”</p> + +<p>“I would rather take a flogging, and have it done +with.”</p> + +<p>“That’s one of the reasons why we don’t do it. We +don’t want to have it done with till the boy means to +do about right. You are a smart boy, my lad; but +you have got a heap of bad blood in your veins, which +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_279" id="Page_279">[Pg 279]</a></span> +ought to be worked off. If you would only do your duty +like a man, you would be comfortable and happy.”</p> + +<p>“I never can stay in this ship.”</p> + +<p>“Why not?”</p> + +<p>“I don’t understand the duty.”</p> + +<p>“You will soon learn all the ropes in the ship, and +they will all come as handy to you as the key of your +own watch.”</p> + +<p>Clyde pulled out his watch, and glanced at the boatswain.</p> + +<p>“That’s a nice time-keeper you have, my lad; gold, +I suppose.”</p> + +<p>“Yes; it cost thirty pounds. Wouldn’t you like it?”</p> + +<p>“I?”</p> + +<p>“Yes.”</p> + +<p>“Well, I have a pretty good silver one, which +answers my purpose very well,” replied Peaks, smiling.</p> + +<p>“I’ll give it to you, if you will let me out, and permit +me to go on shore,” added Clyde, in an insinuating +tone.</p> + +<p>“Thank you, my lad, I don’t want it bad enough to +do that.”</p> + +<p>“You can sell it, you know. Or I will give you +thirty pounds in cash, if you prefer.”</p> + +<p>“I can’t afford to do it for that,” laughed the boatswain.</p> + +<p>“I’ll give you fifty pounds then,” persisted Clyde.</p> + +<p>“Can’t afford to do it for that, either.”</p> + +<p>“Say sixty, then.”</p> + +<p>“Say a hundred, if you like, my lad; and then say +a thousand. I can’t afford to do it for all the money +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_280" id="Page_280">[Pg 280]</a></span> +your mother is worth. You are on the wrong tack, +my lad. I can’t be bought at any price.”</p> + +<p>“I won’t ask you to let me out. If you will only +go on deck, and keep out of the way, I will manage +it all myself.”</p> + +<p>“No, no; sheer off, my hearty. When I have a +duty to do, I always mean to do it; and if it isn’t +done, it isn’t my fault. You can’t leave the ship with +my consent.”</p> + +<p>“I can’t stay here, I say. I should die in a month.”</p> + +<p>“Very well, die like a man, then,” said Peaks, +good-naturedly; for, though he could not be bought at +any price, he did not indulge in any righteous indignation +against his victim. “Learn your duty, and +then do it. There is plenty of fun going on in the +ship, and you will enjoy yourself as soon as you get +on the right tack. That’s the up and down of the +whole matter.”</p> + +<p>“I can’t take off my cap to these young squirts of +officers, and be ordered around by them. It isn’t in +an Englishman to do anything of the sort.”</p> + +<p>“Upon my word, I think it is in them. They make +first-rate sailors, and always obey their officers.”</p> + +<p>“Common sailors do; but I’m a gentleman.”</p> + +<p>“So am I; but I always obey orders,” replied the +democratic Peaks, warmly. “The officers of this ship +are required to behave like gentlemen, and give their +orders in a gentlemanly manner. If they don’t do it, +they are liable to be reduced. Do your duty, and you +may be an officer yourself.”</p> + +<p>Peaks continued for some time to give the prisoner +good advice, assuring him that he was no better than +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_281" id="Page_281">[Pg 281]</a></span> +the rest of the crew, and that it would not hurt him +any more than others to obey the orders of the officers. +But it was sowing seed in stony ground, and Clyde, +finding he could make nothing out of the honest boatswain, +decided to await his time with what patience +he could command, which, however, was not much. +Peaks was permitted to follow Peter Simple in his +stirring career during the rest of the afternoon. The +crew returned from Tivoli at eleven in the evening, +and soon the ship was quiet, with only an anchor +watch, consisting of an officer on the quarter-deck, and +two seamen on the forecastle.</p> + +<p>Clyde’s supper was given to him in his prison, and +a bed made up for his use. He kept awake till all the +students came on board, and while he was waiting for +the crew to slumber, he dropped asleep himself, and +did not wake till all hands were called in the morning. +He was vexed with himself for his neglect, and afraid +that the carpenter would miss the saw, and remember +where he had left it. He was determined to keep +awake the next night, and make his escape, even if he +was obliged to swim to the land.</p> + +<p>After breakfast, all the students went on shore for +an excursion to Klampenborg and Elsinore. In the +custom-house enclosure, a procession of four in a rank +was formed, to march to the railroad station, which +was near the Tivoli Garden. The students were generally +rather fond of processions, not at home, but in +the streets of foreign cities. The parade was quite +imposing, when every officer and seaman wore his +best uniform. They had been carefully taught to +march, and Professor Badois had organized a band of +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_282" id="Page_282">[Pg 282]</a></span> +eight pieces, which performed a few tunes very well. +Unfortunately, on the present occasion, the band was +not available, for Stockwell, the cornet player, and +Boyden, the bass drummer, belonged to the absent crew +of the second cutter, and the procession moved to the +sterling notes of the drum and fife.</p> + +<p>On parades of this kind, the first and second pursers +acted as the fleet staff of the commodore, who +would otherwise have been “alone in his glory,” and +these two useful officers seemed like “odds and ends” +in any other position. As this procession was frequently +formed, and marched through the streets of +various cities, the order is given to satisfy the reasonable +curiosity of the reader.</p> + +<p class="center"> + Music.<br /> + The Commodore,<br /> + And Staff of the Fleet.<br /> + The Captain of the Young America.<br /> + The Four Masters.<br /> + The Four Midshipmen.<br /> + The First Lieutenant.<br /> + The First Part of the Starboard Watch,<br /> + Consisting of Eighteen Seamen.<br /> + The Second Lieutenant.<br /> + The Second Part of the Starboard Watch.<br /> + The Third Lieutenant.<br /> + The First Part of the Port Watch.<br /> + The Fourth Lieutenant.<br /> + The Second Part of the Port Watch.<br /> + The Captain of the Josephine.<br /> + The Four Masters.<br /> +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_283" id="Page_283">[Pg 283]</a></span> + The First Lieutenant.<br /> + The First Part of the Starboard Watch,<br /> + Consisting of Eight Seamen.<br /> + The Second Lieutenant.<br /> + The Second Part of the Starboard Watch.<br /> + The Third Lieutenant.<br /> + The First Part of the Port Watch.<br /> + The Fourth Lieutenant.<br /> + The Second Part of the Port Watch.<br /> + The Captain of the Tritonia.<br /> + The Four Masters.<br /> + The First Lieutenant.<br /> + The First Part of the Starboard Watch,<br /> + Consisting of Eight Seamen.<br /> + The Second Lieutenant.<br /> + The Second Part of the Starboard Watch.<br /> + The Third Lieutenant.<br /> + The First Part of the Port Watch.<br /> + The Fourth Lieutenant.<br /> + The Second Part of the Port Watch.</p> + +<p>Sometimes the order was varied by placing all the +officers at the head of the procession, except the lieutenants +in command of sections, as,—</p> + +<p class="center"> + The Commodore and Staff.<br /> + The three Captains.<br /> + Three ranks of Masters.<br /> + One rank of Midshipmen.</p> + +<p>But keeping all the officers and seamen of each vessel +together, as in the first order, was generally preferred. +Of course the ranks were not always full, as on the +present occasion; but even when the full band was at +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_284" id="Page_284">[Pg 284]</a></span> +the head of the column, there were enough for four +full ranks in each half-watch of the ship, and two +ranks in those of the other vessels. The students had +practised so much that they marched exceedingly well, +and being aligned according to their height, the effect +was very fine. The Copenhageners left their occupations, +and hastened to the doors and windows of their +houses and shops to see the procession; and even the +king and royal family were spectators at the palace +windows, as the column moved through Frederiksplads. +As it passed the Royal Hotel, Mr. and Mrs. +Kendall, with Dr. Winstock and Joseph, were entering +a carriage, in which they intended to ride to Klampenborg, +in order to see more of the country. At the +railroad station, the officers and seamen took seats in +the third-class carriages, which were two stories high, +the upper as well as the lower one having a roof. The +distance to Klampenborg is eight and a half English +miles, and the fare is sixteen skillings, or nine cents, +third class; twenty-four skillings, or thirteen and a +half cents, second class; and thirty-two skillings, or +eighteen cents, first class. The third-class compartments +are clean and neat, but there are no cushions +on the seats. An aisle extends through the middle +of them, but the seats are placed in pairs, on each +side, so that half the passengers are compelled to ride +backwards. In about half an hour the train arrived +at Klampenborg.</p> + +<p>Paul Kendall’s party drove first to the summer residence +of Mr. Melchoir, which was in the suburbs of +the city, near the sea-shore. The house was a very +pretty one, with a neat garden, not unlike the little +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_285" id="Page_285">[Pg 285]</a></span> +country places one sees in the vicinity of the large +cities of the United States. Joseph rang the bell, and +stated the errand of the party to the servant. They +were shown up one flight of stairs, where the girl +knocked at the door, which was immediately opened +by Hans Christian Andersen, and the tourists were +ushered into a plainly-furnished room, with a few engravings +on the walls. On a table were the writing-materials +of the great author, and Paul looked with +interest at the little pile of letter sheets, closely written +over, and the unfinished one, on which the ink was not +yet dry.</p> + +<p>Mr. Andersen’s face was covered with a smile as +he greeted the party. Dr. Winstock had met him +before, and stated the fact.</p> + +<p>“O, I’m very glad to see you again,” said the author, +grasping the doctor’s hand with both of his own.</p> + +<p>“My young friend here, and his lady, have both +read all your books, and desired to see you even more +than to look upon the beautiful works of your great +sculptor.”</p> + +<p>“Ah, you are very kind,” added Mr. Andersen, +again grasping the doctor’s hand with both of his +own.</p> + +<p>Then, darting nervously to Paul, he seized his hand +in the same manner.</p> + +<p>“This is Captain Paul Kendall, commander of the +yacht Grace,” added Dr. Winstock.</p> + +<p>“I am so pleased to see you!” said Mr. Andersen.</p> + +<p>“I have read all your books with the most intense +pleasure.”</p> + +<p>“O, you are too kind, Captain Kendall,” replied the +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_286" id="Page_286">[Pg 286]</a></span> +genial author, smiling all over his face, and once more +grasping his hand as before.</p> + +<p>“Mrs. Kendall,” added Paul, presenting Grace.</p> + +<p>“I am so pleased to see you! You are very kind to +take so much trouble to visit me.”</p> + +<p>“Indeed, sir, you are very kind to permit us to +trouble you, when you are so busy,” continued Paul.</p> + +<p>“O, I have plenty of time to see my good friends.”</p> + +<p>“In America we love your books, and they are in +all our libraries and most of our houses.”</p> + +<p>“You are so kind to speak so pleasantly of my +works!” replied Mr. Andersen, grasping Paul’s hand +again.</p> + +<p>“We value them very highly.”</p> + +<p>The conversation continued for a few moments, in +which Paul and the doctor expressed the high appreciation +of the reading public of the great writer’s +works. At least a dozen times more he grasped the +hand of the speaker with both his. Mr. Andersen is a +tall gentleman, with a thin face,—the features of which +are far from handsome,—and iron-gray hair. His +countenance is always covered with smiles when he +speaks, and his whole manner is child-like and simple. +He is full of the love of God and of man, which seems +to shine out in his face, and to be the interpretation of +his ever-present smile. His dress was scrupulously +neat and nice in every detail.</p> + +<p>The doctor told him about the Academy squadron, +of which he had read a brief notice in the newspapers, +and invited him to visit the ship, which he promised +to do, on the following day. The party took their +leave of him, and continued on the way to Klampenborg. +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_287" id="Page_287">[Pg 287]</a></span> +The road was on the margin of the sea, and +was lined with small country houses, with pleasant +gardens. It was a lovely region, with an occasional +large villa, and even a summer palace or two. All +along this road, called the Strandway, are small and +large houses of entertainment, on the sea-side, each +one of which has a bathing establishment on a very +small and simple scale.</p> + +<p>“Here is Charlottelund Castle, in this park,” said +Joseph, as they passed what seemed to be merely a +grove, with a rather dilapidated fence.</p> + +<p>“It was formerly the country-seat of the Landgrave +of Hesse, I believe,” added Dr. Winstock.</p> + +<p>“Yes, sir; but it is now the summer residence of +the crown prince. He comes out here in June.”</p> + +<p>“These carriages are called ‘privateers,’” continued +the guide, pointing to several vehicles like a small +omnibus with no top. “They formerly went by the +name of ‘coffee-mills,’ because they made a noise like +those machines.”</p> + +<p>Constantia Tea-Garden, where the Copenhageners +go to spend the evening in hot weather, and several +fishing villages, were passed, and then the carriage +reached the Deer Park, where the students had already +arrived, which is a very extensive enclosure, with +a few roads extending through it. A portion of it is +covered with groves, and it contains about a thousand +deer, which are quite tame, and may be seen grazing +in herds on the gentle slopes. There is nothing very +attractive in the park, though it is much frequented by +the people from the city. Neither the roads nor the +grounds are well kept, and the government “turns an +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_288" id="Page_288">[Pg 288]</a></span> +honest penny” by the letting of it out for the pasturage +of horses. On some rising ground, which Denmarkers +call a hill, is a large, square, barn-like building, +known as the “Hermitage,” which was built by +Christian VI. for a hunting lodge. This park and +that at Charlottelund contain thousands of acres of +excellent land, which is almost useless, and which the +government cannot afford to keep in condition as +pleasure-grounds. They would make thousands of +farms, and thus increase the productive industry and +the revenues of the nation, if they could be cut up and +sold. Royalty is an expensive luxury, which a small +kingdom like Denmark cannot afford to support.</p> + +<p>Near the entrance to the park is the garden proper +of Klampenborg, where music is provided on summer +evenings, and refreshments sold. What is called a +Norwegian house is erected in the middle of the +grounds, which contains a bar and private rooms, and +is surrounded by tables and chairs, where the pleasure-seekers +may sit and enjoy their beer and the music. +A small fee for admission is paid at the gate, where +the ticket-seller is kept honest by the aid of the “control-mark.” +Near this garden is a hotel built for a +water-cure establishment, though it is now mainly +used as a summer boarding-house. Close by it is a +village of small cottages, devoted to the same use, +with concert-rooms and bathing-houses in abundance. +This place is a favorite resort of the Copenhageners in +summer,—in fact, their Newport or Long Branch. +For a couple of hours the students wandered through +the park and gardens. The railroad station is very +near the entrance, where, indeed, the whole beauty of +the place is concentrated.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_289" id="Page_289">[Pg 289]</a></span> +The railway to Klampenborg is a branch of the one +which extends from Copenhagen to Elsinore, and in +another hour the entire party were transported to the +latter place. This town has nine or ten thousand inhabitants, +and is located on a basin of the Sound, +nearly land-locked by natural and artificial dikes. +The Danish name of the place is Helsingör, and is +the scene of Shakespeare’s tragedy of Hamlet. The +excursionists visited the cathedral, which is the principal +object of interest in Elsinore, and contains several +very old tombs. Near the town, and on the +shore of the Sound, is the Castle of Kronberg, erected +in 1580. It is a large, oblong, Gothic structure, built +of a whitish stone. It contains a chapel and other +apartments. Those occupied by the commandant +were the prison of Caroline Matilda, who was confined +here for a high crime, of which she is now universally +believed to be innocent.</p> + +<p>Under the castle are casemates for a thousand men, +one of which is said to be the abode of <em>Holger +Danske</em>, who was the Cid Campeador of Denmark, +and the hero of a thousand legends. When the state +is in peril, he is supposed to march at the head of the +armies, but never shows himself at any other time. +A farmer, says the story, happened into his gloomy +retreat by accident, and found him seated at a stone +table, to which his long white beard had grown. The +mystic hero demanded the hand of his visitor, who +was afraid to trust flesh and blood in the grasp of one +so mighty, and offered the iron bar used to fasten the +door. Holger Danske seized it, and squeezed it so +hard that he left the print of his fingers on the iron.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_290" id="Page_290">[Pg 290]</a></span> +“Ha, I see there are still <em>men</em> in Denmark!” said +he, with a grim smile of satisfaction.</p> + +<p>Near the castle are a couple of natural ponds, small +and round, which are called “Holger Danske’s Spectacles.”</p> + +<p>“This is where Hamlet lived, I suppose,” said Captain +Lincoln.</p> + +<p>“Where Shakespeare says he lived,” replied Dr. +Winstock.</p> + +<p>“But I was told his grave was here.”</p> + +<p>“Perhaps Hamlet divided himself up, and occupied +a dozen graves, for I think you may find a dozen of +them here,” laughed the doctor. “A resident of this +vicinity had what was called the grave of Hamlet in +his grounds, which proved to be a nuisance to him, +on account of the great number of visitors who came +to see it. In order to relieve himself of this injury to +his garden, he got up another ‘grave of Hamlet,’ in +another place, which he proved to be the authentic +one.”</p> + +<p>“It is too bad to trifle with history in that manner,” +protested the captain.</p> + +<p>“There is no history about it, Lincoln. His residence +in this part of Denmark is all a fiction. Shakespeare +makes terrible blunders in his allusions to this +place; for there is no ‘eastern hill,’ no ‘dreadful +summit of the cliff,’ or anything of the sort. Hamlet +lived in Jutland, not in Seeland, about four centuries +before Christ, and was the son of a pirate chief, +instead of a king, who, with his brother, was governor +of the province. He married the daughter of the +king, who was Hamlet’s mother. The chief was +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_291" id="Page_291">[Pg 291]</a></span> +murdered by his brother, who married the widow, +and was then the sole governor. Hamlet, in order to +avenge his father’s death, feigned madness; but his +uncle, suspecting the trick, sent him to England, with +a message carved in wood, requesting the king to +destroy him. During the voyage, he obtained the +wooden letter, and altered it so as to make it ask for +the killing of the two men, creatures of his uncle, who +had charge of him, which was done on their arrival. +According to the style of romances, he married the +king’s daughter, and afterwards returned to Jutland, +where, still pretending insanity, he contrived to surprise +and slay his uncle. He succeeded his victim as +governor, and married a second time, to a queen of +Scotland, and was finally killed in battle. The main +features of the tragedy correspond with the incidents +of the story, but the locality is not correct.”</p> + +<p>The party walked to Marienlyst, a pleasant watering-place, +which contains a small royal chateau. The +view from this place, as from the tower of Kronberg, +is very beautiful. At four o’clock the party took the +steamer, and arrived at Copenhagen before dark.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_292" id="Page_292">[Pg 292]</a></span></p> +<h2>CHAPTER XVII.</h2> + +<p class="center"><strong>TO STOCKHOLM BY GÖTA CANAL.</strong></p> + + +<p>The Wadstena, in which the absentees had taken +passage at Gottenburg, was a small steamer, +but very well fitted up for one of her size. Forward +was the saloon, in which meals were taken, and saloon +passengers slept. Aft was the cabin, on each side of +which were state-rooms, called “hütte.” They were +not made with regular berths, but had a sofa on each +side of the door, on which the beds were made up at +night, with a wash-stand between them. Between +this cabin and the forward saloon the main deck was +raised about three feet, so as to cover the engine and +boilers. On each side of this higher deck were more +“hütte,” which were the best rooms on board. The +hurricane-deck, over the after cabin, was the favorite +resort of the passengers.</p> + +<p>It was two o’clock in the morning, and the independent +excursionists were tired and sleepy. They +had taken first-class tickets, and two of them had been +assigned to each “hütte.” As soon as they went on +board, therefore, they retired, and most of them slept, +in spite of the fleas and other vermin that revelled +in their banquet of blood. None but very tired boys +could have slumbered under such unfavorable circumstances, +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_293" id="Page_293">[Pg 293]</a></span> +and it is a great pity that a steamer otherwise +so neat and comfortable should be given up to the +dominion of these sleep-destroying insects.</p> + +<p>At seven the party turned out, anxious to see the +scenery on the banks of the canal. The steamer was +still in the river, a stream not more than a hundred +and fifty feet wide, with occasional rapids, which are +passed by canals, with locks in them. The scenery +was pleasant, with rocky hills on each side. Schooners +and other craft were continually met, loaded with lumber +and other articles from the lakes. The scene was +novel and interesting, and though the boys gaped +fearfully, they enjoyed the view.</p> + +<p>Presently one of the women, who do all the work +of stewards and waiters, appeared with coffee on +deck, passing the cups to the passengers first, and +then filling them. The coffee was delicious, served +with the whitest of sugar and the richest of cream, +with some little biscuits. It waked the boys up, and +seemed to make new beings of them.</p> + +<p>“How’s this, Sanford?” said Scott.</p> + +<p>“First rate! That’s the best coffee I ever drank in +my life,” replied the coxswain.</p> + +<p>“Is it a free blow?”</p> + +<p>“I don’t know. How is it, Ole?”</p> + +<p>“No; you pay at the end of the trip for all you +have had,” replied the waif.</p> + +<p>“But who keeps the account?” asked Scott.</p> + +<p>“Nobody,” laughed Ole. “On the boats from +Christiania every passenger tells what he has had, +and pays for it.”</p> + +<p>“Do they think everybody is honest?”</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_294" id="Page_294">[Pg 294]</a></span> +“Certainly; everybody is honest.”</p> + +<p>“Not much,” added Sanford, shaking his head. +“Of course you don’t pretend to be honest, Norway.”</p> + +<p>“But I do.”</p> + +<p>“You didn’t take a sovereign from me, and another +from Burchmore—did you?”</p> + +<p>“I take what you give me.”</p> + +<p>“It may be honest, but I don’t see it in that light, +Norway.”</p> + +<p>“Never mind that now, Sanford,” interposed Burchmore. +“He sold out the last time for the public +good.”</p> + +<p>“Do you expect to find the ship in Stockholm when +we get there?” asked Scott.</p> + +<p>“Of course I do,” replied Sanford. “We shall not +get there till Tuesday.”</p> + +<p>“Then our cruise is almost ended.”</p> + +<p>“I suppose so. I have been trying hard to join the +ship ever since we left her at Christiansand,” continued +the coxswain, solemnly.</p> + +<p>“Over the left,” chuckled Scott.</p> + +<p>“Honor bright! I don’t believe in running away.”</p> + +<p>“Nor I; but Laybold and I have put our foot into +it. I suppose we shall have to spend a week in the +brig, and make love to Peaks while the rest of the fellows +are seeing Russia.”</p> + +<p>“You will find some way to get out of the scrape.”</p> + +<p>“I don’t know. We have lost Copenhagen and +Denmark already, and I suppose we shall not see +much of Russia.”</p> + +<p>“We will help you out.”</p> + +<p>“I don’t think you can do it,” added Scott, who +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_295" id="Page_295">[Pg 295]</a></span> +had evidently come to the conclusion that running +away “did not pay.”</p> + +<p>The steamer stopped, and the captain informed +the party that passengers usually walked three miles +around the series of locks, by which they were enabled +to see the Falls of Trollhätten. The carrying +of the canal around these falls was the most difficult +problem in engineering in the construction of the +work. It is cut through the solid rock, and contains +sixteen locks. The passage of the steamer occupies +an hour and a half, which affords ample time for the +voyagers to see the falls. The party immediately +landed, and were promptly beset by a dozen ragged +boys, who desired to act as guides, where no such +persons are needed. Not one of them spoke a word +of English; but they led the way to the path, each one +selecting his own victims, and trusting to the magnanimity +of the passengers for their pay. A walk, +covered with saw-dust, has been made by some public-spirited +persons, and the excursion is a very pleasant +one.</p> + +<p>The entire fall of the river is one hundred and +twelve feet; but it is made in four principal cataracts, +and three smaller ones. The scenery in the vicinity +is rather picturesque, and at one point the path goes +through a grove, on the banks of a rivulet, where the +water dashes over large cobble-stones, with an occasional +pretty cascade. The walk leads to various +eligible spots for examining the falls and the rapids. +On the way, the tourist passes <em>Kungsgrottan</em>, or +King’s Grotto. It is a hole in the solid rock, in the +shape of half a globe, on the sides of which are inscribed +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_296" id="Page_296">[Pg 296]</a></span> +the names of the various sovereigns of Sweden, +and other distinguished persons who have visited the +spot. Near the village of Trollhätten, which contains +several founderies and saw-mills, the finest part of the +falls is seen by crossing an iron foot-bridge, at the +gate of which stands a woman, who collects a toll of +fifty öre for the passage to the little island.</p> + +<p>“I don’t think much of these falls,” said Scott, as +he returned from the island.</p> + +<p>“I think they are rather fine,” replied Laybold.</p> + +<p>“You could cut up the rapids of Niagara into about +two hundred just such falls, to say nothing of the big +cataract itself,” added Scott. “It is pleasant, this +walk along the river, but you can’t call the Falls of +Trollhätten a big thing.”</p> + +<p>“Of course they don’t compare with Niagara.”</p> + +<p>“Certainly not.”</p> + +<p>The party walked through the yards of the manufactories, +and came to a small hotel on the bank of +the canal. The place looked very much like many +American villages. The canal steamer did not appear +for half an hour, and some of the boys strolled about +the place. The regiment of ragged boys who had +followed the tourists, or led the way, pointing out the +various falls and other points of interest in an unknown +tongue, begged lustily for the payment for their services. +One of them, who had taken Scott and Laybold +under his protection, was particularly urgent in his +demands.</p> + +<p>“Not a red, my hearty,” replied Scott. “I didn’t +engage you, and I shall not pay you.”</p> + +<p>The boy still held out his hand, and said something +which no one of the party could understand.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_297" id="Page_297">[Pg 297]</a></span> +“Exactly so,” replied Scott. “You told me the +names of all the places, but I did not understand a +word you said. I say, my lad, when did you escape +from the rag-bag?”</p> + +<p>The boy uttered a few words in Swedish.</p> + +<p>“Is that so?”</p> + +<p>The boy spoke again.</p> + +<p>“Stick to it, my hearty; but I don’t believe a word +of it.”</p> + +<p>“What does he say, Scott?”</p> + +<p>“He says the moon is made of green cheese. +Didn’t you, my lad?”</p> + +<p>The boy nodded, and spoke again.</p> + +<p>“It is a hard case, Young Sweden; but I can’t do +anything for you.”</p> + +<p>“What’s a hard case, Scott?” asked Laybold.</p> + +<p>“Why, he says he has six fathers and five mothers, +and he has to support them all by guiding tourists +round the falls.”</p> + +<p>“Get out!”</p> + +<p>“I am afraid they don’t have roast beef for dinner +every day.”</p> + +<p>“Here’s the steamer,” added Laybold.</p> + +<p>The boy became more importunate as the time +came to go on board, but Scott was obstinate.</p> + +<p>“Now, out of my way, my lad. Give my regards +to your six fathers and five mothers, and I’ll remember +you in my will; but I won’t give you a solitary +red now, because I don’t like the principle of the +thing. I didn’t employ you, and I didn’t want you. +I told you so, and shook my head at you, and told +you to get behind me, Satan, and all that sort of thing; +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_298" id="Page_298">[Pg 298]</a></span> +and now I’m not going to pay you for making a +nuisance of yourself. On the naked question of +charity, I could do something for you, on account +of your numerous fathers and mothers. As it is, +good by, Sweden;” and Scott went on board of the +steamer.</p> + +<p>The boat started again, and soon the bell rang for +breakfast. The boys hastened to the forward saloon, +where they found two tables spread. At a sideboard +was the Swedish lunch, or snack, of herring, sliced +salmon, various little fishes, sausage, and similar delicacies, +with the universal decanter of “finkel,” flanked +with a circle of wine glasses. The tourists partook +of the eatables, but most of them were wise enough to +avoid the drinkable. The Swedish bread, which is a +great brown cracker, about seven inches in diameter, +was considered very palatable. Ordinary white bread +is served on steamers and at hotels, and also a dark-colored +bread, which looks like rye, and is generally +too sour for the taste of a foreigner. The breakfast at +the tables consisted of fried veal, and fish, with vegetables, +and all the elements of the snack. When the +boys had finished, one of the women handed Scott a +long narrow blank book.</p> + +<p>“Thank you, marm; I am much obliged to you,” +said he. “Will you have the kindness to inform me +what this is for?”</p> + +<p>The woman laughed, and answered him in her native +tongue.</p> + +<p>“Precisely so,” added Scott.</p> + +<p>“What does she say?” asked Sanford.</p> + +<p>“She wants me to write a love letter in this book +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_299" id="Page_299">[Pg 299]</a></span> +to her; but as she is rather ancient, I shall decline in +your favor, Sanford.”</p> + +<p>“Don’t do it, old fellow! Face the music.”</p> + +<p>“Not for Joseph!”</p> + +<p>“What did she say, Ole?” inquired Sanford.</p> + +<p>“She said you were to keep your account in that +book,” replied the interpreter.</p> + +<p>“Are we to keep our own reckoning?”</p> + +<p>“Yes; every one puts down in this book what he +has had.”</p> + +<p>“That means you, Burchmore. You are the cashier +for the party.”</p> + +<p>“How many fellows had coffee this morning?” +asked the cashier, as he took the book.</p> + +<p>“All of them, of course.”</p> + +<p>Burchmore made the entries for the coffee and the +breakfasts of the whole party.</p> + +<p>“Well, that’s one way to do the thing,” said Scott. +“Every man his own book-keeper. I’ll bet everybody +doesn’t charge what he has had.”</p> + +<p>Ole was requested to ask the woman about the matter. +She said the Swedes were honest, but the waiters +were required to see that everybody paid for what +he had had before leaving the steamer. The having of +this book is certainly a better plan than that of the +Norwegian steamers, by which the passenger, if he +means to be honest, is compelled to recollect all he +has had in a passage of thirty hours.</p> + +<p>The Wadstena continued on her course through a +rather flat country, just coming into the greenness and +beauty of the spring time, till she came to Wenersberg, +a town of five thousand inhabitants, which is largely +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_300" id="Page_300">[Pg 300]</a></span> +engaged in the lumber and iron trade. The boat +stopped there a short time, and the party had an opportunity +to examine the lake craft at the wharves; +but, after seeing them, it was difficult to believe they +were not in some New England coast town. The +steamers, however, were very different, all of them +being very short, to enable them to pass through the +locks in the canal, and most of them having the hurricane +deck forward and aft, to afford sufficient space +for the cabins. All of them were propellers.</p> + +<p>The Wadstena started again, the bridges opening to +permit her passage. The great Wenern Lake lay before +them, which is the third in size in Europe, Onega +and Ladoga alone exceeding it in extent. It is about +a hundred miles long by fifty in breadth, very irregular +in shape, and portions of it are densely crowded +with islands. Its greatest depth is three hundred and +sixty feet near the Island of Lurö, but a considerable +part of it is very shallow, and difficult of navigation. +It is one hundred and forty-five feet above the level of +the Baltic. Thirty rivers flow into it, and sometimes +cause it to rise ten feet above its ordinary level. But +the Göta River is its only outlet, and is always supplied +with an abundant volume of water. The wind +was fresh when the Wadstena steamed out upon the +broad expanse, and the lake had a decidedly stormy +aspect.</p> + +<p>“Will you be seasick?” asked the captain, as the +little steamer began to bob up and down with a very +uncomfortable jerk.</p> + +<p>“Seasick!” laughed Scott. “We are all sailors, +sir, and we don’t intend to cave in on a fresh-water +pond.”</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_301" id="Page_301">[Pg 301]</a></span> +“But the lake is very rough to-day.”</p> + +<p>“If your little tub can stand it, captain, we can.”</p> + +<p>“I am very glad, for some people are very sick on +this part of the passage. It is sometimes very bad, +the worst we have in the whole trip.”</p> + +<p>“How long are we on the lake?” asked Scott.</p> + +<p>“About seven hours; but not all of it is so bad as +this. We go among the islands by and by.”</p> + +<p>Doubtless the Wenern Lake fully maintained its +reputation on the present occasion, though none of the +young salts were sick. The boat stood to the northward, +and the short steamer and the short chop sea +would have made the passage very trying to landsmen. +Nothing but the distant shores were to be seen, and +the monotony of the passage was the only disagreeable +circumstance to our tourists. For the want of +something better to do, they went below, and, lying +down on the sofas in their state-rooms, went to sleep +without much difficulty, for the red-backs and fleas +kept shady in the daytime. The boys were accustomed +to being “rocked in the cradle of the deep;” +but at the expiration of three hours, the heavy motion +ceased, and the change waked them. Going on the +hurricane deck again, they found the steamer was +among the islands, which were generally low, rocky, +and covered with firs and pines. A crooked channel +was carefully buoyed off, and the boat was threading +its tortuous way with no little difficulty.</p> + +<p>Presently the Wadstena made a landing at a rude +pier on an island where only a rough shanty was in +sight. Several row-boats at the wharf indicated that +passengers came to this station from other islands. +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_302" id="Page_302">[Pg 302]</a></span> +Again the steamer went out upon the open lake, and +soon after entered another group of islands, among which +she made a landing at a small town. Passing over +another open space, the entrance to the canal was discovered, +marked by two low light-houses, in the form +of the frustum of a pyramid. As the Wadstena entered +a lock, the captain told the party they might +take a walk if they pleased, as there were several locks +to pass in the next three miles. This was a grateful +relief to the voyagers, and they gladly availed themselves +of the opportunity. The country was a dead +level, with an occasional small farm-house, and with +many groves and forests. But the walk was interesting, +and the boys would gladly have continued it +longer; but at the last lock of the series, the gate-man +told them, through Ole, that they must wait here in +order to go on board, for the steamer could not make +a landing again for several miles. The party remained +on the hurricane deck till the cold and the darkness +drove them below. Turning in at an early hour, they +slept as well as the vermin would allow, until six +o’clock the next morning, when the steamer was +approaching the Wettern Lake, the second in size in +Sweden. The boat was on a broad arm of the lake, +called the Viken, for the canal is built only across +the narrowest section of country, between two natural +bodies of water.</p> + +<p>The Wettern Lake is ninety miles long and fifteen +miles wide, surrounded by hills, from which sudden +gusts of wind come, producing violent squalls on the +water. This lake is noted for big trout. After crossing +the Wettern, the steamer approached Wadstena, +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_303" id="Page_303">[Pg 303]</a></span> +which contains an ancient church and convent, and a +castle built by Gustavus Vasa, and often occupied by +his family. Ten miles farther brought the steamer to +Motala, which contains several iron founderies and +manufactories. Many iron steamers and steam engines +are built at this place. The scenery on this +portion of the canal is very beautiful, though not +grand. Going through another portion of the artificial +canal, the boat enters the Roxen Lake, perhaps the +most beautiful in Sweden, and makes a landing at +Linköping. There are half a dozen towns with this +termination in the country, as Norrköping, Söderköping, +Jönköping, the last two syllables being pronounced +like <em>chepping</em>; as, Lin-chep-ping.</p> + +<p>Leaving the Roxen Lake, the steamer passes through +more canals into an arm of the Baltic, and then into +the sea itself, voyaging among a thousand small +islands, stopping at Söderköping and Nyköping, important +commercial and manufacturing towns. Night +came, and our tourists did not stay up to see the lights +on the way. The steamer leaves the Baltic, and passing +another piece of canal, enters the waters of the Mäler +Lake, seventy-five miles long, and containing fourteen +hundred islands. The boys were up in season to +see the beauties of this lake. Many of the islands rise +to a considerable height above the water, and are so +thick that one hardly believes he is sailing on a large +lake. For quiet beauty and “eternal stillness,” the +Mäler can hardly be surpassed. In the middle of the +forenoon, the spires of Stockholm were to be seen, and +the tourists were all attention. From the lake the +city presents a fine appearance. Indeed, Stockholm, +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_304" id="Page_304">[Pg 304]</a></span> +seen from either of its water approaches, is hardly +excelled in beauty by any city in Europe.</p> + +<p>The Wadstena made her landing at the Island of +Riddarholm. As the party were not burdened with +any baggage, they decided to walk to the hotel. Ole +inquired the way to the Hotel Rydberg, where they +had agreed to go; and crossing a bridge to the largest +of the three islands of the city, called Stadeholm, they +arrived at the palace, beyond which is the quay. Between +this island and the main land, on which the +greater portion of the town is built, is the passage from +the Baltic to the Mäler Lake, and in the middle of it +is the Island of Helgeandsholm, or Holy Ghost’s Island, +with two bridges connecting it with either side. On +it are the king’s stables, and a semicircular garden, +improved as a <em>café</em>, with a handsome face wall on the +water side.</p> + +<p>“This isn’t bad,” said Scott, as the party paused to +look down into the garden.</p> + +<p>“Not at all,” replied Sanford. “I suppose they +have music here in the evening, and it would be a +capital place to loaf.”</p> + +<p>“See the steamers!” exclaimed Laybold, as a +couple of the miniature craft, which abound in the +waters of Stockholm, whisked up to the quay.</p> + +<p>“A fellow could put half a dozen of them into his +trousers pocket,” laughed Scott. “We must go on a +cruise in some of them, as soon as we get settled.”</p> + +<p>“Well, where’s the hotel?” asked Sanford.</p> + +<p>It was in plain sight from the bridge, which they +crossed to the Square of Gustavus Adolphus, on which +the hotel faced.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_305" id="Page_305">[Pg 305]</a></span> +“Good morning, young gentlemen. I am happy to +see you,” said Mr. Blaine, the head steward of the +ship, who was the first person to greet them as they +entered the hotel.</p> + +<p>“Ah, Mr. Blaine!” exclaimed Sanford, his face +glowing with apparent satisfaction. “I am delighted to +see you; for I was afraid we should never find the +ship.”</p> + +<p>“Were you, indeed? Well, I had the same fear +myself. I have been looking for you ever since the +ship sailed.”</p> + +<p>“We have done our best to find the ship, Mr. +Blaine,” added Sanford.</p> + +<p>“O, of course you have; but of course, as you didn’t +find her, you were not so babyish as to sit down and +cry about it.”</p> + +<p>“Certainly not; still we were very anxious to find +her.”</p> + +<p>“Mr. Peaks says you came down from Christiania +before he did.”</p> + +<p>“Yes, sir.”</p> + +<p>“And you were so anxious to find the ship, that +you took a train to the interior of the country, expecting, +no doubt, to come across her on some hill, or possibly +on some of these inland lakes,” continued Mr. +Blaine.</p> + +<p>“We were looking for the ship’s company. We +met Scott and Laybold, who were going into the interior, +and we concluded to join them, as they wanted +to find their shipmates,” replied Sanford, who was +now not entirely confident that “the independent excursion +without running away” was a success.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_306" id="Page_306">[Pg 306]</a></span> +“Ah! so you have picked up those two young gentlemen, +who ran away,” added the head steward, +glancing at Scott and Laybold.</p> + +<p>“Not exactly, sir; they picked us up,” answered +the coxswain.</p> + +<p>“I think it was a mutual picking up, and we picked +each other up,” laughed Scott. “We knew that Sanford +and his crew were extremely anxious to find the +ship’s company, and if we joined them we should be +sure to come out right.”</p> + +<p>“Exactly so,” laughed Mr. Blaine. “Let me see; +after our first day’s run on shore, by some mistake you +neglected to come on board at night, with the others.”</p> + +<p>“That was the case exactly. The fact is, we were +too drunk to go on board with the others.”</p> + +<p>“Drunk!” exclaimed Mr. Blaine.</p> + +<p>“Such was our melancholy condition, sir,” added +Scott, shaking his head. “We were invited, in a restaurant, +to drink ‘finkel,’ and not knowing what finkel +was, we did drink; and it boozed us exceedingly.”</p> + +<p>“You are very honest about it, Scott.”</p> + +<p>“We are about everything, sir. We slept at a hotel, +and when we went down to the wharf to go on board, +we learned that the ship’s company had gone to Trolldoldiddledy +Falls. As we felt pretty well, we thought +we would take a train, see a little of the inside of Sweden, +and meet the ship’s company at Squozzlebogchepping.”</p> + +<p>“Where’s that?” asked Mr. Blaine.</p> + +<p>“I can’t give you the latitude and longitude of the +jaw-breaker, but it was at the junction of the two railways, +where the party came down from the canal. +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_307" id="Page_307">[Pg 307]</a></span> +We were sure we should find our fellows there, but +the Swedish figures bothered us, and we made a mistake +in the hour the train was due.”</p> + +<p>“But the Swedish figures are the same as ours,” +suggested the head steward.</p> + +<p>“Are they? Well, I don’t know what the matter +was, except that we were five minutes too late for the +train. That’s what’s the matter.”</p> + +<p>“How very unfortunate it was you lost that train!”</p> + +<p>“It was, indeed; I couldn’t have felt any worse if I +had lost my great-grandmother, who died fifty years +before I was born. These honest fellows felt bad, +too.”</p> + +<p>“Of course they did.”</p> + +<p>“We took the next train to Gottenburg; but when +we arrived, the ship had sailed for Copenhagen, which +I was more anxious to see than any other place in +Northern Europe.”</p> + +<p>“And for that reason you came on to Stockholm.”</p> + +<p>“No, sir; you are too fast, Mr. Blaine. Your consequent +does not agree with the antecedent. There +was no steamer for Copenhagen for a couple of days.”</p> + +<p>“There was a steamer within an hour after you +reached Gottenburg in that train, and an hour before +the sailing of the canal steamer; and Mr. Peaks went +down in her,” said Mr. Blaine.</p> + +<p>“We didn’t know it.”</p> + +<p>“Certainly you did not.”</p> + +<p>“We knew of no steamer till Monday, and we were +afraid, if we went in her, that we should be too late to +join the ship in Copenhagen; and with heroic self-denial, +we abandoned our fondly-cherished hope of +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_308" id="Page_308">[Pg 308]</a></span> +seeing the capital of Denmark, and hastened on to +Stockholm, so as to be sure and not miss the ship +again. These honest fellows,” said Scott, pointing to +Sanford and his companions, “agreed with us that +this was the only safe course to take.”</p> + +<p>“I see that you struggled very violently to join +your ship, and I only wonder that such superhuman +efforts should have failed.”</p> + +<p>“They have not failed, sir,” protested Scott. “The +ship will come here, and we will join her then, or +perish in the attempt.”</p> + +<p>“Are you not afraid some untoward event will +defeat your honest intentions?”</p> + +<p>“If they are defeated it will not be our fault.”</p> + +<p>“No, I suppose not; but whom have you there?” +inquired the head steward, for the first time observing +Ole, who had pressed forward to hear Scott’s remarks. +“Ole?”</p> + +<p>“Yes, sir; that’s the valiant Ole, of Norway,” replied +the joker.</p> + +<p>His presence was satisfactorily explained by the +coxswain.</p> + +<p>“Why did you desire to leave the ship, Ole? Didn’t +we use you well?” asked Mr. Blaine.</p> + +<p>“Very well indeed, sir; but I was bashful, and did +not wish to see some people in Christiansand,” replied +the waif.</p> + +<p>“What people?”</p> + +<p>Ole evaded all inquiries, as he had a dozen times +before, and declined to explain anything relating to +his past history. Mr. Blaine said he had heard the +party had taken the canal steamer, and he immediately +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_309" id="Page_309">[Pg 309]</a></span> +proceeded to Stockholm by railroad. He at once +telegraphed to Mr. Lowington at Copenhagen, that +he had found all the absentees, and asked for instructions.</p> + +<p>“Here’s a go, and the game is up,” said Sanford, in +a whisper, when he met Stockwell alone.</p> + +<p>“That’s so; what will he do with us?”</p> + +<p>“I don’t know; I rather like this mode of travelling. +But we are caught now.”</p> + +<p>“Perhaps not; we may find some way out of it. +According to Blaine’s cue we are to be regarded as +runaways. If that is the case, I don’t join the ship +this summer,” said Stockwell, very decidedly.</p> + +<p>“Nor I either,” added Sanford.</p> + +<p>Before dark, Mr. Blaine received a despatch from +the principal, directing him to take the next train +to Malmö, which is the town in Sweden opposite Copenhagen. +The head steward did not communicate +its contents to his charge that night, but he called all +of them at four o’clock the next morning, and by good +management on his part, they were on the train +which left Stockholm at six o’clock. At Katherineholm, +where the party ate an excellent breakfast, Mr. +Blaine unhappily missed three of his company.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_310" id="Page_310">[Pg 310]</a></span></p> +<h2>CHAPTER XVIII.</h2> + +<p class="center"><strong>UP THE BALTIC.</strong></p> + + +<p>The excursionists of the squadron slept soundly +after their trip to Elsinore, and Clyde Blacklock, +true to the promise he had made to himself, kept +awake to watch his chances to escape. Not a sound +was to be heard in the ship, and the intense silence +was even more trying to the prisoner in the brig than +the noise and bustle of the whole crew when awake. +Ryder, the fourth lieutenant, and two seamen had the +anchor watch on deck. Each officer served two hours, +and was required at the stroke of the bell, every half +hour, to walk through the steerage, where no light was +permitted after nine o’clock.</p> + +<p>Clyde took the saw from its hiding-place under the +stairs, and commenced work on one of the slats. The +instrument was very sharp, but the noise it made +promised to betray him, and he was obliged to use it +with extreme caution. Bracing the slat with one +shoulder, he worked the saw very slowly, so that the +wood should not vibrate. The process was very slow, +and twice he was obliged to conceal his saw and lie +down on the bed at the approach of the officer of the +watch. After working more than an hour, he succeeded +in cutting off one of the slats, just far enough +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_311" id="Page_311">[Pg 311]</a></span> +above the deck to avoid the nails with which it was +secured. But it was fastened at the top as well as at +the bottom, and when he pulled it in to wrench it from +its position, it creaked horribly, and he was obliged to +labor with it another half hour, before he could pull +it in far enough to permit his exit. In the middle of +the operation he was obliged to restore it partly to its +position, and lie down again, to escape the observation +of the officer of the anchor watch.</p> + +<p>His care and patience were finally successful, though, +if the sleepers around him had not been very tired, +some of them must have been disturbed even by the +little noise he made. The removal of the single slat +gave him an opening of about nine inches, which was +narrow even for him; but he contrived to work himself +through it. Putting the slat back into its original +position, and wedging it down with a copper, so that +the means of his escape might not readily be seen, he +crept carefully forward to the ladder under the forecastle, +where he paused to consider the means by +which he should escape from the vessel. He began +to realize that this was a more difficult matter than +getting out of the brig. He knew that the anchor +watch consisted of an officer and two seamen.</p> + +<p>While he was thinking of the matter, eight bells +struck; and he was aware that the watch was changed +at this hour. Retiring to the kitchen to wait for a +more favorable moment, he heard the two seamen +come down the ladder to call the relief. As they entered +one of the mess-rooms, he ran up the ladder, +and concealed himself under the top-gallant forecastle. +In a few moments he heard the relief on deck, and +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_312" id="Page_312">[Pg 312]</a></span> +from his hiding-place saw the officer on the quarter-deck +with a lantern in his hand. The two seamen +took their places on the top-gallant forecastle, where +they could see the entire deck, and any boat or vessel +that approached the ship.</p> + +<p>Clyde did not regard the situation as very hopeful. +The night was chilly, and he did not feel at all inclined +to swim ashore, which he had intended to do, +as a last resort. The boats were all hoisted up at the +davits, as if to provide for just such cases as his own. +He listened with interest to the conversation of the +watch above him; but he could not identify their +voices, and was unable to determine whether it was +safe for him to address them. In fact he was unable +to determine upon anything, and bell after bell struck +without finding him any better prepared to make a +move. At four bells, or two o’clock in the morning, +the watch was relieved again, and Clyde remained in +the same unsettled state of mind. But when the two +seamen went below to call the relief, he changed his +position, crawling into the waist, where he disposed +himself under the lee of the rail. Over his head was +the fourth cutter, one of the smallest of the boats.</p> + +<p>Clyde could see the dark form of the officer walking +to and fro on the quarter-deck, and his presence +was not favorable to any movement. He found the +cleats where the falls of the boat were made fast, and +he was considering the practicability of casting them +off, letting the cutter drop into the water, and then +sliding down on a rope. The officer of the anchor +watch seemed to be the only obstacle in his way. He +began to experiment with the falls. Casting off one of +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_313" id="Page_313">[Pg 313]</a></span> +them, he carefully let the rope slip over the cleat till +he had lowered the bow of the cutter about two feet. +He repeated the operation upon the stern fall. He let +off the rope so gradually that the noise did not attract +the attention of any of the watch.</p> + +<p>Five bells struck, and the officer descended to the +steerage. While he was absent, Clyde dropped each +end of the boat about four feet more, and then coiled +himself away until the officer had returned to his station. +But it was nearly daylight, and he was compelled to +hurry on with his work. Little by little he let out the +falls, till the fourth cutter floated in the water. When +the officer went below, at six bells, he climbed upon +the rail, and slid down on the bow fall into the boat. +Casting off the falls, he pushed the cutter astern of the +ship, and for the first time began to feel as though he +were free. He was afraid to use an oar, lest the noise +should attract the attention of the watch on deck. He +felt that he had managed his escape with exceeding +cleverness, and was unwilling to risk anything now in +the moment of success. The wind carried the boat +clear of the ship, and he lay down in the stern sheets, +so that if the officer on the quarter-deck discovered +the cutter, he might suppose no one was in her.</p> + +<p>He had occupied this position but a moment before +he heard a rushing noise near him, and, raising his +head, discovered a small schooner, under full sail, +headed directly upon him. He had hardly time to +stand up before the bow of the vessel was within his +reach.</p> + +<p>“Hallo!” shouted he, in terror, for the thought of +being carried under the keel of the schooner was appalling.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_314" id="Page_314">[Pg 314]</a></span> +But the cutter was crowded aside by the vessel, and +Clyde sprang upon her deck, while his boat went +astern of her.</p> + +<p>Too late, the schooner luffed up, and Clyde seated +himself on the rail to catch his breath. Two men +came to him, and spoke in Norwegian.</p> + +<p>“I speak English,” replied Clyde.</p> + +<p>“You are English?” said the captain.</p> + +<p>“Yes; I don’t speak anything else.”</p> + +<p>“I speak English,” replied the skipper, as he went +back to the helm, and Clyde followed him.</p> + +<p>“Where are you bound?” asked the runaway.</p> + +<p>“To Stockholm.”</p> + +<p>“You are Danish, I suppose.”</p> + +<p>“No, Norwegian.”</p> + +<p>“All the same.”</p> + +<p>“What shall I do with you?”</p> + +<p>“I will go to Stockholm with you, and pay my passage, +if you like,” added Clyde, who wished to get as +far as possible from the ship.</p> + +<p>“You shall, if you like; or you shall work, if you +please. I lose a young sailor, and I want another, to +work in his place.”</p> + +<p>“No; I will go as a passenger, or not at all,” replied +Clyde, very decidedly.</p> + +<p>“What you do in a boat so late in the night?” asked +the skipper.</p> + +<p>“I was going on shore to find a steamer for Stockholm. +I will pay you twenty species for my passage,” +added the runaway.</p> + +<p>“You are very kind to pay so much. You shall +have my berth; but it will be long time to Stockholm +in my vessel.”</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_315" id="Page_315">[Pg 315]</a></span> +“No matter; I am satisfied.”</p> + +<p>“I shall pick up the boat you lose?”</p> + +<p>“No; never mind the boat,” answered Clyde, impatiently, +as he glanced at the ship.</p> + +<p>The captain questioned him about the boat more +particularly; but the fugitive gave such answers as he +pleased. Though the skipper was very rough and +savage to the two men who formed his crew, he +treated his passenger at first with much consideration. +The little cabin of the schooner was a nasty hole, and +if Clyde had not been very sleepy, he could hardly +have closed his eyes there; but before the vessel was +out of sight of Copenhagen, his slumber was deep and +heavy.</p> + +<p>The shout of the fugitive when he was in danger of +being run down had been heard by the officer on the +quarter-deck of the Young America. He saw the +collision, and discovered the cutter when it went astern +of the vessel; but he did not suspect that it belonged +to the ship. The schooner filled away on her course +again, after she had luffed up, and the boat was adrift. +He deemed it his duty to secure it before it was stove +by some early steamer from Malmö, or elsewhere, and +calling the two seamen, he directed them to lower the +fourth cutter. But the fourth cutter was already lowered, +and the officer began to think that the boat adrift +was the missing one. The third cutter, therefore, was +used, and when the two seamen had pulled off in her, +the officer went below and called Peaks.</p> + +<p>The boatswain took his lantern, and went to the +brig, as soon as he was told that the fourth cutter was +adrift. The bird had flown. The door was secure, +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_316" id="Page_316">[Pg 316]</a></span> +and all the slats were apparently in their place; but +the appearance of a small quantity of saw-dust indicated +where the breach had been made. A little pressure +forced in the sawn slat, and Peaks understood +why the prisoner had only desired to be left alone.</p> + +<p>“Were you all asleep on deck?” asked Peaks of +the officer.</p> + +<p>“No, sir; I have not been asleep on duty,” replied +Beckwith, the officer.</p> + +<p>“Didn’t you see him lower the boat?”</p> + +<p>“Of course I did not.”</p> + +<p>“I don’t see how it was done, then,” added Peaks. +“But where is the prisoner?”</p> + +<p>“I don’t know. I suppose he went on board that +small schooner that run down the cutter.”</p> + +<p>“Where is she?”</p> + +<p>Beckwith pointed to a sail headed to the south-east, +which was just visible in the faint light of the early +morning.</p> + +<p>“He is out of our reach for the present,” said Peaks, +in utter disgust, as he descended the steps to the main +cabin.</p> + +<p>Mr. Lowington was informed of the escape of Clyde, +but no steamer could be obtained at that early hour to +chase the schooner, and the matter was permitted to +rest as it was. When all hands turned out in the +morning, a strict investigation was made; but no one +who had served on the anchor watch was able to give +any information. No one had seen the boat lowered, +and no one had heard the saw. Peaks went on shore, +and ascertained that the Norwegian schooner Rensdyr +had sailed at an early hour. She had cleared for +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_317" id="Page_317">[Pg 317]</a></span> +Stockholm, and was doubtless on her way there. The +principal was so much interested in the fate of Clyde, +or rather in his reformation, that he determined to follow +up the fugitive. The English steamer Newsky, +from London to Stockholm, was then in port, and +when she sailed that day, Peaks was sent in her to intercept +the runaway on his arrival at Stockholm.</p> + +<p>After breakfast, Mr. Andersen came on board, inspected +the ship, and witnessed some of the evolutions +in seamanship, which included the manning of the +yards in honor of his visit. At the invitation of Paul +Kendall he went on board of the Grace, and took a +sail up the Sound, dining on board, and returning in +the afternoon. The students again went on shore, and +visited the Rosenberg Palace, an irregular structure of +red brick, with a high peaked roof and four towers. +Connected with it is an extensive and beautiful garden, +adorned with statues. The palace was built for +Christian IV., in 1604, but is no longer a royal residence, +being filled with various national collections of +arms, medals, and antiquities, including many historical +mementos of kings and other great men of Denmark. +Among them are the saddle, bridle, and caparisons, +the sword and pistols, presented by King Christian +IV. to his eldest son at his marriage. They are +adorned with diamonds, pearls, and gold, and cost a +million francs in Paris.</p> + +<p>In the afternoon the students marched to the Palace +of Frederiksberg, whose park is a favorite resort of +the people of the city. The building contains nothing +worth seeing; indeed, portions of it have been rented +for the use of private families; but the garden is beautifully +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_318" id="Page_318">[Pg 318]</a></span> +laid out with kiosks, bridges over the winding +canal, on which float a great number of white swans, +with little islands, studded with groves and pleasant +grassy slopes. The palace stands on the only eminence +near Copenhagen. On pleasant days, especially on +Sundays, this park is filled with family picnics, little +parties bringing their own lunch, and spending the +day in these delightful groves.</p> + +<p>During the remainder of the day the students wandered +over the city, each seeking what pleased him +most. When they went on board the vessels, they +were entirely satisfied with what they had seen of Copenhagen, +and were ready to visit some other city. +Very early the next morning, Mr. Blaine, with all but +three of the absentees, came on board. The head +steward told his story, and Scott and Laybold told +their story; the former, as usual, being the spokesman. +The wag told the whole truth, exactly as it was; +that they were ashamed to come on board while so +tipsy, and had missed the train at the junction.</p> + +<p>“Have you drank any finkel since?” asked the principal.</p> + +<p>“No, sir; not a drop. One glass was enough for +me,” replied Scott.</p> + +<p>“And you, Laybold?”</p> + +<p>“No, sir.”</p> + +<p>“You may both return to your duty,” added the +principal.</p> + +<p>Both were astonished at being let off so easily; but +Mr. Lowington was satisfied that they spoke the truth, +and had not intended to run away. The others were +also ordered to attend to their duty, but with the intimation +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_319" id="Page_319">[Pg 319]</a></span> +that their conduct would be investigated at +the return of Sanford and Stockwell, who, with Ole, +had left the party at Katherineholm.</p> + +<p>The signal for sailing was flying on board of the +Young America, and at seven o’clock the squadron +was under way, continuing the voyage “up the Baltic.” +No notice seemed to be taken of the absence +of Sanford and Stockwell, but everybody believed that +the principal knew what he was about. The wind +was tolerably fresh from the west-south-west, and the +squadron made rapid progress through the water, logging +ten knots all day. The students watched with +interest the villages on the coast of Denmark, with +their sharp, red roofs, and the swarms of fishing-boats +moored in front of them. The shores of Sweden +were in sight all the time, and at three o’clock in +the afternoon land was also seen on the starboard +bow. But the masters, who were constantly watching +the chart, were not at all astonished, though the +seamen were.</p> + +<p>“What land is that, Scott?” asked Laybold.</p> + +<p>“That? Why, don’t you know?”</p> + +<p>“I’m sure I don’t. I know Germany is over there +somewhere, but I didn’t expect to run into it so near +Sweden.”</p> + +<p>“That’s Gabogginholm.”</p> + +<p>“Is it in Germany?”</p> + +<p>“No; it’s an island, at least a hundred and fifty +miles from Germany. The Baltic is rather a big +thing out here.”</p> + +<p>“How do you remember those long names, Scott?”</p> + +<p>“What long names?”</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_320" id="Page_320">[Pg 320]</a></span> +“Such as the name of that island. I couldn’t recollect +such a word ten minutes.”</p> + +<p>“Nor I either. I know them by instinct.”</p> + +<p>“What did you say the name of the island is?”</p> + +<p>“Gastringumboggin.”</p> + +<p>“That isn’t what you said before.”</p> + +<p>“I’ve forgotten what I did say it was. You musn’t +ask me twice about a name, for I say I can’t remember,” +laughed Scott.</p> + +<p>“You are selling me.”</p> + +<p>“Of course I am; and you go off cheaper than any +fellow I ever saw before. I haven’t the least idea +what the land is, except that it must be an island +not less than a hundred and fifty miles from Prussia.”</p> + +<p>“That’s Bornholm,” said Walker, a seamen, who +had heard the name from the officers. “It’s an island +twenty-six miles long and fifteen wide, belongs to +Denmark, and has thirty-two thousand inhabitants, +and a lot of round churches on it. That’s what the +fellows on the quarter-deck say.”</p> + +<p>“Precisely so,” replied Scott. “You have learned +your lesson well. What is the principal town on +that island?”</p> + +<p>“I don’t know,” answered Walker.</p> + +<p>“Stubbenboggin,” said Scott.</p> + +<p>“Who told you so?”</p> + +<p>“My grandmother,” laughed the wag, as he turned +on his heel, and walked away.</p> + +<p>Towards night the wind subsided, and the squadron +was almost becalmed; but a light breeze sprang up +after dark, and in the morning the ship was off the +southern point of Oland, an island ninety miles long +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_321" id="Page_321">[Pg 321]</a></span> +by ten wide, and well covered with forests. On the +narrow strait which separates it from the main land +is Calmar, a town of historic interest, in Sweden. +At noon the southern point of Gottland was seen, +and Scott insisted upon calling it “Gabungenboggin,” +though the real name was soon circulated. It is +eighty miles long by thirty-three wide, and contains +fifty-four thousand inhabitants. Wisby is the only +town. The island is noted for its beautiful climate, +which makes it a pleasant resort for summer tourists.</p> + +<p>At sunrise on the following morning, the ship leading +the squadron was approaching the islands which +cover the entrance to the harbor of Stockholm. Pilots +were taken by the several vessels, and the fleet entered +the archipelago, through which it was to sail for thirty +miles. At first the openings were very wide, and not +much of the shore could be seen; but soon the distances +grew less, and the shores were studded with +villages and fine residences. The little steamers—some +of them not so large as the ship’s first cutter—began +to appear; and at eight o’clock the Young +America let go her anchor between Staden and Skeppsholm, +off the quay near the palace, which was crowded +with steamers.</p> + +<p>“Here we are, Laybold,” said Scott, when the sails +had been furled, and every rope coiled away in its place.</p> + +<p>“That’s so. What’s that big building on the shore?”</p> + +<p>“That’s the Slottenboggin,” laughed Scott.</p> + +<p>“No, you don’t! You can’t sell me again with +your boggins.”</p> + +<p>“I’ll bet half a pint of salt water it is the king’s +palace.”</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_322" id="Page_322">[Pg 322]</a></span> +“Very likely it is; and here is a fine building on +the other side.”</p> + +<p>“That must be the Wobbleboggin.”</p> + +<p>“No, it isn’t.”</p> + +<p>“Perhaps it isn’t; but twig these little steamers,” +added Scott, pointing to one of the snorting miniature +boats that plied across the arm of the sea opposite the +quay. “The pilot and engineer, and a boy to take the +fares, seem to be the officers, crew, and all hands.”</p> + +<p>“And in some of them all hands are boys.”</p> + +<p>The boats seemed to contain nothing but the engine +and boiler, which were in a compact mass, without +covering. All around them were seats. Forward of +the engine was a little steering-wheel, hardly more +than a foot in diameter, at which the pilot—often a +boy—was seated.</p> + +<p>“I want a complete view of the city,” said Captain +Lincoln, at this moment coming into the waist with +the surgeon and Norwood. “I think I can get it +from the main cross-trees.”</p> + +<p>“I am too stiff to go aloft,” replied Dr. Winstock; +“but I commend your plan.”</p> + +<p>“I’m with you,” added Norwood, as he followed +the captain up the main rigging.</p> + +<p>From this lofty position on the cross-trees the two +officers obtained a good idea of the situation of the +city. The three islands which form the central portion +of the city lay in the strait leading to the Mäler Lake. +The north and south suburbs were on each side of +it. Skeppsholm, Castellholm, and the Djurgărden—Deer +Garden—were other islands, lying nearer the +Baltic. The finest portion of the city seemed to be +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_323" id="Page_323">[Pg 323]</a></span> +the northern suburbs. While they were studying the +panorama of the place, all hands were called to lecture, +and they hastened to their places in the steerage. +Professor Mapps was at his post, with the map on +the foremast.</p> + +<p>“Sweden is called <em>Sverige</em> by the natives; La<em> +Suède</em> by the French; <em>Schweden</em> by the Germans; +<em>La Svezia</em> by the Italians; and <em>Suecia</em> by the Spaniards. +It contains one hundred and sixty-eight thousand +square miles—a territory equal in extent to the six +New England States, New York, New Jersey, Pennsylvania, +and Delaware united. Its population is a little +over four millions—about the same as that of the +State of New York. It is nearly a thousand miles +long from north to south, with an average breadth of +two hundred miles. By far the greater portion of it +is very sparsely settled, for it extends from fifty-five +degrees of north latitude up to the arctic regions. It +contains no important rivers, though its large lakes +and arms of the sea are valuable as avenues of navigation. +Over eighty lakes are mentioned.”</p> + +<p>The instructer described the Wenern and Wettern +Lakes, and the Göta Canal, which passes through +them.</p> + +<p>“Sweden is an agricultural country, and its principal +manufactures are lumber and iron. It has six +hundred and thirty-eight miles of railway, and the +steamers which you see at the quay, mostly of iron, +and built in Sweden, ply to all parts of the country.</p> + +<p>“The average of the temperature in Stockholm is +forty-two degrees, or twenty-five degrees for winter, +and sixty-two degrees for summer. From what you +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_324" id="Page_324">[Pg 324]</a></span> +have already seen of Sweden, I think you will consider +it very like New England. The interior has +about the same physical features, and you will see +there similar houses, barns, and fences.</p> + +<p>“The government is a limited monarchy, based on +the constitution of 1809, and since amended. The +king must be a Lutheran. He has an absolute veto on +the acts of the legislature. The Diet, or Parliament, +consists of two houses, the upper of which is composed +of one hundred and twenty-seven members, or one for +every thirty thousand inhabitants. The lower house +consists of one hundred and eighty-eight members, +fifty-five of whom are elected by the towns, and the +rest by the rural districts, at the rate of one for every +forty thousand people. Property qualifications are +required for either house, and all members must be +Protestants. They are paid a salary of three hundred +and thirty-five dollars of our money, and their travelling +expenses, for the session of four months.</p> + +<p>“I have incidentally spoken of the history of Sweden +in connection with that of Norway and Denmark. +The kingdom was founded by Odin, and for a long +period the history of the country is a record of the +wars with Norway and Denmark, and it was finally +conquered by Margaret, and by the Union of Calmar +the three kingdoms were consolidated in 1397. It +became a Christian nation early in the eleventh century. +Sweden was doubtless the first anti-slavery +power; for, during the reign of Birger II., about 1300, +a law against the sale of slaves was enacted, with +the declaration that it was ‘in the highest degree +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_325" id="Page_325">[Pg 325]</a></span> +criminal for Christians to sell men whom Christ had +redeemed by his blood.’</p> + +<p>“In 1520 Gustavus Ericsson excited a rebellion +against Christian II., of Denmark, who had murdered +his father and many other Swedes. This revolution +was successful three years later, and its leader made +king, under the title of Gustaf I., often called Gustavus +Vasa, or Wasa. He was succeeded by his son, +and the throne continued in his family; but the next +notable sovereign was Gustaf II., or Gustavus Adolphus. +His grandfather, Gustavus Vasa, had established +the Protestant religion in Sweden; but his +nephew, Sigismond, who had been elected king of +Poland, and had become a Catholic, succeeded to the +throne. Endeavoring to change the established religion, +he was deposed, and the succession changed. +This caused a war between Sweden, and Russia, and +Poland. Gustavus was only eighteen when he came +to the throne, with this war bequeathed to him. He +was full of energy, and defeated his enemies on all +sides. Austria was the leader of the Catholic party +in Europe, which was striving to restore the papal +supremacy. Gustavus Adolphus held a similar relation +to the Protestant party. He was engaged in the +Thirty Years’ War, and won many decisive victories. +He captured Munich, and overran Bavaria, but was +finally killed in the battle of Lützen, in 1632. By +his prowess and skill he raised Sweden to the rank of +one of the first kingdoms of Europe.</p> + +<p>“He was succeeded by his daughter, Christina, then +only six years old. She reigned but seven years +after she became of age, abdicating in favor of her +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_326" id="Page_326">[Pg 326]</a></span> +cousin Charles X. She died in Rome, after a dissolute +and shameful life, and was interred in St. Peter’s +Church. Charles was at war with the Danes during +his brief reign, and achieved the daring military feat +of crossing the Great and Little Belts on the ice, which +enabled him to dictate his own terms of peace with +the Danes. The Swedes consider him one of their +greatest kings. His son, Charles XI., followed him, +and ruled for thirty-seven years. After a brief period +of peace, another war with Denmark ensued, which +resulted to the ultimate advantage of Sweden. This +king contrived to obtain from the Diet the gift of +absolute power, which, in the hands of his son and +successor, Charles XII., nearly ruined the nation. +Russia, Poland, and Denmark combined to rob him +of a considerable portion of his kingdom, and Charles +XII., at the age of sixteen, displayed an energy and a +skill far beyond his years. He conquered a peace +with Denmark first, and then turned his attention to +the rest of his enemies, whom he overwhelmed and +subdued. With nine thousand men he defeated a +Russian army of forty thousand, under Peter the Great, +at Narva. He vanquished the armies of Poland and +Saxony, and attempted the conquest of Russia, but +was utterly defeated in the battle of Pultowa, and +escaped into Turkish territory, where he remained for +five years. Here he brought about a war between +Turkey and Russia, and the army of the former shut +up that of Peter the Great in the Crimea. The lady +who was afterwards Catharine I. bribed the grand +vizier with all her jewels to allow the Russians to +escape, and this event utterly ruined the hopes of the +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_327" id="Page_327">[Pg 327]</a></span> +monarch of Sweden. Finally the Turks drove him +from their country, and, after various vicissitudes, he +arrived in his own, and was killed, in 1718, at Frederikhald, +in Norway. While he was away, his enemies +had been appropriating his territory, and Sweden +was reduced to a second-class power.</p> + +<p>“The Diet elected Ulrica Eleonora, sister of Charles, +queen, who resigned in favor of her husband, Fredrik +I. Another war with Russia followed, and +Sweden lost more of her territory. Adolf Fredrik +succeeded to the throne in 1751, who was elected by +the Diet. Still another war with Russia was carried +on during his reign. His son, Gustaf III., with the +aid of his soldiers, increased the powers of the crown; +but he was assassinated at a ball, in 1792, and his son, +Gustaf Adolf IV., came to the throne. His policy +involved the nation in a war with the allies, and he +lost Finland and Pomerania. He was so unpopular +that he was compelled to abdicate, and his uncle, +Charles XIII., was raised to the throne in 1809. He +had no children, and the Prince of Holstein-Augustenburg +was elected as his successor; but he was assassinated, +and one of Napoleon’s generals, Bernadotte, +was chosen crown prince, and in 1818 he succeeded +to the throne as Charles XIV. His reign was a successful +one, and his efforts to secure Norway to his +adopted country made him popular even before he +was king. He espoused the cause of the allies against +Napoleon, and was well cared for by them when the +affairs of Europe were finally settled.</p> + +<p>“His son Oscar was his heir, and came to the +throne at the death of his father in 1844. He was +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_328" id="Page_328">[Pg 328]</a></span> +followed by his son, Charles XV., the present king, +in 1859.</p> + +<p>“The army organization is similar to that of Denmark, +and about one hundred and fifty thousand men +are available for service. The navy contains four +monitors on the American plan, which were invented +by John Ericsson, a Swede, two iron-clad gunboats, +twenty-one steamers, and sixteen sailing vessels, besides +a great number of floating batteries, and other +stationary craft. Although only about six thousand +sailors are actually in the navy, nearly thirty thousand +can be had in case of war.”</p> + +<p>The professor finished his lecture, and the students +hastened on deck, to see more of the sights which +surrounded them.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_329" id="Page_329">[Pg 329]</a></span></p> +<h2>CHAPTER XIX.</h2> + +<p class="center"><strong>THE CRUISE IN THE LITTLE STEAMER.</strong></p> + + +<p>“What’s the use, Stockwell?” said Sanford, as +the absentees seated themselves on the train +for Malmö, under the charge of the head steward. +“Blaine got his despatch from the principal last night, +but he didn’t say a word to us till this morning. +He’s playing a sharp game.”</p> + +<p>“That’s so,” replied Stockwell. “He don’t mean +to trust us out of sight again.”</p> + +<p>“Don’t say a word to any fellow,” whispered the +coxswain. “You and I will fight it out on our own +hook.”</p> + +<p>“I understand. It is plain enough that Blaine +regards us as runaways, and I suppose the principal +will do the same.”</p> + +<p>“Very likely; and when we get to Russia, all we +shall have to do will be to count our fingers in the +steerage, while the rest of the fellows are seeing the Russians,” +continued Sanford, who now appeared to regard +“the independent excursion without running away” +as a failure. “We shall not even see anything more +of Stockholm. I don’t like the idea.”</p> + +<p>“Well, what are you going to do about it?” asked +Stockwell.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_330" id="Page_330">[Pg 330]</a></span> +“At the first chance we will leave this train, and +make our way back to Stockholm,” whispered Sanford. +“There is a steamer to St. Petersburg twice +a week, and we have money enough to carry us +through.”</p> + +<p>“Right; I am with you.”</p> + +<p>“We will take Ole, if you like, to do the talking +for us.”</p> + +<p>“I don’t object.”</p> + +<p>The train stopped at Katherineholm about half past +nine. The boys had taken nothing but the Swedish +early breakfast of coffee and a biscuit, and the head +steward allowed them to have a more substantial +meal, each paying for himself. They entered the restaurant, +where, on a large table in the centre of the +room, were great dishes of broiled salmon and veal +cutlets, with high piles of plates near them. Each +passenger helped himself at these dishes, and then +seated himself at one of the little tables. When he +had finished his salmon, he helped himself to veal +cutlets; beer and coffee were served by the waiters. +Sanford and Stockwell hurried through the meal, and +went to the counter where the woman received payment. +She asked them some question and they +were obliged to call Ole, to know what she said. She +asked if they had had beer or coffee, which was extra, the +meal being one and a half rix dalers. She gave them +a tin check; for at this place they seemed to be sharper +than the Swedes usually are, and the check was to +enable them to get out of the restaurant. A man at +the door received it, and no one was allowed to pass +without it; and thus none could leave without paying +for the meal.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_331" id="Page_331">[Pg 331]</a></span> +“Finished your breakfast, Ole?” said Sanford, +carelessly.</p> + +<p>“Yes; and that salmon was very good.”</p> + +<p>“First rate. Come with us, Ole,” added the coxswain, +as he led the way out of the restaurant.</p> + +<p>The trio entered the station, and as no one followed +them, they left by the front door. Dodging behind the +buildings, they soon cleared the station. Taking the +public road, they walked for half an hour at a rapid +pace, and then halted to consider the situation. The +train had gone, for they had heard its departure; but +whether Mr. Blaine had gone or not was an open +question.</p> + +<p>“What next?” said Sanford, as he seated himself at +the side of the road.</p> + +<p>“Take the train back to Stockholm,” replied Stockwell.</p> + +<p>“Perhaps Blaine did not go on, after he missed us.”</p> + +<p>“Of course he did. But whether he did or not, +the train has gone, and he cannot take us to Copenhagen. +If we find him at the station, why, we took a +little walk, and lost the train, you know.”</p> + +<p>“That’s played out,” replied Sanford. “We have +missed the train too many times, already. What time +does the next one return to Stockholm?”</p> + +<p>“I don’t know. Let’s go back to the station.”</p> + +<p>This course was adopted, and on their arrival they +learned that they could return to Stockholm at half +past two in the afternoon. The man in charge said +that the gentleman with the young men had been looking +for them. Sanford replied, through Ole, that +they had lost the train, but would return to Stockholm, +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_332" id="Page_332">[Pg 332]</a></span> +and start again the next morning. After dining +in the restaurant, the runaways—as they certainly +were now, if not before—departed, and arrived at +their destination in about three hours. They immediately +went to the office on the quay, and learned that a +steamer would leave for St. Petersburg at two o’clock +on Friday morning.</p> + +<p>“Can we engage places now?” asked Sanford,—for +the clerk in charge spoke English.</p> + +<p>“Certainly.”</p> + +<p>“We will take three places in one room,” added +the coxswain.</p> + +<p>“Have you passports?” asked the clerk.</p> + +<p>“No, sir.”</p> + +<p>“We cannot sell you tickets then.”</p> + +<p>“Not without passports?” exclaimed Sanford, appalled +at this new difficulty.</p> + +<p>“No; and passports must be <em>visé</em> by the Russian +consul before we can issue a ticket.”</p> + +<p>“We are down then,” added the coxswain. “My +passport is on board of the ship.”</p> + +<p>“So is mine,” added Stockwell.</p> + +<p>“And I never had any,” said Ole.</p> + +<p>The party left the steamer’s office, and were unable +to devise any means of overcoming the obstacle. They +went to the Hotel Rydberg again, and consulted the +porter, who had been very kind to them before. +This functionary is entirely different in European +hotels from those of the same name in the United +States. He stands at the entrance, usually dressed in +uniform, to answer all inquiries of guests, and to do +all that is required of the clerks in American hotels. +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_333" id="Page_333">[Pg 333]</a></span> +He assured the anxious inquirers that, even if they +got into Russia, their passports would be immediately +demanded, and that no one could remain in any city +there over night without one. The American minister +in Stockholm would give them the required +documents.</p> + +<p>“But Ole, here, is a Norwegian,” suggested Sanford.</p> + +<p>“No matter. Have him put into your passport as +your courier or servant.”</p> + +<p>“All right; we will see him to-morrow,” replied +the coxswain; and the problem seemed to be solved.</p> + +<p>The next day they went to the American legation, +but the minister had gone to Upsala for a week, and +the secretary declined to issue the passports, because +the boys could not prove that they were citizens of the +United States. Vexed and discouraged, they wandered +about the city till Friday noon, when an English +steamer came into port. They stood on the quay, +watching the movements of the passengers as they +landed. They had almost concluded to take a steamer +to Stettin, Lübeck, or some other port in Germany; but +Russia was a strange land, and they were not willing +to abandon the idea of seeing its sights.</p> + +<p>“I wonder whether this steamer goes any farther,” +said Stockwell.</p> + +<p>“I don’t know,” added Sanford.</p> + +<p>“Perhaps she goes to St. Petersburg. It may be +her officers are not so particular about the confounded +passports.”</p> + +<p>“But you can’t stay in Russia over night without +one, even if you get there.”</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_334" id="Page_334">[Pg 334]</a></span> +“The American minister will fit us out with them. +I expect to find a letter of credit in St. Petersburg, +and that will prove that I am an American.”</p> + +<p>“Let us go on board of the steamer and ascertain +where she is going,” continued Sanford, as he led the +way across the plank, which had been extended from +the deck to the stone pier.</p> + +<p>The boys went upon the hurricane deck, where +they had seen an officer who looked as though he +might be the captain.</p> + +<p>“Do you go to St. Petersburg, captain?” asked the +coxswain.</p> + +<p>“No; we return to London, touching only at Copenhagen,” +replied the officer.</p> + +<p>“That’s too bad!” exclaimed Stockwell.</p> + +<p>“So it is,” said a tall man, who had followed the +runaways up the steps from the lower deck. “But +you are not going to St. Petersburg without the rest +of us—are you?”</p> + +<p>Sanford was startled, and turning sharp around, +saw Peaks, who had come out of the cabin as the boys +stepped on board. He had followed them to the hurricane +deck, and suspecting that something was wrong, +he had waited till the coxswain’s question betrayed +their intention.</p> + +<p>“No, we are not going to St. Petersburg; we are +waiting for the ship,” replied Sanford, recovering his +self-possession in an instant.</p> + +<p>“O, you are? All right, then. But the last I heard +of you was, that you were all on your way to Copenhagen +to join the ship,” added the boatswain.</p> + +<p>“So we were, Mr. Peaks; but after we had taken +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_335" id="Page_335">[Pg 335]</a></span> +breakfast at a station on the railroad, we went to have +a little walk, and see something of the country. We +thought we had time enough, but the train—confound +it!—went off without us. We were terribly provoked, +but we couldn’t help ourselves, you know; so we +made our way back to this city.”</p> + +<p>“I think you must have been very badly provoked,” +said Peaks.</p> + +<p>“O, we were,—honor bright.”</p> + +<p>“But you thought you would go over to St. Petersburg +before the ship arrived?”</p> + +<p>“Certainly not; we had no idea of going to St. +Petersburg.”</p> + +<p>“And that’s the reason you asked whether this +steamer was going there,—because you hadn’t any +idea of going.”</p> + +<p>“We know very well that we can’t go to St. Petersburg +without our passports, which are on board of the +ship,” protested Sanford.</p> + +<p>“Yes, I understand; but who is this?” asked +Peaks, as he glanced at Ole.</p> + +<p>“That’s Ole Amundsen; don’t you remember +him?”</p> + +<p>“I think I do. And he is on a lark with you.”</p> + +<p>“We are not on a lark. We have been trying with +all our might to find the ship, for the last fortnight; +and we are bound to do so, or die in the attempt,” said +Stockwell.</p> + +<p>“And Ole has been with you all the time?”</p> + +<p>“Yes, sir; we couldn’t have done anything without +him.”</p> + +<p>“And would have been on board the ship long +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_336" id="Page_336">[Pg 336]</a></span> +ago, if you hadn’t had him to speak the lingo for +you.”</p> + +<p>“When we tell you our story, you will see that we +have done our best to find the ship.”</p> + +<p>“I don’t know that I care to hear any more of your +story; it’s too much story for me, and you can tell it +to Mr. Lowington, who will be here by to-morrow, +I think. Very likely you can take me to a good +hotel.”</p> + +<p>“Yes, sir; we are staying at the Hotel Rydberg, +which is the best in Stockholm.”</p> + +<p>“Heave ahead, then.”</p> + +<p>The runaways led the way.</p> + +<p>“Do you talk the Swedish lingo, Ole?” asked the +boatswain.</p> + +<p>“Yes, sir.”</p> + +<p>“Where did you stow yourself, when we went into +Christiansand?”</p> + +<p>“In the second cutter, sir,” replied the waif, +laughing.</p> + +<p>“Exactly so; you were to go with her crew when +they left.”</p> + +<p>“No, sir; I didn’t know a single one of them.”</p> + +<p>“What did you hide for, then?”</p> + +<p>“Because I didn’t want the pilot to see me.”</p> + +<p>“Why not?” asked the boatswain.</p> + +<p>But this was as far as Ole would go in that direction. +Neither man nor boy could extort from him the +secret he so persistently retained. A short walk +brought the party to the Hotel Rydberg.</p> + +<p>“This gentleman wants a room,” said Sanford to +the porter.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_337" id="Page_337">[Pg 337]</a></span> +“No. 29,” said the man, calling a servant. “Did +you get your passports, young men?”</p> + +<p>Sanford drew back, and made energetic signs to the +porter to keep still; but the official failed to understand +him.</p> + +<p>“No; they haven’t got them yet,” replied Peaks. +“The fact is, all the passports are on board the ship.”</p> + +<p>“But the young gentlemen were very anxious to +obtain new ones, so that they could go to St. Petersburg. +They intended to leave by this morning’s +steamer, but no tickets can be had without passports.”</p> + +<p>Both Sanford and Stockwell shook their heads to +the stupid porter, who was remarkably intelligent on +all other points; but somehow he did not see them, or +could not comprehend them.</p> + +<p>“It’s too bad about those passports—isn’t it, my +lads?” laughed Peaks, turning to the runaways. +“Here’s more proof that you hadn’t the least idea of +going to St. Petersburg.”</p> + +<p>“I was very sorry for the young gentlemen, and did +the best I could for them,” added the gentlemanly +porter.</p> + +<p>“No doubt you did; and I’m very much obliged to +you for the trouble you took,” replied the good-natured +boatswain.</p> + +<p>“No. 29, sir?” interposed the servant, with the key +in his hand.</p> + +<p>“Ay, ay, my hearty. But, young gentlemen, I want +to save you from any more terrible disappointments +and awful vexations in finding the ship. I’m going +up to my bunk, and if I don’t find you here when I +come down, I shall call on the American consul, and +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_338" id="Page_338">[Pg 338]</a></span> +ask him to put the police on your track. You shall +find the ship this time, or perish in the attempt, sure.”</p> + +<p>“Here’s a go!” exclaimed Stockwell, as the servant +conducted the boatswain up the stairs to his +chamber.</p> + +<p>“What did you say anything to him about the passports +for?” snapped Sanford to the porter.</p> + +<p>The official in uniform by this time understood the +matter, and apologized, promising to make it all right +with the tall gentleman, and to swear that not a word +had been said to him or any one else about passports. +It was his business to please everybody, and his perquisites +depended upon his skill in doing so.</p> + +<p>“What did Peaks mean about police?” said Sanford, +as the trio seated themselves near the front door +of the hotel.</p> + +<p>“He means what he says; confound him, he always +does!” replied Stockwell. “He intends to treat +us as runaway seamen, and have us arrested if we +attempt to leave.”</p> + +<p>“We are trapped,” muttered Sanford. “What’s +Peaks doing up here?”</p> + +<p>“I don’t know, unless he is looking for us.”</p> + +<p>“It makes no difference now. We are caught, and +we may as well make the best of it.”</p> + +<p>“It’s all up with us,” added the coxswain. “Peaks +knows what he is about, and there isn’t much chance +of getting the weather-gage of him.”</p> + +<p>The boatswain came down in a short time. He was +cool and good-natured, and knew exactly how to deal +with the parties in hand.</p> + +<p>“Now, young gentlemen, if you are going to Russia, +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_339" id="Page_339">[Pg 339]</a></span> +don’t let me detain you. If you wish to go any +where else, I shall not meddle myself. I shall let the +American consul attend to the matter. I have business +here, and I can’t keep an eye on you. But if you +want to be fair and square, and not break your hearts +because you can’t find the ship, just be in sight when +I want to know where you are.”</p> + +<p>“We shall be right on your heels all the time, Mr. +Peaks. If you don’t object, we will go with you. +We know the way round Stockholm, and will help +you all we can,” said Stockwell.</p> + +<p>“That’s sensible.”</p> + +<p>“We will show you out to the Djurgarden,” added +Sanford.</p> + +<p>“Never mind the shows. I want Ole to talk for me, +and I don’t object to your company,” replied the boatswain.</p> + +<p>“I beg your pardon, sir,” said the porter, presenting +himself to Peaks at this moment. “I made a bad mistake. +It was not these young gentlemen who wanted +the passports. It was another party.”</p> + +<p>“Exactly. I understand,” replied the boatswain, +turning to the boys with a significant smile on his +bronzed face.</p> + +<p>“They were waiting for you, and were very anxious +to join their ship.”</p> + +<p>“It was very kind of them to wait for me, when +they hadn’t the least idea I was coming. All right, +my hearty; you needn’t trouble yourself to smooth it +over. How much did you pay him for those lies, +Sanford?”</p> + +<p>“Not a cent, sir!”</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_340" id="Page_340">[Pg 340]</a></span> +“Never mind; don’t bother your heads any more +about it. I understand the matter now as well as I +shall after you have explained it for a week,” answered +Peaks, as he left the hotel, followed by the discomfited +trio.</p> + +<p>The boatswain did not deem it expedient to explain +to them his business in Stockholm. He found people +enough who spoke English, so that he was able to +dispense with the services of Ole as interpreter. He +ascertained that no such vessel as the Rensdyr had +yet arrived, and satisfied with this information, he +went out to the Djurgarden with his charge, dined +at Hasselbacken, and made himself quite comfortable.</p> + +<p>After breakfast the next morning, with Ole’s assistance, +he chartered one of the little steamers, which +was about the size of the ship’s second cutter, and, +taking the trio with him, sailed out towards the +Baltic.</p> + +<p>“Where are you going, Mr. Peaks?” asked Sanford, +deeply mystified by the movements of the boatswain.</p> + +<p>“I’m going to make a trip down to the Baltic, to +see what I can see,” replied Peaks.</p> + +<p>“Are you going for the fun of it?”</p> + +<p>“Well, that depends upon how you view it. I suppose +you are going for the fun of it, whether I am or +not.”</p> + +<p>“But we would like to know what is up,” added +Sanford.</p> + +<p>“Young gentlemen should not be inquisitive,” +laughed the old salt.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_341" id="Page_341">[Pg 341]</a></span> +“Because, if you are going out to meet the ship, in +order to put us on board—”</p> + +<p>“I’m not going for any such purpose,” interposed +the boatswain. “I shouldn’t take all that trouble on +your account.”</p> + +<p>“But where are you going?”</p> + +<p>“That’s my affair, my lad.”</p> + +<p>“We don’t mean to give you any trouble on our +account,” said Sanford, who could not readily dispossess +himself of the belief that the expedition was to +put his party on board of the ship when she hove in +sight.</p> + +<p>“Of course you don’t, my tender lambs. You have +been so anxious to find the ship, and get on board, +it would be cruel to suspect you of any mischief,” +laughed Peaks.</p> + +<p>“But, honor bright, Mr. Peaks, whatever we intended, +we are ready now to do just what you say, and +return to the ship as soon as we can.”</p> + +<p>“You are all nice boys. You have had a good time, +and I think you ought to be satisfied.”</p> + +<p>“We are satisfied; but I suppose we shall have no +liberty again, after we go on board.”</p> + +<p>“Perhaps you will; the principal isn’t hard with +the boys when they come right square up to the mark; +but you can’t humbug him.”</p> + +<p>“But, honestly, Mr. Peaks, we tried to find the ship, +and—”</p> + +<p>“There, there, lads,” interposed the boatswain, “I +don’t believe you will have any liberty.”</p> + +<p>“Why not?”</p> + +<p>“Because you want to humbug the principal; and +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_342" id="Page_342">[Pg 342]</a></span> +me, too—but that’s no account. If you want to make +the best of it, toe the mark. Don’t have any lies in +your heart or on your tongue. Tell the whole truth, +and you will make more by it; but tell the truth whether +you make anything or not.”</p> + +<p>“You won’t believe anything we say,” protested +Sanford.</p> + +<p>“Of course I won’t, when you are lying. I call +things by their right names.”</p> + +<p>“We didn’t stave the boat at Christiansand.”</p> + +<p>“Yes, you did,” replied Peaks, plumply.</p> + +<p>“If you think so, it’s no use talking.”</p> + +<p>“Certainly not; don’t talk, then.”</p> + +<p>Sanford was not prepared for so grave a charge as +that of causing the accident to the second cutter; and +if the principal was of the same mind as the boatswain, +the case would go hard with the runaways. The coxswain +and Stockwell went into the bow of the little +steamer to discuss their situation, which they did very +earnestly for a couple of hours.</p> + +<p>“There’s the ship!” exclaimed Sanford, as he identified +the Young America, half a mile distant, leading +the squadron into the harbor of Stockholm.</p> + +<p>“So it is; now we are in for it. Peaks has come +out here with us to make sure that we don’t get away +from him,” added Stockwell.</p> + +<p>“If I had known as much last night as I know now, +I would have cleared out, in spite of consul and police. +If we are to be charged with smashing the second cutter, +we shall not go on shore again this summer.”</p> + +<p>“That’s so. But this boat is not headed for the +ship. Peaks don’t see her.”</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_343" id="Page_343">[Pg 343]</a></span> +“Yes, he does; there isn’t a craft of any sort within +five miles of us that he don’t see.”</p> + +<p>“There’s the ship, Mr. Peaks,” shouted Stockwell.</p> + +<p>“I see her.”</p> + +<p>But the boatswain continued on his course, paying +no attention to the ship. The squadron disappeared +among the islands, and the steamer went out into the +Baltic, keeping well in towards the shore. When any +small schooner appeared, he ran up and examined her +very carefully, overhauling three in this manner in the +course of the forenoon. At noon the boatswain piped +all hands to dinner, for he had procured a supply of +provisions at the hotel. Though he had chartered the +steamer with Ole acting as an interpreter, he gave no +hint of his plans or purposes. He made signs to the +helmsman where to go, and occasionally gave directions +through Ole.</p> + +<p>The fourth small schooner that he examined proved +to be the Rensdyr, and Peaks identified her by seeing +Clyde Blacklock, who stood on the forecastle, looking +out for the approaches to Stockholm. Possibly he +had seen the Young America, which passed the schooner, +though a mile distant.</p> + +<p>“Lay her alongside that small vessel,” said Peaks +to Ole.</p> + +<p>“That one!” exclaimed Ole, whose brown face +seemed to grow pale, as he looked at the Rensdyr.</p> + +<p>“That’s what I say, my lad.”</p> + +<p>The waif actually trembled; but he spoke to the +helmsman, who immediately put the boat about, and +headed her towards Stockholm.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_344" id="Page_344">[Pg 344]</a></span> +“No,” said Peaks, sternly. “That vessel.”</p> + +<p>He pointed to her, and Ole spoke again to the steersman, +but without any better result. The boatswain +was not to be thwarted. Going forward, he took the +little wheel into his own hands, and headed the +steamer towards the Rensdyr. Indicating by his signs +what he wanted, the man at the helm seemed to be +quite willing to obey orders when he knew what was +wanted.</p> + +<p>“Don’t go to that vessel, Mr. Peaks,” cried Ole, in +an agony of terror.</p> + +<p>“Why, my lad, what’s the matter with you?”</p> + +<p>“That’s the Rensdyr!”</p> + +<p>“I know it.”</p> + +<p>“He will kill me,” groaned Ole.</p> + +<p>“Who will?”</p> + +<p>“Captain Olaf.”</p> + +<p>“Well, who’s he?”</p> + +<p>“He is the captain of the Rensdyr. He will kill +me.”</p> + +<p>“No, he won’t, my hearty. You shall have fair +play. Who is he?”</p> + +<p>“My step-father, Olaf Petersen. He beat me and +starved me, and I ran away from the Rensdyr in the +boat.”</p> + +<p>“O, ho! The story is out—is it?”</p> + +<p>“That’s the whole truth, sir; it is, Mr. Peaks,” protested +Ole. “Don’t go to her!”</p> + +<p>“Don’t you be alarmed. You shall have fair +play,” added the stout boatswain, as the steamer ran +alongside the schooner, and the man at the bow made +her fast.</p> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 600px;"> +<img src="images/img003.jpg" width="600" height="370" alt="image" title="" /> +<span class="caption">Boarding the Rensdyr.</span> Page <a href="#Page_344">344</a>. +</div> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_345" id="Page_345">[Pg 345]</a></span> +Peaks was on her deck in another instant, and had +Clyde by the collar.</p> + +<p>“I want you, my lad,” said he.</p> + +<p>“Let me alone!” cried the Briton, who had not +recognized his tyrant till he was in his grasp, for the +simple reason that he did not expect to see him at that +time and place.</p> + +<p>“No use to kick or yell, my jolly Briton. I never +let go,” added the boatswain.</p> + +<p>At this moment there was a yell from the steamer. +Captain Olaf no sooner discovered his lost step-son, +than he sprang upon him like a tiger. Ole howled +in his terror. Peaks dragged Clyde on board the +steamer, and tossing him on the seat at the stern, turned +his attention to the skipper of the schooner.</p> + +<p>“Steady! hold up, my hearty,” said he, pulling the +old Norwegian from his prey.</p> + +<p>“My boy! My son! He steal my boat, and leave +me,” said Olaf, furiously.</p> + +<p>“He says you didn’t treat him well; that you starved +and beat him.”</p> + +<p>“I’ll bet Ole told the truth,” interposed Clyde, who +seemed suddenly to have laid aside his wrath. “Captain +Olaf is a brute.”</p> + +<p>“How’s that, my lad? Do you know anything +about it?” asked Peaks.</p> + +<p>“I know the skipper is the ugliest man I ever met +in my life,” answered Clyde.</p> + +<p>“Won’t you except me, my bold Briton?”</p> + +<p>“No; I paid my passage, and haven’t had enough to +eat to keep soul and body together. Besides that, he +tried to make me work, and I did do some things. If +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_346" id="Page_346">[Pg 346]</a></span> +I had been obliged to stay on board another day, I +should have jumped overboard,” continued Clyde. “I +begin to think I was a fool for leaving the ship.”</p> + +<p>“I began to think so at the first of it,” added Peaks.</p> + +<p>“Ole is my son; I must have him,” growled the +skipper.</p> + +<p>“I have nothing to do with Ole; he may go where +he pleases,” said the boatswain.</p> + +<p>Olaf spoke to his step-son in his own language, and +for a few moments the dialogue between them was +very violent.</p> + +<p>“Cast off, forward, there; give them the Swedish +of that, Ole,” shouted Peaks.</p> + +<p>“Must I go on board of the Rensdyr?” asked the +trembling waif.</p> + +<p>“Do just as you please.”</p> + +<p>“Then I shall stay, and go to the ship.”</p> + +<p>“No, he shall not; he shall come with me,” said +Olaf, making a spring at Ole.</p> + +<p>But Peaks, who had promised to see fair play, interfered, +and with no more force than was necessary, +compelled the skipper to return to the schooner. The +steamer shoved off, and amid the fierce yells of Olaf, +steamed towards Stockholm. As she went on her +way, Ole told his story. At the death of his father, +who was the master of a small vessel, he had gone to +England with a gentleman who had taken a fancy to +him, and worked there a year. The next summer he +had accompanied his employer in an excursion through +Norway, and found his mother had married Olaf Petersen. +She prevailed upon him to leave his master, +and he went to sea with her husband. Then his mother +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_347" id="Page_347">[Pg 347]</a></span> +died, and the skipper abused him to such a degree, +that he determined to leave the vessel. Olaf had +twice brought him back, and then watched him so +closely, that he could find no opportunity to repeat the +attempt when the Rensdyr was in port.</p> + +<p>On the day before the ship had picked him up, Olaf +had thrashed him soundly, and had refused to let him +have his supper. Olaf and his man drank too much +finkel that night, and left Ole at the helm. Early in the +evening, he lashed the tiller, and taking to the boat, with +the north star for his guide, pulled towards the coast +of Norway. Before morning he was exhausted with +hunger and fatigue. He had lost one oar while asleep, +and the other was a broken one. At daylight he saw +nothing of the Rensdyr, and feeling tolerably safe, had +gone to sleep again, when he was awakened by the +hail from the ship.</p> + +<p>“But why did you leave the ship?” asked Peaks.</p> + +<p>“Because I was afraid of the pilot. I thought he and +other people would make me go back to Olaf.”</p> + +<p>“Olaf has no claim upon you. He is neither your +father nor your guardian.”</p> + +<p>“I was afraid.”</p> + +<p>“Where was your vessel bound?”</p> + +<p>“To Bremen, where she expected to get a cargo for +Copenhagen. I suppose she found another cargo there +for Stockholm.”</p> + +<p>“I don’t blame you, Ole, for leaving him,” said +Clyde. “Olaf is the worst man I ever saw. When +he got drunk, he abused me and the men. I had +to keep out of his way, or I believe he would have +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_348" id="Page_348">[Pg 348]</a></span> +killed me, though I was a passenger, and paid my +fare.”</p> + +<p>At three o’clock in the afternoon, the little steamer +ran alongside the ship, and the party went on board, +though the principal and all the officers and crew were +on shore.</p> + + + +<hr style="width: 65%;" /> +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_349" id="Page_349">[Pg 349]</a></span></p> +<h2>CHAPTER XX.</h2> + +<p class="center"><strong>STOCKHOLM AND ITS SURROUNDINGS.</strong></p> + + +<p>After the professor’s lecture on board of the +ship, the students were piped to dinner. According +to his usual custom, Paul Kendall, with his +lady, took rooms at the hotel, and in this instance his +example was followed by Shuffles. Dr. Winstock +and Captain Lincoln had already accepted an invitation +from Paul to spend the afternoon with him in a +ride through the city; and as soon as the boats landed +at the quay, they hastened to keep the appointment, +while the students scattered all over the city to take a +general view.</p> + +<p>“Well, Paul, how do you find the hotel?” asked the +doctor, when the party were seated in the carriage.</p> + +<p>“Very good; it is one of the best hotels I have +seen in Europe.”</p> + +<p>“It has an excellent location, but I think there was +no such hotel when I was here before, and I staid at +the Hötel Kung Carl.”</p> + +<p>“This is a bath-house,” said the <em>commissionnaire</em>, +as the carriage turned the corner at the hotel, and he +pointed to a large, square building, with a court-yard +in the middle.</p> + +<p>“That looks well for the cleanliness of the people, +if they support such fine establishments as that.”</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_350" id="Page_350">[Pg 350]</a></span> +“Three classes of baths, sir,” added Möller, the +guide. “In the first class you have a dressing-room, +and an attendant to scrub you, and showers, douches, +and everything of the sort. This is Drottninggatan, +the principal street of the city,” added the man, as +the carriage turned into another street.</p> + +<p>“In other words, Queen Street,” explained the +surgeon.</p> + +<p>“It is rather a narrow street for the principal one,” +said Paul.</p> + +<p>“All the streets of Stockholm are narrow, or nearly +all; and very few of them have sidewalks.”</p> + +<p>“This street looks very much like the streets at +home. The shops are about the same thing. There’s +a woman in a queer dress,” added Captain Lincoln.</p> + +<p>“That’s a Dalecarlian woman. They used to row +the boats about the waters of the city, coming down +from Dalecarlia to spend the summer here; but the +little steamers have taken the business all away from +them. They hired a boat for the season, and paid +the owner one half of the fares.”</p> + +<p>“Their costume is rather picturesque,” added +Paul.</p> + +<p>“But that woman is far from handsome,” laughed +Mrs. Kendall.</p> + +<p>“None of them are pretty,” replied the doctor.</p> + +<p>The dress was a rather short petticoat, with a fanciful +bodice, in which red predominated. Quite a +number of them were seen by the party during their +stay in Stockholm, but all of them had coarse features +and clumsy forms.</p> + +<p>The carriage returned to the centre of the city by +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_351" id="Page_351">[Pg 351]</a></span> +another street, passing through Carl XIII. Torg, or +square, where stands the statue of that king.</p> + +<p>“There is the Café Blanche, where they have music +every afternoon in summer, with beer, coffee, and +other refreshments. The Swedes are very fond of +these gardens,” said Möller. “Here is the Hotel Rydberg. +This is Gustaf Adolf Torget, and that is his +statue.”</p> + +<p>Crossing the bridge to the little island in the stream, +the carriage stopped, to enable the party to look +down into the garden, which is called Strömparterren, +where a band plays, and refreshments are dispensed +in the warm evenings of summer. Passing the immense +palace, the tourists drove along the Skeppsbron, +or quay, which is the principal landing-place of +the steamers. Crossing another bridge over the south +stream, or outlet of Lake Mäler, they entered the +southern suburb of the city, called Södermalm. Ascending +to the highest point of land, the party were +conducted to the roof of a house, where a magnificent +view of the city and its surroundings was obtained.</p> + +<p>“We will sit down here and rest a while,” said the +doctor, suiting the action to the words. “This promontory, +or some other one near it, was formerly called +Agne’s Rock, and there is a story connected with it. +Agne was the king of Sweden about 220 B.C. In a +war with the Finns, he killed their king, and captured +his daughter Skiolfa. The princess, according to the +custom of those days, became the wife, but practically +the slave, of her captor. She was brought to Sweden, +where Agne and his retainers got beastly drunk on the +occasion of celebrating the memorial rites of her father. +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_352" id="Page_352">[Pg 352]</a></span> +Skiolfa, with the assistance of her Finnish +companions, passed a rope through the massive gold +chain on the neck of the king, and hung him to a +tree, beneath which their tent was pitched. Having +avenged the death of her father, the princess and +her friends embarked in their boats, and escaped to +Finland.”</p> + +<p>“They finished him, then,” laughed Captain Lincoln. +“But what sort of boats had they?”</p> + +<p>“I don’t know,” replied Dr. Winstock.</p> + +<p>“Could they cross the Baltic in boats?”</p> + +<p>“Yes. When you go to Finland you will find that +the course will be through islands nearly all the way. +There is no difficulty in crossing in an open boat.”</p> + +<p>“What is the population of Stockholm?” asked +Paul.</p> + +<p>“One hundred and thirty-five thousand,” replied +Möller. “It was founded by King Birger in 1250.”</p> + +<p>“There is a monitor,” said Paul, pointing to the +waters near Castelholmen, not far from the anchorage +of the squadron.</p> + +<p>“We have four in the Swedish navy, and Russia +has plenty of them. Ericsson, who invented them, +was a Swede, you know.”</p> + +<p>After the tourists had surveyed the panorama to +their satisfaction, they descended, and entering the carriage, +drove over to the Riddarholm, where the guide +pointed out the church, the statue of Gustavus Vasa, +the house of the Nobles, and other objects of interest. +Returning to the quay, they stopped to look at the +little steamers which were whisking about in every +direction.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_353" id="Page_353">[Pg 353]</a></span> +“That is the National Museum,” said Möller, pointing +to a large and elegant building across the stream.</p> + +<p>“I should like to sail in one of those little boats,” +said Mrs. Kendall.</p> + +<p>“We can go over and back in ten minutes, if you +like,” added the guide.</p> + +<p>“Let us go.”</p> + +<p>The party alighted from the carriage, and entered +the little boat.</p> + +<p>“How much did you pay, Paul?” asked Grace.</p> + +<p>“The fare is no larger than the boat. It is three +öre each person.”</p> + +<p>“How much is that?”</p> + +<p>“Let me see; eight tenths of a cent, or less than a +halfpenny, English.”</p> + +<p>The excursionists returned without landing.</p> + +<p>“I should like to go again,” said Grace. “It is +delightful sailing in such dear little steamers.”</p> + +<p>“If you please, we will ride over to the Djurgarden, +and return by the steamer, which will land us at +the Strömparterre,” said the guide.</p> + +<p>This proposition was accepted, and by a circuitous +route they reached the place indicated, which, in +English, is the Deer Garden. It is on an island, separated +from the main land by a channel. The southern +portion of it is a thickly-populated village, but the +principal part of the island is laid out as a park, of +which the people of Stockholm are justly proud. It +was originally a sterile tract of land: the first improvements +converted it into a deer park for the royal +use; but Gustaf III. and Charles (XIV.) John, as Bernadotte +was styled, turned it into a public park. It is +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_354" id="Page_354">[Pg 354]</a></span> +laid out in walks and avenues beautifully shaded with +oaks and other trees. The land is undulating, and parts +of it command splendid views of the islands and watercourses +in the vicinity. On the outskirts is an asylum +for the blind and for deaf mutes. Rosendahl, a country +house, built by Charles John in 1830, and often +occupied by him, is quite near the park.</p> + +<p>The party drove through the principal avenues of +the garden, and stopped at the bust of Bellman, the +great poet of Sweden, whose birthday is annually celebrated +here with music and festivities. Around the +park are various tea-gardens, cafés, and other places +of amusement, including a theatre, circus, and opera-house +for summer use. There is an Alhambra, with +a restaurant; a Tivoli, with a concert-room; a Novilla, +with a winter garden, and a concert hall for summer. +The tourists stopped at Hasselbacken, which is celebrated +for its good dinners at moderate prices. The +visitors seated themselves in a broad veranda, overlooking +a garden filled with little tables, in the centre +of which was a kiosk for the music. The viands, especially +the salmon, were very nice, and the coffee, +as usual, was excellent. After dinner a short walk +brought the party to the landing-place of the little +steamers, where, paying eight öre, or about two cents, +each, they embarked. The boat flew along at great +speed for such a small craft, whisked under the Skeppsholm +bridge, and in a few moments landed the tourists +at the circular stone quay, which surrounds the +Strömparterre. Paul and his lady walked to the hotel, +and the doctor and the captain went to the Skeppsbron, +where a boat soon conveyed them to the ship.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_355" id="Page_355">[Pg 355]</a></span> +Sanford and Stockwell had been on board several +hours, and had had time to make up their minds in regard +to their future course. They had considered the +advice of the boatswain, and finally concluded to adopt +it. Clyde Blacklock was as tame as a parlor poodle. +His experience in running away, especially after his +three days on board of the Rensdyr, was far from +satisfactory.</p> + +<p>“I suppose I must go into that cage again,” said +he, when he went on board.</p> + +<p>“That depends on yourself,” replied Peaks. “If +you say that you don’t intend to run away again, we +shall not put you in the brig.”</p> + +<p>“I think I won’t,” added Clyde.</p> + +<p>“You think?”</p> + +<p>“Well, I know I won’t. I will try to do the best I +can.”</p> + +<p>“That’s all we ask,” said Peaks. “You can say +all this to the principal.”</p> + +<p>Mr. Lowington returned earlier than most of the +ship’s company, and Peaks reported to him immediately. +The coxswain and his associate were called +up first.</p> + +<p>“We have come on board, sir,” said Sanford, touching +his cap.</p> + +<p>“I see you have. You have been gone a long time, +and I have been told that you had some difficulty in +finding the ship,” added the principal.</p> + +<p>“We have concluded to tell the whole truth, sir,” +said Sanford, hanging his head.</p> + +<p>“I am very glad to hear that.”</p> + +<p>“We didn’t wish to find the ship.”</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_356" id="Page_356">[Pg 356]</a></span> +“Can you explain the accident by which the second +cutter was stove at Christiansand?”</p> + +<p>“I did it on purpose; but no other fellow was to +blame, or knew anything about it.”</p> + +<p>“I am astonished to think you should expose the +lives of your crew, by pushing your boat right into +the path of a steamer.”</p> + +<p>“I didn’t do it, sir, till the steamer had stopped her +wheels. I wanted to get on board of her, and leave +the ship. In Norway, I cheated the rest of the party, +and led them out of the way.”</p> + +<p>“How could you do that?”</p> + +<p>“I told Ole what to say.”</p> + +<p>“Then you wished to travel alone?”</p> + +<p>“Yes, sir.”</p> + +<p>Sanford and Stockwell made a clean breast of it, +explaining how they had lost trains and steamers, and +thus avoided returning to the ship.</p> + +<p>“Then Ole is a rogue as well as the rest of you, it +seems.”</p> + +<p>“He did what I told him to do, and paid him for +doing,” replied Sanford.</p> + +<p>“He is a runaway, too,” interposed the boatswain, +who proceeded to tell the story of the waif. “The +boy has suffered a good deal from the ill-treatment of +his step-father.”</p> + +<p>“I am sorry for him; but his character does not +seem to be up to the average of that of his countrymen. +I don’t think we want him on board,” replied +Mr. Lowington. “As you say this Olaf has no +claim for his services, we will see about him.”</p> + +<p>The Rensdyr had by this time arrived at the quay, +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_357" id="Page_357">[Pg 357]</a></span> +and it was not believed that Captain Olaf would permit +his step-son, whose services seemed to be of so +much value to him, to escape without making an effort +to reclaim him. After all hands had returned from +the shore, he put in an appearance, and seeing Peaks +in the waist, directed his steps towards him. The +profusion of fine uniforms, the order and discipline that +reigned on deck, and the dignified mien of the instructors +who were walking back and forth, seemed to produce +an impression upon the mind of the rough skipper, +for he took off his hat, and appeared to be as +timid as though he had come into the presence of the +king.</p> + +<p>“Good evening, Captain Olaf,” said the boatswain.</p> + +<p>“I want the boy Ole,” replied the skipper, bowing, +and returning the salutation.</p> + +<p>“You must talk with the principal about that.”</p> + +<p>“I don’t understand.”</p> + +<p>Peaks conducted Olaf to the quarter-deck, where +Mr. Lowington was conversing with Mr. and Mrs. +Kendall, who had come on board to visit their old +friends.</p> + +<p>“This is the man that claims Ole,” said the boatswain.</p> + +<p>“I want the boy, sir,” added Captain Olaf, bowing +as gracefully as he knew how.</p> + +<p>“If Ole chooses to go with you, he may go,” replied +the principal.</p> + +<p>“He does not choose to go.”</p> + +<p>“I certainly shall not compel him to go,” continued +Mr. Lowington.</p> + +<p>“I will make him go.”</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_358" id="Page_358">[Pg 358]</a></span> +“I shall allow no violence on board of this ship.”</p> + +<p>“But he is my boy; the son of my wife that is +dead.”</p> + +<p>“He is not your son, and you have no more claim +on him than I have. The boy is an orphan. Have +you been appointed his guardian?”</p> + +<p>This question was out of Olaf’s depth in the English +language; but it was translated into Danish by Professor +Badois, and the skipper did not pretend that he +had any legal authority over the boy.</p> + +<p>“But I have fed and clothed him, and he must work +for me,” said he.</p> + +<p>“Ole says you did not feed him, and he had nothing +but a few dirty rags on when we picked him up. I +have nothing to do with the matter. Ole is free to go +or stay, just as he pleases,” replied the principal, turning +away from the skipper, to intimate that he wished +to say nothing more about the matter.</p> + +<p>“The boy is here, and I shall make him go with +me,” said Olaf, looking ugly enough to do anything.</p> + +<p>Mr. Lowington glanced at Peaks, and appeared to +be satisfied that no harm would come to Ole. Olaf +walked back into the waist, and then to the forecastle, +glancing at every student he met, in order to identify +his boy.</p> + +<p>“See here, Norway; there comes your guardian +genius,” said Scott, who, with a dozen others, had +gathered around the trembling waif, determined to +protect him if their services were needed. “Bear a +hand, and tumble down the fore-hatch. Herr Skippenboggin +is after you.”</p> + +<p>Ole heeded this good advice, and followed by his +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_359" id="Page_359">[Pg 359]</a></span> +supporters, he descended to the steerage. Olaf saw +him, and was about to descend the ladder, when Peaks +interfered.</p> + +<p>“You can’t go down there,” said he, decidedly.</p> + +<p>“I want the boy,” replied Olaf.</p> + +<p>“No visitors in the steerage without an invitation.”</p> + +<p>“I will have Ole;” and the skipper began to descend.</p> + +<p>“Avast, my hearty,” interposed the boatswain, laying +violent hands on Olaf, and dragging him to the +deck.</p> + +<p>Bitts, the carpenter, and Leach, the sailmaker, +placed themselves beside the boatswain, as the Norwegian +picked himself up.</p> + +<p>“You may leave the ship, now,” said Peaks, pointing +to the accommodation stairs.</p> + +<p>Olaf looked at the three stout men before him, and +prudence triumphed over his angry passions.</p> + +<p>“I will have the boy yet,” said he, as he walked +to the stairs, closely attended by the three forward +officers.</p> + +<p>He went down into his boat, declaring that he would +seize upon Ole the first time he caught him on shore.</p> + +<p>“Where is Clyde?” asked Mr. Lowington, as soon +as the savage skipper had gone.</p> + +<p>“He is forward, sir; he behaves like a new man, +and says he will not run away,” replied Peaks.</p> + +<p>“Send him aft.”</p> + +<p>“Ay, ay, sir.”</p> + +<p>Clyde went aft. He was a boy of quick impulses +and violent temper. He had been accustomed to have +his own way; and this had done more to spoil him +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_360" id="Page_360">[Pg 360]</a></span> +than anything else. He had to learn that there was a +power greater than himself, to which he must submit. +He had twice run away, and failed both times. Three +days of fear and absolute misery on board of the +Rensdyr had given him time to think. He determined, +when he reached Stockholm, to return to his +mother, and try to be a better boy. Peaks, in the little +steamer, had come upon him like a ghost. He had +expected never again to see the ship, or his particular +tormentor; and to have the latter appear to him in +such an extraordinary manner was very impressive, to +say the least. He realized that he must submit; but +this thought, like that of resistance before, was only +an impulse.</p> + +<p>Clyde submitted, and was even candid enough to +say so to the principal, who talked to him very gently +and kindly for an hour, pointing out to him the ruin +which he was seeking.</p> + +<p>“We will try you again, Clyde,” said Mr. Lowington. +“We will wipe out the past, and begin again. +You may go forward.”</p> + +<p>The next day was Sunday, and for a change, the +officers and crews of the several vessels were permitted +to land, and march to the English church in Stockholm. +The neat and pleasant little church was crowded to its +utmost capacity by the attendance of such a large +number. Mr. Agneau, the chaplain, was invited to +take a part in the service, and as Mrs. Kendall, Mrs. +Shuffles, and many of the ship’s company were good +singers, the vocal music was better than usual.</p> + +<p>On Monday morning commenced the serious business +of sight-seeing in Stockholm. The royal palace, +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_361" id="Page_361">[Pg 361]</a></span> +one of the largest and finest in Europe, and the most +prominent building in the city, was the first place to +be visited. It is four hundred and eighteen feet long, +by three hundred and ninety-one wide, with a large +court-yard in the middle, from which are the principal +entrances. The lower story is of granite; the rest of +brick, covered with stucco. The students walked +through the vast number of apartments it contains; +through red chambers, green chambers, blue chambers, +and yellow chambers, as they are designated, +through the royal chapel, which is as large as a good-sized +church, and through the throne-room, where the +king opens the sessions of the Diet. Several were devoted +to the Swedish orders of knighthood. The +ceilings and walls of the state apartments are beautifully +adorned with allegorical and mythological paintings.</p> + +<p>The chamber of Bernadotte, or Charles John, remains +just as it was during his last sickness. On the +bed lies his military cloak, which he wore in his great +campaigns. His cane, the gift of Charles XIII., stands +in the room. The walls are covered with green silk, +and adorned with portraits of the royal family. The +apartments actually occupied by the present king were +found to be far inferior in elegance to many republican +rooms. His chamber has a pine floor, with no carpet; +but it looked more home-like than the great barn-like +state-rooms. In a series of small and rather low apartments +are several collections of curious and antique articles, +such as a collection of arms, including a pair of +pistols presented to the king by President Lincoln; +and of pipes, containing every variety in use, in the +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_362" id="Page_362">[Pg 362]</a></span> +smoking-room. The king’s library looks like business, +for its volumes seemed to be for use rather than ornament. +The billiard-room is quite cosy, and his chamber +contains photographs of various royal personages, +as the Prince of Wales, the Queen of England, and +others, which look as though the king had friends, and +valued them like common people. His majesty paints +very well for a king, and the red cabinet contains pictures +by him, and by Oscar I. The queen’s apartments, +as well as the king’s, seemed to the boys like a +mockery of royalty, for they were quite plain and comfortable. +The entire palace contains five hundred and +eighty-three rooms.</p> + +<p>The whole forenoon was employed in visiting the +palace, and the students went on board the vessels to +dinner. As the day was pleasant, a boat excursion to +Drottningholm was planned, and the fourteen boats +of the squadron were soon in line. A pilot was in +the commodore’s barge, to indicate the course. Passing +under the North Bridge, the excursion entered +the waters of the Mäler Lake. A pull of two hours +among beautiful islands, covered with the fresh green of +spring, through narrow and romantic passages, brought +them to their destination. In some places, within five +miles of Stockholm, the scene was so quiet, and nature +so primitive, that the excursionists could have +believed they were hundreds of miles from the homes +of civilization. Two or three of the islands had a +house or two upon them; but generally they seemed +to be unimproved. The boats varied their order at +the command of Commodore Cumberland, and when +there were any spectators, nothing could exceed their +astonishment at the display.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_363" id="Page_363">[Pg 363]</a></span> +At Drottningholm, or Queen’s Island, there is a +fine palace, built by the widow of Charles X., and afterwards +improved and embellished by the kings of +Sweden. Attached to it is a beautiful garden, adorned +with fountains and statues. The party went through +the palace, which contains a great many historical +paintings, and some rooms fitted up in Chinese style. +As the students were about to embark, a char-a-banc, +a kind of open omnibus, drawn by four horses, drove +up to the palace, and a plainly-dressed lady alighted. +She stood on the portico, looking at the students; and +the pilot said she was the Queen Dowager, wife of +Oscar I. Of course the boys looked at her with quite as +much interest as she regarded them. The commodore +called for three cheers for the royal lady, who was the +daughter of Eugene Beauharnais, and granddaughter +of the Empress Josephine. She waved her handkerchief +in return for the salute, and the students +were soon pulling down the lake towards Stockholm.</p> + +<p>The next forenoon was devoted to the Royal Museum, +which has been recently erected. It contains a +vast quantity of Swedish antiquities and curiosities, +with illustrations of national manners and customs. +It contains specimens of the various implements used +in the ages of wood, stone, bronze, and iron, collections +of coins and medals, armor, engravings, sculptures, +and paintings, including a few works of the +great masters of every school in Europe. The students +were particularly interested in what Scott irreverently +called the “Old Clothes Room,” in which were deposited +in glass cases the garments and other articles +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_364" id="Page_364">[Pg 364]</a></span> +belonging to the Swedish kings and queens, such as +the cradle and toys of Charles XII., and the huge +sword with which he defended himself against the +Turks at Bender; the sword of Gustavus Vasa; the +costume of Gustaf III., which he wore when he was +shot in the opera-house by Ankarström; the baton of +Gustaf Adolf, and the watch of Queen Christina.</p> + +<p>In the afternoon the students made an excursion by +steamer to Ulriksdal, the summer residence of Bernadotte, +Oscar I., and of the present king. It is a +beautiful place, and is filled with objects of historical +interest. The furniture is neat, pretty, and comfortable. +The chamber of the king is the plainest of all, +but the bed was used by Gustaf II. in Germany. +Every chair, table, and mirror has its history. There +is a collection of beer mugs in one chamber, and of +pipes in another. The place is full of interest to the +curious. In the water in front of the palace were several +gilded pleasure-boats, and a fanciful steamer for +the use of the royal family.</p> + +<p>The steamer in which the party had gone to Ulriksdal +was one of the larger class, though the company +was all she could carry. She made her way through +the several arms of the sea, between the islands, passing +through two drawbridges. For the return trip +four of the smaller steamers had been engaged, each +of which would carry about fifty boys. A short distance +from the palace, the boats turned into a narrow +stream, passing under bridges, in places so contracted +that the engine had to be stopped, and the banks were +thoroughly washed. Then they entered a lagoon, bordered +with villas, and surrounded by pleasant scenery. +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_365" id="Page_365">[Pg 365]</a></span> +Landing at a point in the northern suburb, most of +the students walked through the city to the quay, +though several omnibuses ply between this point and +the centre of the city.</p> + +<p>The next day opened with a visit to Riddarholm. +The church, or Riddarholmskyrkan, on this island, was +formerly a convent, but is now the mausoleum of the +most celebrated kings of Sweden. It was once a +Gothic structure; but the addition of several chapels +on the sides, for monuments, has completely changed +the appearance of the structure. It is remarkable for +nothing except the tombs within it. Formerly it contained +a number of equestrian figures, clothed in armor, +which was valued as relics of the ancient time, +including that of Birger Jarl, the founder of the city, +and of Charles IX.; but all these have been removed +to the National Museum, which is certainly a more +appropriate place for them. On each side of the +church are the sepulchral chapels of Gustavus Adolphus, +Charles XII., Bernadotte, and Oscar I. The +Queen Désirée, wife of Bernadotte, and sister-in-law +of Joseph Bonaparte, with others of the royal family, +and some of the great captains of the Thirty Years’ +War, are buried here. In the chapels of Gustavus +and Charles XII. are placed many of the trophies +of their victories, such as flags, drums, swords, and +keys.</p> + +<p>The party then visited the Riddarhus, where the +nobles meet, which is the scene of several great historical +events, and contains the shields of three thousand +Swedish nobles. From this point the tourists +went to Mosebacke, a celebrated tea garden, on the +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_366" id="Page_366">[Pg 366]</a></span> +high land in the southern suburb, where they ascended +to the roof of the theatre in order to obtain a view of +the city and its surroundings.</p> + +<p>On Thursday, the students made an excursion to +Upsala, the ancient capital of Sweden, which contains +a fine old cathedral, where Gustavus Vasa and +two of his wives are buried. His tomb was hardly +more interesting to the Americans than that of Linnæus, +the great botanist, who was born in Upsala, +and buried in this church. Other Swedish kings +are also buried here. The party visited the university, +which contains some curious old books and +manuscripts, such as an old Icelandic Edda; the Bible, +with written notes by Luther and Melanchthon; +the Journal of Linnæus, and the first book ever printed +in Sweden, in 1483. The house of the great botanist +and the botanical garden were not neglected. +The tourists returned to Stockholm in a special +steamer, through an arm of Lake Mäler, and landed +at the Riddarholm. On Friday some of the students +went to the Navy Yard, and on board of a +monitor, while others wandered about the city and its +suburbs.</p> + +<p>After spending a week in the harbor, the voyagers +felt that they had seen enough of Sweden; and early +on Saturday morning, with a pilot on board of each +vessel, the squadron sailed for the Aland Islands, in +the Baltic, where the principal decided to pass a +week. The vessels lay in the channels between the +islands, and the students attended to the regular routine +of study and seamanship. Occasional excursions +were made on shore, mostly at the uninhabited islands. +<span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_367" id="Page_367">[Pg 367]</a></span> +Journals of what had been seen in Norway, Denmark, +and Sweden were written up; but the students were +very anxious to visit Russia.</p> + +<p>Ole Amundsen was very careful to avoid his step-father +while he remained in Stockholm. He hardly +went on shore, so great was his dread of the cruel +skipper of the Rensdyr; and no one rejoiced more +heartily than he to leave the Swedish waters. Mr. +Lowington did not desire to retain him on board; but +the waif begged so hard to remain, and the students +liked him so well, that he was finally engaged as an +assistant steward in the steerage, at twelve dollars a +month; but he made double this sum, besides, out of +the boys, by the exercise of his genius in mending +clothes, cleaning shoes, and similar services, which +the students preferred to pay for, rather than do themselves.</p> + +<p>Clyde Blacklock kept his promise as well as he +could, and soon learned his duty as a seaman. Though +he certainly improved, his violent temper and imperious +manners kept him continually in hot water. He +could not forget his old grudge against Burchmore, +and during an excursion on one of the Aland Islands, +he attacked him, but was soundly thrashed for his +trouble, and punished on board when his black eye +betrayed him. While he is improving there is hope +for him.</p> + +<p>The runaways promised so much and behaved so +well, that none of them were punished as yet, though +Sanford was deprived of his position as coxswain of +the second cutter; but whether they were to be allowed +any liberty in Russia, they were not informed.</p> + +<p><span class='pagenum'><a name="Page_368" id="Page_368">[Pg 368]</a></span> +At the close of the week among the islands, the +squadron was headed for Abo, in Finland, which is +now a province of Russia; and what they saw and +did there, and in other parts of the vast empire, will +be related in <span class="smcap">Northern Lands, or Young America +in Russia and Prussia</span>.</p> + + + + + + + + +<pre> + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of Up The Baltic, by Oliver Optic + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK UP THE BALTIC *** + +***** This file should be named 26653-h.htm or 26653-h.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/2/6/6/5/26653/ + +Produced by David Edwards, Anne Storer and the Online +Distributed Proofreading Team at http://www.pgdp.net (This +file was produced from scans of public domain material +produced by Microsoft for their Live Search Books site.) + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License (available with this file or online at +http://gutenberg.org/license). + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH F3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS' WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTIBILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need, is critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation web page at http://www.pglaf.org. + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Its 501(c)(3) letter is posted at +http://pglaf.org/fundraising. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at +809 North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887, email +business@pglaf.org. Email contact links and up to date contact +information can be found at the Foundation's web site and official +page at http://pglaf.org + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit http://pglaf.org + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: http://pglaf.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart is the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For thirty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + http://www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + + +</pre> + +</body> +</html> diff --git a/26653-h/images/hermann.jpg b/26653-h/images/hermann.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..998425e --- /dev/null +++ b/26653-h/images/hermann.jpg diff --git a/26653-h/images/img001.jpg b/26653-h/images/img001.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..88cb6c7 --- /dev/null +++ b/26653-h/images/img001.jpg diff --git a/26653-h/images/img002.jpg b/26653-h/images/img002.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..baaceb7 --- /dev/null +++ b/26653-h/images/img002.jpg diff --git a/26653-h/images/img003.jpg b/26653-h/images/img003.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..270e9bb --- /dev/null +++ b/26653-h/images/img003.jpg diff --git a/26653-h/images/imgfrontis.jpg b/26653-h/images/imgfrontis.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..d1df3be --- /dev/null +++ b/26653-h/images/imgfrontis.jpg diff --git a/26653-h/images/imgtitle.jpg b/26653-h/images/imgtitle.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..87a157f --- /dev/null +++ b/26653-h/images/imgtitle.jpg diff --git a/26653-h/images/r16.jpg b/26653-h/images/r16.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..de032d0 --- /dev/null +++ b/26653-h/images/r16.jpg diff --git a/26653-h/images/volume.jpg b/26653-h/images/volume.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..13c038a --- /dev/null +++ b/26653-h/images/volume.jpg |
